JP7161787B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Conventionally, in a pachinko game machine, an image display unit such as a liquid crystal display is provided on a game board on which a game area is formed, and a predetermined game is played on the image display unit. It is common to generate a special game state in which a game value is given to a player (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2015-177990 A

However, in the gaming machine described above, there is a risk that the player will get tired of the effect due to the chronic effect, and the interest in the game will decrease.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to enhance the interest of a game by performing a novel presentation.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1,
In a gaming machine equipped with a variable prize winning device that is converted to an open state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
The operation mode of the variable winning device includes a first opening mode and a second opening mode different from the first opening mode,
a display means capable of displaying an effect related to a game;
Production control means capable of controlling the display means;
a storage means for storing information related to winning of the variable winning device;
The effect control means can display the effect display related to the winning of the variable winning device on the display means in a game state advantageous to the player,
The storage means can store the information related to the first release mode and the information related to the second release mode in separate storage areas ,
The information related to the winning of the variable winning device is updated by the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device .

According to the present invention, since it is possible to perform a novel production, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the game board. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the rear structural member. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the lower movable accessory unit. FIG. 5 is a front view for explaining the operation of the first lower movable member; FIG. 11 is a front view for explaining the operation of the second lower movable member; FIG. 11 is a front view for explaining the operation of the second lower movable member; It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the upper movable accessory unit. It is a front view of an upper movable accessory unit. It is a figure explaining operation|movement of an upper movable accessory unit, (a) Front view, (b) Back view. It is a figure explaining operation|movement of an upper movable accessory unit, (a) Front view, (b) Back view. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the central movable accessory unit. It is a figure explaining operation|movement of a central movable accessory unit, (a) Front view, (b) Back view. It is a figure explaining operation|movement of a central movable accessory unit, (a) Front view, (b) Back view. It is a front view of a special variable winning device. It is a top view of a special variable winning device. It is a figure explaining operation|movement of an opening-and-closing member, (a) closed state, (b) open state. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the special variable winning device. It is a back view of a front wall member. It is a figure which shows a rear wall member, Comprising: (a) Front view, (b) It is a back view. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main body viewed from the front side; It is the figure seen from the left explaining operation|movement of an opening-and-closing member unit, (a) closed state, (b) open state. It is a figure which shows an opening-and-closing member, (a) is a top view, (b) is a front view. (a) A front view of the opening/closing member unit, (b) a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA. It is a bottom view explaining operation|movement of an opening-and-closing member unit, (a) closed state, (b) open state. It is a top view explaining the flow-down mode of the game ball in the special variable winning device. It is a figure explaining the flow-down aspect of the game ball in a special variable prize-winning device, and is (a) a top view and (b) a perspective view seen from the right side. It is a diagram for explaining the flow-down mode of game balls in the special variable winning device, and is a perspective view seen from the left. It is a front view explaining the flow-down mode of the game ball in the special variable winning device, (a) closed state, (b) open state. It is a figure explaining the behavior of a game ball at the time of opening an opening-and-closing member. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 9 is a flowchart for explaining checksum calculation processing; 10 is a flowchart for explaining initial value random number update processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart explaining input processing. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining switch read processing; FIG. 4 is a flowchart for explaining output processing; FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining payout command transmission processing; FIG. 6 is a flowchart for explaining random number update processing 1; 9 is a flowchart for explaining random number update processing 2; It is a flow chart for explaining a winning opening switch/state monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining fraud & prize-winning monitoring processing. 10 is a flowchart for explaining winning number counter update processing. It is a flowchart explaining a gaming machine state check process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout busy signal check process. It is a flow chart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flow chart explaining a start opening switch monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart for explaining hard random number acquisition processing; It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure starting mouth switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure reservation information determination process. It is a flow chart for explaining a big winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart for explaining the special figure usual processing. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot flag 1 setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining big-hit flag 2 setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining big-hit determination processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit determination processing. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 1 stop design setting process. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 2 stop design setting process. It is a flow chart explaining special figure information setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining fluctuation pattern setting processing. 10 is a flowchart for explaining allocation processing; 10 is a flowchart for explaining 2-byte allocation processing; 10 is a flowchart for explaining fluctuation start information setting processing; It is a flow chart explaining processing during special figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure display. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure display. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining a time reduction variation number update process; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining production mode information check processing. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 1; It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing 1 during small hit fanfare. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare/interval processing; FIG. It is a flow chart for explaining a process transition setting process during the opening of the big winning opening. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during the opening of the big winning opening. It is a flow chart for explaining a large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process. It is a flow chart for explaining a large winning opening remaining ball processing. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 2; It is a flow chart explaining jackpot end processing shift setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the big-hit completion|finish setting process 2. FIG. It is a flow chart explaining special figure usual processing shift setting processing 2. (a) is a flow chart for explaining the process during the small hit fanfare, (b) is a flow chart for explaining the process transition setting process during the small hit. It is a flowchart explaining processing during a small hit. It is a flow chart explaining small hit operation transition setting processing. It is a flow chart for explaining small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing. (a) is a flow chart for explaining small hit remaining ball processing, (b) is a flow chart for explaining small hit end processing transition setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining small hit end processing. It is a flow chart explaining special figure usual processing shift setting processing 3. 10 is a flowchart for explaining effect command setting processing; It is a flow chart explaining design variation control processing. It is a flow chart explaining normal figure game processing. 9 is a flowchart for explaining gate switch monitoring processing; It is a flow chart explaining general electric winning a prize switch monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining normal figure usual processing. It is a flow chart explaining normal figure usual processing shift setting processing 1. It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing during normal figure fluctuation. (a) is a flow chart for explaining the processing during normal pattern fluctuation, and (b) is a flow chart for explaining processing transition setting processing during normal pattern display. It is a flow chart explaining processing during normal figure display. It is a flow chart explaining processing transition setting processing in per normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining processing during a normal figure hit. It is a flowchart explaining normal electric operation transition setting processing. (a) is a flow chart for explaining normal electric remaining ball processing, (b) is a flow chart for explaining end processing transition setting processing per normal pattern. (a) is a flow chart for explaining the normal pattern per end process, (b) is a flow chart for explaining the normal pattern normal process transition setting process 2. FIG. 9 is a flowchart for explaining segment LED editing processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining magnet fraud monitoring processing; 10 is a flowchart for explaining board radio wave fraud monitoring processing. 10 is a flowchart for explaining external information editing processing; 10 is a flowchart for explaining external information editing processing; It is a flow chart explaining main prize ball signal edit processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining a starting port signal editing process; FIG. It is a figure explaining an example of the production|presentation in a special game state. It is a figure explaining an example of the production|presentation in a special game state. It is a figure explaining the selection rate of a state suggestion display. It is a flow chart explaining the main processing in the production control device. 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command check processing; 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command analysis processing; FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining single-shot command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining the look-ahead pattern system command processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining look-ahead variation command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining design system command processing. FIG. 11 is a flow chart for explaining variable command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining change production setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining a count effect setting process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare effect setting processing; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining round production setting processing. 9 is a flowchart for explaining interval effect setting processing; It is a flow chart explaining ending production setting processing. It is a figure explaining the modification of the production|presentation in a special game state. It is a figure explaining the modification of the production|presentation in a special game state. It is a figure explaining an example of the production|presentation in the special game state in a 1st modification. 10 is a flowchart for explaining count effect setting processing in the first modified example; It is a flow chart explaining the ending production setting process in the first modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the production|presentation in the special game state in a 2nd modification. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a reset table for state suggestive display in the second modified example; It is a flowchart explaining the production|presentation button operation production|presentation process in a 2nd modification. It is a flow chart explaining the ending effect setting process in the second modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the production|presentation in the special game state in a 3rd modification. It is a flow chart explaining the count effect setting process in the third modification. 14 is a flowchart for explaining ending effect setting processing in a third modified example; FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining main processing in a third modified example; FIG. 14 is a flowchart for explaining effect point control processing in a third modified example; FIG. 11 is a top view of a guide portion in a fourth modified example; It is the figure which explains the special fluctuation winning a prize device in the 4th modified example, (a) top view, (b) the figure which is seen from the left. It is the figure which explains the special fluctuation winning a prize device in the 4th modified example, (a) top view, (b) the figure which is seen from the left. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the special variable winning device in the fifth modification. It is a back view of the back wall member in the 5th modification. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the main body in a fifth modification as seen from the front side; It is the perspective view seen from the back side of the main-body part in the 5th modification, Comprising: (a) a door part is a block|blocking state, (b) a door part is a permission state. It is a back view of the main-body part in a 5th modification, Comprising: (a) a door part is a blocking state, (b) a door part is a permission state. FIG. 12A is a front view of the main body, (b) is a BB cross-sectional view when the door is in the blocking state, and (c) is a BB cross-sectional view when the door is in the permitting state, in the fifth modification. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of a gaming machine in a fifth modified example; It is a figure explaining the operation state of the special fluctuation prize-winning device in the 5th modification. It is a flow chart for explaining the variable probability operating region switch monitoring process in the fifth modification. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end processing in a 5th modification. FIG. 16 is a flowchart for explaining lever solenoid control processing in a fifth modified example; FIG. FIG. 11A is a view for explaining a modification of the guide channel in the fifth modification, including (a) a back view of the rear wall member, (b) an enlarged view of the bent portion in the first mode, and (c) the second 3 is an enlarged view of a bent portion in the aspect of FIG. It is a front view of the game board in the sixth modification. It is a front view explaining the modification of the game board in the 6th modification. It is a front view explaining the modification of the game board in the 6th modification. It is a front view explaining the modification of the game board in the 6th modification. It is a front view of the game board in the seventh modification. It is a figure explaining the image in the reflective surface in a 7th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of change involvement production|presentation in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of change involvement production|presentation in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the change participation production|presentation characterized by the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of change involvement production|presentation in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of change involvement production|presentation in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of change involvement production|presentation in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining single-shot command processing in the second embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart for explaining a variable effect setting process in the second embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart for explaining effect content determination processing in the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare effect setting processing in the second embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of a loss variation pattern, a hit variation pattern, and an enemy character in the change participation production|presentation in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the suspension display table 1 and a help character in the change involvement production|presentation in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the pending|holding display tables 2 and 3 in the change involvement production|presentation in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the allocation rate of the special tables 1 and 2 in the change involvement production|presentation in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the special table 1 in the change involvement production|presentation in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the special table 2 in the change involvement production|presentation in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of change involvement production|presentation in a 1st modification. It is a figure explaining an example of change involvement production|presentation in a 1st modification. It is a figure explaining an example of change involvement production|presentation in a 1st modification. It is a figure explaining an example of change involvement production|presentation in a 1st modification. It is a figure explaining an example of change involvement production|presentation in a 1st modification. It is a figure explaining an example of production customization by the player in the first modification. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining main processing in the first modified example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining effect customization processing in the first modified example; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining password input processing in the 1st modification. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining two-dimensional code issuing processing in the first modified example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining effect content determination processing in the first modified example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining effect content determination processing in the first modified example; FIG. It is a figure explaining an example of the sub production|presentation tables 1 and 2 in the change involvement production|presentation in a 1st modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the sub production|presentation tables 3 and 4 and an item in the change involvement production|presentation in a 1st modification. It is a figure explaining an example of change involvement production|presentation in a 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining an example of change involvement production|presentation in a 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining an example of change involvement production|presentation in a 2nd modification. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining effect content determination processing in a second modified example; FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the production|presentation button operation production|presentation process in a 2nd modification.

<First embodiment>
Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention.

The game machine 10 of this embodiment has a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is attached to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12 . A glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (body frame) 12 .

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built in the left and right of the glass frame 15 to decorate and produce, and to notify when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. is changed to an abnormality notification color (for example, red). ), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound (for example, sound effects). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided on the lower portion of the front frame 12. As shown in FIG. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the content of the abnormality is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. It should be noted that a lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15 for announcing abnormal dispensing.

In the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper tray 21 (storage tray) for supplying game balls to a batted ball launching device (not shown) and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 are stored. An upper tray ball outlet 22 for flowing out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out when the upper tray 21 is full, and an operation section 24 for a ball shooting device are provided. Further, the upper edge of the upper plate 21 is provided with a performance button 25 containing a performance button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, a touch panel 29 is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25 for receiving contact operation input from the player. Furthermore, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12 .
In this embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided near the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Also, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 operated by the player when receiving a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button operated to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, etc. are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation portion 24, the batted ball shooting device shoots the game ball supplied from the upper tray 21 toward the game area 32 on the front side of the game board 30. fire. In addition, by operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 by the player, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), the effect etc. that intervened the operation of the player are performed. It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.

A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30 . The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30 . Further, on the left side of the game area 32, a guide wall 491 is provided along the outer peripheral wall 31 to form a guide path 490 for guiding the shot game ball to a predetermined position of the game area 32.

In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 having a display device 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40 . That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41 and protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41 to prevent game balls from jumping into the surrounding game area 32 .

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode-ray tube). In the area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area), information related to the game such as multiple identification information (special symbols), characters that direct the special symbol fluctuation display game, and background images that enhance the performance effect are displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. The display screen also displays images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a big win display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.). In addition, the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 for effecting a game by operating it. This board effect device 44 can operate toward the center of the display device 41 from the state shown in FIG.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 that provides a starting condition for the normal pattern fluctuation display game. A game ball that has won the normal figure starting gate 34 is detected by a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 32). In addition, two general prize winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general prize winning opening is arranged in the lower right part of the special variable prize winning device 38 arranged in the lower right part of the center case 40. 35 are arranged. The game balls that have entered these general winning holes 35 are detected by a winning hole switch 35a (see FIG. 32).

Below the center case 40, the first start winning opening 36 (start winning opening, start winning area) and the second special drawing fluctuation display that give the starting condition of the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game) A winning device 90 having a second starting winning opening 97 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) that provides a condition for starting the game (special figure 2 variable display game) is provided. This prize winning device 90 includes a distribution member 92 that alternately distributes game balls flowing into an upper inlet 91 to a first start prize winning port 36 and a second start prize winning port 97 inside. The distribution member 92 is rotatable around a rotation axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the tilting direction changes depending on the weight of the game balls flowing in. The game balls are alternately distributed to the start winning opening 97.例文帳に追加The game ball that has entered the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 32), and the game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening 97 is detected by the starting opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 32). detected by In addition, below the prize winning device 90, an out port 30a is provided for collecting game balls that did not win a prize such as a prize winning port.

In addition, on the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable prize winning device 37 (second starting prize winning port, starting prize winning area) that gives the starting condition of the second special figure variable display game is provided. The normal variable winning device 37 is equipped with a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which the upper end side is turned in a direction in which it falls to the right to open and allow game balls to easily flow in. This movable member 37b is always It maintains a closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which it is almost vertical and game balls cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the upper end side is turned so that it falls to the right by the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 32) as a driving device, and the normal fluctuation is performed. The winning device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which game balls can easily flow. A game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 32). In addition, it is also possible to make it possible to win prizes even when the normal variable prize winning device 37 is closed, and make it more difficult to win prizes in the closed state than in the open state.

A downflow path 615 whose front side is covered with a transparent cover and communicates vertically is formed on the right side of the normal variable winning device 37, and the game balls that do not win the normal variable winning device 37 pass through the downflow path 615 downward. flow down to A guiding portion 616 is provided below the flow-down passage 615 . The upper surface 617 of the guiding portion 616 is formed as an inclined surface that descends to the left. In addition, the guide section 616 is provided with an information display device 630 that displays information about the special figure variation display game.

This information display device 630 includes a first information display unit that displays the number of first start memories that are the right to execute the first special figure variation display game, and a second start memory that is the right to run the second special figure variation display game. a second information display section for displaying the number of Separately from the decoration special figure variation display game displayed by the first to third symbols on the display device 41, the decoration special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to the first special figure variation display game is displayed by the fourth symbol. A decoration special figure 2 variation corresponding to a second special figure variation display game by a fourth symbol separately from the third information display part and the decoration special figure variation display game displayed by the first to third symbols on the display device 41 A fourth information display section for displaying a display game is provided.

Each of the first information display section and the second information display section is composed of two light emitting members, and each of the third information display section and the fourth information display section is composed of one light emitting member. In the second display device, three of these six light emitting members are arranged side by side in two rows on the left and right. The upper two light emitting members in the right column constitute a first information display portion, and the upper two light emitting members in the left column constitute a second information display portion. Further, one lower light-emitting member in the right column constitutes a third information display portion, and one lower light-emitting member in the left column constitutes a fourth information display portion.

Each of the first information display portion and the second information display portion is composed of two light emitting members, and a design is applied around each information display portion so that the two light emitting members are related to each other. At a glance, it can be seen that one information display section is composed of two light emitting members. Also, the third information display portion and the fourth information display portion are each composed of a single light-emitting member, but the designs around these information display portions are designed so that it can be seen that they are independent of each other. At a glance, it can be seen that the information display section is composed of one light emitting member. The design of the periphery of the light-emitting member is made to have a sense of unity with the design of the entire game machine so as not to impair the aesthetic appearance. Moreover, the design around the light-emitting member is not a sticker or the like but a member forming the guiding portion 616, which can reduce labor and cost in manufacturing.

Furthermore, in the lower right part of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is a special variable winning device (large winning opening) 38 that can be converted between a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept game balls depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. is set. Although the details of the configuration of the special variable winning device 38 will be described later, depending on the result of the special figure variable display game as an auxiliary game, the opening and closing member 990 closes the large winning opening (closed state disadvantageous to the player). The opening/closing member 990 is retracted and converted to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) capable of receiving game balls flowing down the game area 32 . That is, the special variable winning device 38 has a large winning opening opened and closed by an opening and closing member 990 driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 32) as a driving device, and during the special game state (first special game state) During the small winning game state (second special game state), the closed state of the big winning hole is changed to the open state, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the big winning hole and allowing the player to play a predetermined game. A game value (prize ball) is provided. In addition, inside the big winning hole (winning area), a large winning hole switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 32) is arranged as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning hole. .

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game area 32 in which game balls flow down, the area to the left of the center case 40 is defined as the left area, and the area to the right of the center case 40 is defined as the right area. ing. Then, when the player adjusts the shooting momentum and shoots the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed hitting), the game ball enters the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 97, and the general winning port 35 of the winning device 90. You can aim to win a prize, and you can aim to win a prize to the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38 by shooting the game ball to the right game area (so-called right hitting). It has become.

In addition, outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), a special figure 1 variation display game, a special figure 2 variation display game, and a normal figure start gate 34 are displayed. A collective display device 50 is provided for displaying a general pattern variation display game used as a trigger and for displaying various types of information.

The collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 indicator (first special figure variation display unit) 51 for a special figure 1 variation display game composed of a 7-segment type indicator (LED lamp) etc. and a special figure 2 variation display Equipped with a special figure 2 display for games (second special figure variation display unit) 52 and various indicators made up of LED lamps. The various indicators include a special figure 1 pending display for notifying the number of starting memories of the special figure 1 variable display game, and a special figure 2 holding indicator for notifying the number of starting memories of the special figure 2 variable display game. . In addition, a round display section that displays the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (number of openings and closings of the special variable winning device), a first game state display section that informs whether it is in a time saving state (during normal electric support, during a specific game state), left A second game state display section is included for informing the player of a method of hitting that is advantageous to the player (a method of hitting corresponding to the game state) of hitting (normal hitting) and hitting to the right. In addition, a third game state display unit (third game state display device, probability state display unit) that displays that the probability state of a big hit is a high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, a normal pattern fluctuation display game It includes a normal map display for the game, and a normal map holding display for notifying the start memory number of the normal map fluctuation display game.

In the special figure 1 display device 51, during the variation time of the first special figure variation display game, the special figure 1 varying display for displaying a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order is repeatedly performed. When the variation time of the first special figure variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result of the first special figure variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the display during special figure 1 variation and the lighting pattern displayed as the result mode form identification information (special figure, special figure) for displaying the first special figure variation display game.

In the special figure 2 display device 52, during the variation time of the second special figure variation display game, the special figure 2 varying display for displaying a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order is repeatedly performed. When the variation time of the second special figure variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result of the second special figure variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the special figure 2 fluctuation display and the lighting pattern displayed as the result mode form identification information (special figure, special figure) for displaying the second special figure variation display game.

During the variation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, the normal pattern display device repeats a normal pattern fluctuation display for displaying a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order. Then, when the variation time of the normal pattern variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result of the normal pattern variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns to be displayed in the normal figure fluctuation display and the lighting pattern to be displayed as a result mode form identification information (normal figure, normal symbol) for displaying the general figure fluctuation display game.

The special figure 1 reservation display device displays the number of first starting memories (first reservation number), which is the execution right of the first special figure variation display game, by extinguishing, blinking, and lighting a plurality of light emitting parts. The special figure 2 reservation display device displays the number of second starting memories (second reservation number), which is the execution right of the second special figure variation display game, by extinguishing, blinking, and lighting a plurality of light emitting parts. The normal pattern holding display displays the number of normal pattern starting memories (normal pattern holding number), which is the right to execute the normal pattern fluctuation display game, by extinguishing, blinking, and lighting a plurality of light emitting parts.

The round display part turns off all the light emitting parts when not in the special game state, and makes a lighting mode corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result in the special game state. The first game state display unit (time saving state notification unit) turns off the lamp in the normal game state where the time saving state does not occur (when the variable time reduction function is not activated), and the time saving state occurs If there is (when the fluctuation time reduction function is activated), turn on the lamp. The second game state display unit (right-handed informing unit) 57 turns off the lamp when the game state is such that left-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than right-handed hitting (during normal hitting). When the game state is such that the right-handed player is more advantageous to the player (right-handed player), the lamp is turned on. The third game state display unit lights the LED when the power is turned on in the high probability state, and turns off the LED when the power is not in the high probability state.

Next, details of the game board 30 in the game machine 10 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 includes a substantially rectangular plate-like game board main body 80, a front component 600 forming the front portion of the center case 40, and a rear portion forming the center case 40 and the game board. and a rear structural member 700 to which various members necessary for 30 are attached.

The front structural member 600 is attached by being fitted from the front side into an opening 81 formed in the game board main body 80 and penetrating therethrough in the front-rear direction. This front structural member has an annular base member 610 to which various members are attached. The base member 610 is inserted into an opening 81 penetrating back and forth formed in the game board main body 80, and a peripheral wall 611 forming a front portion of an inner peripheral wall in a recessed space recessed rearward from the game area 32. , and a plate-shaped collar-shaped mounting portion 612 formed perpendicular to the peripheral wall 611 at the front end of the peripheral wall 611 .

The portion of the mounting portion 612 formed outside the space surrounded by the surrounding wall 611 is formed in the opening 81 when the front component 600 is inserted from the front side into the opening 81 formed in the game board main body 80. It extends outside the peripheral edge, and the rear surface thereof contacts the front surface of the game board main body 80. - 特許庁As a result, the forward and backward positions of the front structural member 600 with respect to the game board main body 80 are set to predetermined forward and rearward positions. In addition, a plurality of screw holes are formed in the mounting portion 612 so that the front structural member 600 can be fixed to the game board main body 80 with screws. Further, a part of the mounting portion 612 is arranged on the front side of the game board main body 80 at a position visible to the player, and the front surface is decorated. In addition, the base member 610 is also formed with screw holes, screwing portions, bosses for positioning, recesses for receiving bosses, slits for receiving ribs, and the like, so that various members can be fixed at appropriate positions. It's becoming

A regulating wall 613 is provided on the front surface of the base member 610 except for a portion where a stage portion 620, a warp passage forming member 614, and a normal variable winning device 37, which will be described later, are arranged. The regulation wall 613 is forwardly forward by the front-rear width of the game area 32 (the width from the front surface of the game board main body 80 to the rear surface of the cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front of the game board 30) from the mounting portion 612. It is designed to extend. Therefore, by attaching the front structural member 600 to a predetermined position of the game board main body 80, the regulation wall 613 located on the front side of the attachment portion 612 extends into the game area 32, and the game ball flowing down the game area 32 is centered. Inflow into the case 40 is restricted. As a result, the visibility of the display device 41 is ensured and the number of game balls flowing into the stage portion 620 is limited.

In addition, on the left side as viewed from the front side of the base member 610, a warp flow that forms a warp flow path that receives game balls flowing down the game area 32 outside the center case 40 and guides them to the stage portion 620 A passage forming member 614 is attached. The warp flow path forming member 614 is attached to the front surface of the mounting portion 612, and is wider than the mounting portion 612 in the front and rear width of the game area 32 (the cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 from the front surface of the game board main body 80). width to the back side of the front). Further, the upper end of the warp flow path forming member 614 is connected to the lower end of a regulation wall 613 attached to the left side of the base member 610 so as to extend forward from the attachment portion 612 . It has become.

The warp flow path formed by the warp flow path forming member 614 is a cylindrical flow path having an inner diameter that allows the game balls to flow down in a row, and opens toward the left side of the center case 40, the play area 32. A game ball flowing down the game area 32 can be received. This upstream end forms the inlet of the warp channel. Further, the warp flow path is an L-shaped flow path that guides the game ball that has flowed in from the upstream end to the lower right and then to the rear. The downstream end is opened rearward to guide the game ball to the left end of the stage section 620 .

The stage portion 620 allows game balls to roll forward, backward, leftward, and rightward, and both the left and right sides are inclined surfaces that descend toward the center, and the central portion directly above the inlet 91 of the winning device 90 protrudes upward. It is formed in a substantially W shape. Although the central portion of the stage portion 620 protrudes upward, it is lower than the left and right ends. A game ball that has passed through the warp flow path flows into this stage portion 620 from the left end and rolls along the left-right direction. In addition, game balls bounced below the stage portion 620 can also flow in.

In this substantially W-shaped stage portion 620, forwardly descending inclined surfaces 621 are formed at the lowest portions located on both sides of the upwardly protruding central portion. The inclined surface 621 guides the game ball whose flowing force has weakened on the stage portion 620 from the front end of the stage portion 620 to the game area 32 below.

Further, in the stage portion 620 formed in a substantially W shape, a groove-shaped flow-down passage 622 extending in the front-rear direction and descending rearward is formed at the apex of the upwardly protruding central portion. formed. This downflow path 622 is a shallow groove, and many game balls roll left and right without being fitted in the groove. A game ball fitted in the downflow path 622 is guided backward, flows into an inlet (not shown), and flows into a guide flow path 623 formed below the stage portion 620 . The guide flow path 623 is a flow path that descends forward, and the downstream end is located directly above the inlet 91 of the prize winning device 90, so that it flows into the prize winning device 90 with a high probability.

In addition, on the right side of the front structural member 600 as viewed from the front side, there is provided a normal figure starting gate 34 through which game balls can pass up and down. The normal figure starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a for detecting a passing game ball. Furthermore, below the normal figure starting gate 34, a normal variable winning device 37 having a movable member 37b is provided. A game ball that has won a prize in this normal variable prize winning device 37 is guided to the rear of the front structural member 600 and flows into a discharge channel (not shown). In addition, the normal variable prize winning device 37 is provided with a starting port 2 switch for detecting a winning game ball and a normal electric solenoid 37c for driving a movable member 37b.

A downflow path 615 whose front side is covered with a transparent cover and communicates vertically is formed on the right side of the normal variable winning device 37, and the game balls that do not win the normal variable winning device 37 pass through the downflow path 615 downward. flow down to A guiding portion 616 is provided below the flow-down passage 615 . The upper surface 617 of the guiding portion is an inclined surface that descends to the left, so that the upper surface 617 catches the game ball flowing down the downflow passage 615 and guides it to the left. In addition, the guide section 616 is provided with an information display device 630 that displays information about the special figure variation display game.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the rear structural member 700 has a substantially rectangular box-shaped rear base member 710 having a recess 711 opening forward. A stopper, a boss for positioning, a recess for receiving the boss, a slit for receiving the rib, and the like are formed so that various members can be fixed at appropriate positions. Also, at the front end of the rear base member 710, a brim-shaped fixing portion 713 extending outward perpendicularly to the side wall 712 is formed, and the rear component member 700 is fixed to a predetermined portion on the back surface of the game board body 80. It can be fixed in position. A rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710 is formed with a through hole 715 penetrating in the front-rear direction. This through-hole 715 enables the display surface of the display device 41 attached to the rear of the rear base member 710 to be visually recognized.

The display device 41 attached to the back surface of the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710 includes a liquid crystal display device having a display surface capable of covering the entire through hole 715 formed in the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710. there is The display device 41 is attached so that the display surface faces the front side, so that the image on the display surface can be viewed from the front of the game board 30 through the through hole 715 formed in the rear base member 710 . It is Note that the display device 41 is not limited to having a liquid crystal display device, and may have, for example, a display such as an EL display or a CRT display.

A lower movable accessory unit 730, an upper movable accessory unit 800, and a central movable accessory unit 880 are provided inside the recess 711 of the rear base member 710. ing.

As shown in FIG. 3 , the lower movable accessory unit 730 is arranged below the through hole 715 . As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the lower movable accessory unit 730 includes two first lower movable members 740 and 741 imitating banners and a second lower movable member 770 imitating a gourd. It is operable to make the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 appear on the front side of the display device 41 . In addition, the lower movable accessory unit 730 includes a first lower movable member 740, 741 and a drive mechanism for operating the second lower movable member 770 and a base for mounting various members. It has a base portion 731, a second lower base portion 732 arranged in the center, and a third lower base portion 733 arranged on the back side.

A motor 734 serving as a drive source for driving the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 is located in the lower right portion of the third lower base portion 733 as seen from the front side, with the drive shaft extending in the front-rear direction. installed along. The lower movable accessory unit 730 is provided with first lower movable members 740 and 741 and a second lower movable member 770 , which are driven by one motor 734 . A driving force from a motor 734 is applied to a first gear 735 rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a second gear 737 meshing with the first gear 735 and rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. transmitted at the same time. The first gear 735 is for operating the first lower movable members 740 and 741, and a first drive shaft 736 for transmitting power to the first lower movable members 740 and 741 extends forward on the front side. It is designed to

The second gear 737 is for operating the second lower movable member 770, and a second drive shaft 738 for transmitting power to the second lower movable member 770 extends rearward on the back side. is provided in As will be described later, the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are driven by the driving force transmitted through the first drive shaft 736 when the motor 734 is driven in a predetermined direction (clockwise when viewed from the front side). When the second lower movable member 770 drives the motor 734 in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction (here, counterclockwise when viewed from the front side), the driving force is transmitted through the second drive shaft 738 . configured to work with

As shown in FIG. 6, one of the first lower movable members 740 has a bearing portion 742 at its lower end. is rotatably supported by the The bearing portion 742 is a gear, and receives the driving force from the motor 734 so that the first lower movable member 740 can move about the rotating shaft 751 . Similarly, the other first lower movable member 741 has a bearing portion 743 at its lower end, and this bearing portion 743 is rotated by a rotation shaft 752 provided on the upper portion of the second lower base portion 732 and extending in the front-rear direction. can be pivoted. The bearing portion 743 is a gear, and receives the driving force from the motor 734 so that the first lower movable member 741 can move about the rotating shaft 752 .

The gear of the bearing portion 742 provided in the first lower movable member 740 supported by the rotating shaft 751 on the left side as viewed from the front is doubled in the front-rear direction. It is designed to receive The gear on the rear side transmits the driving force to the gear of the bearing portion 743 provided on the other first lower movable member 741, and one motor 734 drives the two first lower movable members 740, 741 can operate simultaneously.

The gear on the front side of the bearing portion 742 provided in the first lower movable member 740 that is pivotally supported by the rotating shaft 751 on the left side when viewed from the front is arranged below the bearing portion 742 and is centered on the axis along the front-rear direction. meshes with a gear 753 rotatable at the same time. This gear 753 meshes with a rack gear 761 provided on the upper part of a slide member 760 provided on the front surface of the second lower base portion 732 so as to be slidable to the left and right with respect to the second lower base portion 732. By moving the slide member 760 left and right, the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are moved.

The slide member 760 is a plate-like member, and is arranged so that the plate surface is along the front surface of the second lower base portion 732 . The slide member 760 is formed with an oval supported portion 762 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction. By inserting 754, it is supported so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. Furthermore, the first lower base portion 731 attached to the front of the second lower base portion 732 covers the slide member 760 so that the slide member 760 is held so as not to drop forward.

A linear through-hole 763 is formed in the slide member 760 so as to extend through it in the front-rear direction. The through hole 763 has an arcuate portion and a straight portion extending downward from the right end of the arcuate portion as viewed from the front side. A first drive shaft 736 provided on the first gear 735 is inserted through the through hole 763 from behind, and the driving force from the motor 734 is transmitted to the slide member 760 .

FIG. 6(a) shows the initial state in which the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are all at their initial positions. In this state, the first drive shaft 736 is positioned at the connecting portion of the arcuate portion and the straight portion of the through hole. The arc radius of the arc portion of the through hole 763 is equal to the length from the center of the first gear 735 to the center of the first drive shaft 736 . In the initial state, the center of the first gear 735 and the center of the circle forming the arc of the arc-shaped portion of the through hole 763 coincide in the front-rear direction.

From this initial state, when the first gear 735 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front side, the first drive shaft 736 moves along the straight portion of the through hole 763 while pushing the slide member 760 leftward. As a result, the slide member 760 slides leftward as shown in FIG. 6B, and the rack gear 761 rotates the gear 753, thereby rotating the first lower movable members 740 and 741 upward. It will be in the state which appeared on the front side of the display device 41. When returning to the initial state, the operation is opposite to that described above. As will be described later, the second lower movable member 770 can be operated by driving the motor 734 so that the first gear 735 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front side from the initial state. At this time, since the first drive shaft 736 moves along the arcuate portion of the through hole 763, it does not press the slide member 760, and the first lower movable members 740 and 741 do not move. The same applies when returning the second lower movable member 770 from the operating state to the initial state.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, the second lower movable member 770 has a rotating shaft 771 extending in the front-rear direction at the lower end thereof, and the rotating shaft extends between the second lower base portion 732 and the third lower base portion 733 . is rotatably supported by A linear through-hole 772 is formed in the vicinity of the rotating shaft 771 so as to penetrate therethrough in the front-rear direction. The through hole 772 has an arcuate portion and a straight portion extending from the left end of the arcuate portion as viewed from the front side in the state shown in FIG. A second drive shaft 738 provided on the second gear 737 is inserted through the through hole 772 from the front, so that the driving force from the motor 734 is transmitted to the second lower movable member 770 .

FIG. 7(a) shows the initial state in which the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are all at their initial positions. In this state, the second drive shaft 738 is positioned at the connecting portion of the arcuate portion and the straight portion of the through hole 772 . The arc radius of the arc portion of the through hole 772 is equal to the length from the center of the second gear 737 to the center of the second drive shaft 738 . In the initial state, the center of the second gear 737 and the center of the circle forming the arc of the arc-shaped portion of the through hole 772 coincide in the front-rear direction.

From this initial state, when the motor 734 is driven so as to rotate the second gear 737 clockwise when viewed from the front side, the second drive shaft 738 pushes the second lower movable member 770 upward while the through hole 772 is opened. Move a straight line. As a result, the second lower movable member 770 rotates upward and appears in front of the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 7B. When returning to the initial state, the operation is opposite to that described above. As described above, the first lower movable members 740 and 741 can be operated by driving the motor 734 so that the second gear 737 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front side from the initial state. At this time, since the second drive shaft 738 moves along the arcuate portion of the through hole 772, it does not press the second lower movable member 770, and the second lower movable member 770 does not move. The same applies when returning the first lower movable members 740 and 741 from the operating state to the initial state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8, when the second lower movable member 770 rotates upward and appears in front of the display device 41, an effect display emphasizing the second lower movable member 770 is displayed on the display device 41. It is possible. Of course, the effects may be displayed in the same way even when the first lower movable members 740 and 741 appear in front of the display device 41 . Further, the display mode of the effect display is not limited to this, and any display that emphasizes the movable member appearing on the front side of the display device 41 may be used.

In addition, a plurality of LEDs are provided in a gourd-like portion of the second lower movable member 770 so as to enable decoration by emitting light. In addition, the letters "Dealca" are also designed to emit light. Each of these four characters emits light independently, but in the case of "ru", the "no" part and the "re" part emit light independently. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 7B and 8, it is possible to display "dere" by causing only the "de" part and the "no" part of "ru" to emit light. there is By dividing the characters in this way so that different information can be displayed, a novel effect can be achieved. In addition, the display of "Dere" notifies that it is a Dere mode, which is one of a plurality of effect modes. By informing the effect mode by means of the display on the movable member in this way, the set effect mode can be clearly communicated to the player.

As shown in FIG. 3 , the upper movable accessory unit 800 is arranged above and on both sides of the through hole 715 . As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the upper movable accessory unit 800 includes a circular first upper movable member 848 and a second upper movable member 860 imitating a tiger's hand. 848 and the second upper movable member 860 are operated to produce an effect.

The upper movable accessory unit 800 includes a base member 801 attached to the rear base member 710, and a movable member unit 820 capable of moving vertically with respect to the base member 801 and having a first upper movable member 848. . The base member 801 has a U-shape when viewed from the front side, and includes an upper base portion 802 disposed above the through hole 715 and a left base portion disposed to the left of the through hole 715 when viewed from the front side. 803 and a right base portion 804 arranged on the right side of the through hole 715 when viewed from the front side.

A guide portion 805 extending in the vertical direction is provided at the right end portion of the left base portion 803 and the left end portion of the right base portion 804 . The guide portion 805 guides the movable member unit 820 along the vertical direction. Further, the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804 are each provided with a drive mechanism 806 for driving the movable member unit 820 up and down. Each drive mechanism 806 has a motor 807 as a drive source, and by driving the motor 807, the arm 808 rotates. A drive shaft 809 is provided at the tip of the arm 808 . The drive shaft 809 is connected to the link member 830 of the movable member unit 820, and by driving the motor 807, the link member 830 is operated to drive the movable member unit 820 up and down.

The movable member unit 820 includes a link member 830 connected to the drive mechanism 806, a unit base portion 841 for attaching various members, a first upper movable member 848 arranged in front of the unit base portion 841, and a unit base. A driving portion 850 arranged on the back side of the portion 841 to drive the first upper movable member and the second upper movable member, a back cover 849 covering the back surface of the unit base portion 841 from behind the driving portion 850, and a back cover 849. and a guided member 842 that is fixed to the rear surface of the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804 and guided by the guide portions 805 provided on the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804 .

The link member 830 is rotatably attached to the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804 and arranged to extend in directions facing each other. The link member 830 may be a rotating shaft 810 provided on the left base portion 803 extending forward in the front-rear direction or a rotating shaft provided on the right base portion 804 extending forward in the front-rear direction. A bearing portion 831 through which the 810 is inserted is provided at one end, and is rotatably supported by the left base portion 803 or the right base portion 804 . Further, the link member 830 is formed with a first guide portion 832 which is an elongated hole through which the drive shaft 809 provided on the arm 808 of the drive mechanism 806 is inserted, and drives the motor 807 to rotate the arm 808. As a result, the drive shaft 809 moves along the first guide portion 832 and rotates the link member 830 up and down.

Further, a connection shaft 833 for connecting to the unit base portion 841 of the movable member unit 820 is provided so as to extend rearward from the other end portion of the link member 830 that faces the one end portion provided with the bearing portion 831 . ing. In addition, the link member 830 has a second guide portion which is an elongated hole through which the support shaft 861 provided at one end of the back surface of the second upper movable member 860 attached so as to cover the front side of the link member 830 can be inserted. 834 is formed to guide and support one end of the second upper movable member 860 by the second guide portion 834 .

The unit base portion 841 includes a circular body portion 844 and supported portions 845 extending left and right from the body portion 844 . The supported portion 845 is formed with a third guide portion 846, which is an elongated hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends left and right. , and the unit base portion 841 moves up and down according to the operation of the link member 830 based on the driving of the motor 807 . Further, at the center of the body portion 844, an insertion portion 847 is formed through which a drive shaft (not shown) extending rearward from the center of the circular first upper movable member 848 can be inserted. The insertion portion 847 rotatably supports the first upper movable member 848 by rotatably supporting the inserted drive shaft.

The drive unit 850 includes a motor 851 that serves as a drive source, a rotation drive unit 852 that is connected to the first upper movable member 848 , and a drive arm 853 that drives the second upper movable member 860 . By driving the motor 851, the rotation driving portion 852 rotates about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. One end of the drive arm 853 is connected to a connection shaft 856 provided on the back surface of a gear 855 that rotates when driven by a motor 851. By driving the motor 851, the drive arm 853 swings left and right. It's like

The drive shaft of the first upper movable member 848 inserted through the insertion portion 847 of the unit base portion 841 is connected to the rotation center of the rotation drive portion 852, and the rotation of the rotation drive portion 852 rotates the drive shaft. A first upper movable member 848 is adapted to rotate. A connection shaft 862 provided on the back surface of the other end of the second upper movable member 860 is connected to the other end of the drive arm 853, and the drive arm 853 swings left and right to move the second upper movable member. The member 860 swings left and right.

A back cover 849 is fixed to the back side of the unit base portion 841 so as to cover the driving portion 850 . A guided member 842 is fixed to the rear surface of the rear cover 849 , whereby the guided member 842 and the unit base portion 841 are fixed. The guided member 842 is a plate-shaped member arranged to extend in the left-right direction. A portion 843 is provided.

10 to 12 show the operation of the upper movable accessory unit 800. FIG. For the sake of explanation, some members are omitted. 10 shows the initial state in which the movable member unit 820 is at the upper end of its operating range, and FIGS. 11 and 12 show the operating states in which the movable member unit 820 is at the lower end of its operating range. In the initial state shown in FIG. 10, the movable member unit 820 is positioned at the upper end of its range of motion. When the drive mechanism 806 is operated from this initial state to rotate the drive shaft 809 provided at the tip of the arm 808 toward the display device 41 side, the link member 830 is rotated downward, and the movable member unit 820 is rotated. moves downward. In the operating state in which the movable member unit 820 is at the lower end of the operating range, the drive shaft 809 is positioned at the lower end of the rotating range, and the link member 830 is also at the lower end of the rotating range, as shown in FIG. located in That is, the first upper movable member 848 constitutes a first effect movable body capable of performing a predetermined effect operation, and the drive mechanism 806 and the link member 830 are the first drive mechanism portion for operating the first effect movable body. and these constitute the first effect device.

Further, when the drive unit 850 is operated, the first upper movable member 848 rotates in one direction, and the second upper movable member 860 is moved toward the first upper movable member 848 as shown in FIG. As shown in 12, the movement to the left and right is repeated between the state away from the first upper movable member 848 and the state thereof. When the second upper movable member 860 is shifted toward the first upper movable member 848 as shown in FIG. 11(a), the connection shaft 856 provided on the back surface of the gear 855 is disengaged as shown in FIG. 11(b). , are closest to each other, and the drive arm 853 draws the second upper movable member 860 toward the first upper movable member 848 side. As the gear 855 rotates from this state, the connection shaft 856 pushes the drive arm outward, and the second upper movable member 860 moves away from the first upper movable member 848 .

When the second upper movable member 860 is the most distant from the first upper movable member 848 as shown in FIG. 12(a), the connecting shaft provided on the back surface of the gear 855 as shown in FIG. 12(b) 856 are in the farthest state from each other, and the drive arm 853 is in the state in which the second upper movable member 860 is furthest away from the first upper movable member 848 . As the gear 855 rotates from this state, the connecting shaft 856 pulls the drive arm inward, and the second upper movable member 860 moves closer to the first upper movable member 848 . As the gear 855 continues to rotate in one direction, this motion is repeated and the second upper movable member 860 moves left and right. That is, the second upper movable member 860 constitutes a second effect movable body capable of performing a predetermined effect action, and the driving section 850 constitutes a second drive mechanism for operating the second effect movable body. These constitute the second effect device.

The second upper movable member 860 is arranged to cover and hide the link member 830 in both the initial position shown in FIG. 10 and the position after the operation shown in FIGS. It is designed to work. By covering the link member 830 with the second upper movable member 860 that operates, the attention of the player can be attracted to the second upper movable member 860, the line of sight can be effectively prevented from going to the link member 830, and only the action can be performed. A high concealing effect can be obtained as compared with the case of covering with a decorative member that does not cover the cover. Further, particularly at the initial position, as shown in FIG. 2, the link member 830 is covered so as not to be visually recognized by the player. As a result, in the state of the initial position that occupies most of the game, unnecessary parts are not visible to the player, and the decorativeness is improved.

In view of the above, in the gaming machine 10 that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the game results in a special result, the effects related to the game are controlled. Production control means (production control device 300), the first production device (first upper movable member 848, drive mechanism 806, link member 830) and second A production device (second upper movable member 860, drive unit 850) is provided, and the first production device is a first production movable body (first upper movable member 848) capable of performing a predetermined production operation, The second effect device is provided with a first drive mechanism (drive mechanism 806, link member 830) for operating the first effect movable body, and the second effect movable body is capable of performing a predetermined effect operation. (Second upper movable member 860) and a second drive mechanism (drive unit 850) for operating the second effect movable body, and the second effect movable body covers the first drive mechanism It means that it is distributed.

Therefore, since the second effect movable body is arranged so as to cover the first drive mechanism part, it becomes difficult for the player to see unnecessary parts, and the effect of the effect of the operating effect device can be enhanced, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. can be improved. By covering the first drive mechanism part with the second effect movable body that particularly operates, the player's consciousness can be attracted to the second effect movable body, and the line of sight can be effectively prevented from going to the first drive mechanism part. , a high concealing effect can be obtained as compared with the case of simply covering with a decorative member that does not operate.

In addition, the second effect movable body (second upper movable member 860) is such that the first drive mechanism portion (link member 830) is in a state where at least the first effect movable body (first upper movable member 848) is at the initial position. It is covered so that it cannot be seen by anyone. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to see unnecessary parts in the state of the initial position that occupies most of the game, and the performance effect of the operating performance device can be enhanced, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.

As shown in FIG. 3, the central movable accessory unit 880 is arranged to surround the through hole 715 . As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, this central movable accessory unit 880 operates such that a plurality of central movable production members 900, 910, 920, and 930 divided into four are combined in front of the display device 41. This is what the performance is like.

The central movable accessory unit 880 includes a movable production base member 881 attached to the rear base member 710 . In addition, the first central movable production member 900 and the second central movable production member 910 that are arranged on the front upper side of the movable production base member 881 and operate, and the third that is arranged on the front lower side of the movable production base member 881 and operate. A central movable effect member 920 and a fourth central movable effect member 930 are provided.

The movable effect base member 881 has a first central movable effect member 900 and a second central movable effect member 910 attached to the center in the left-right direction of the portion positioned above the display device 41 . This portion includes a first rotating shaft 882 extending forward along the front-rear direction for rotatably supporting the first central movable effect member, and guiding the movement of the first central movable effect member. A first guide portion 883, which is an elongated hole penetrating in the front and rear direction, is provided. In addition, a second rotating shaft 884 extending forward along the front-rear direction for rotatably supporting the second central movable effect member, and a front and rear shaft 884 for guiding the movement of the second central movable effect member. A second guide portion 885 that is an elongated hole penetrating through is provided.

A drive source for operating the first central movable production member 900 and the second central movable production member 910 is provided on the right side of the portion of the movable production base member 881 positioned above the display device 41 as seen from the front side. A motor 886 is provided. A plurality of gears and the like for transmitting the driving force of the motor 886 to the first central movable effect member 900 are provided on the back side of the movable effect base member 881 and on the portion from the first rotating shaft 882 to the motor 886. A drive mechanism is arranged, and a rear cover 896 is attached so as to cover the rear surface of this drive mechanism.

Also, the movable effect base member 881 has a third central movable effect member 920 and a fourth central movable effect member 930 attached to the center in the left-right direction of the portion located on the lower side of the display device 41 . This portion includes a third rotating shaft 891 extending forward along the front-rear direction for rotatably supporting the third central movable effect member, and guiding the movement of the third central movable effect member. A third guide portion 892, which is an elongated hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, is provided. In addition, a fourth rotating shaft 893 extending forward along the front-rear direction for rotatably supporting the fourth central movable effect member, and a front and rear shaft for guiding the movement of the fourth central movable effect member. A fourth guide portion 894 that is an elongated hole penetrating through is provided. A motor serving as a driving source for operating the third central movable production member 920 and the fourth central movable production member 930 on the left side of the movable production base member 881 positioned below the display device 41 when viewed from the front side. 895 is provided.

The first central movable effect member 900 arranged in the upper right part has a decorative part 901 that is decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41 . Also, at one end of the first central movable effect member 900, there is provided a first bearing portion 902 penetrating before and after the first rotating shaft 882 is inserted, and the first central movable effect member 900 is first rotated. It is rotatably supported around the drive shaft 882 .

In the vicinity of the first bearing portion 902, a sector-shaped first sector gear 903 and a sector-shaped second sector gear 904 centering on the rotation center of the first central movable effect member 900 are provided. The first sector gear 903 is provided so as to face rightward when viewed from the front side. This first sector gear 903 faces the back side of the movable production base member 881 through a through portion 887 formed on the right side of the first rotating shaft 882 in the movable production base member 881 and penetrating back and forth. there is A gear for transmitting the driving force from the motor 886 is meshed with the rear side of the movable production base member 881 .

Also, the second sector gear 904 is provided so as to face leftward when viewed from the front side. This second sector gear 904 meshes with a third sector gear 913 provided on a second central movable production member 910 arranged adjacent to the left of the first central movable production member 900 . As a result, the driving force from the motor 886 received by the first sector gear 903 is also transmitted to the second central movable effect member 910 via the second sector gear 904 . A guided shaft 905 extending rearward is provided on the back surface of the first central movable effect member 900 . The guided shaft 905 is inserted through the first guide portion 883, and is guided along the extending direction of the first guide portion 883 when the first central movable effect member 900 rotates. This enables smooth operation of the first central movable effect member 900 .

The second central movable effect member 910 arranged in the upper left part has a decorative part 911 that is decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41 . In addition, a second bearing portion 912 is provided at one end of the second central movable effect member 910 and penetrates before and after the second rotating shaft 884 is inserted. It is rotatably supported around the driving shaft 884 .

Also, in the vicinity of the second bearing portion 912, a sector-shaped third sector gear 913 centering on the rotation center of the second central movable effect member 910 is provided. The third sector gear 913 is provided so as to face rightward when viewed from the front side. This third sector gear 913 meshes with a second sector gear 904 provided on the first central movable production member 900 arranged adjacent to the right side of the second central movable production member 910 . A guided shaft 914 extending rearward is provided on the back surface of the second central movable effect member 910 . The guided shaft 914 is inserted through the second guide portion 885, and is guided along the extending direction of the second guide portion 885 when the second central movable effect member 910 rotates. This enables smooth operation of the second central movable effect member 910 .

An engaging portion 915 extending rearward is provided in the vicinity of the second bearing portion 912 . This engaging portion 915 faces the back side of the movable production base member 881 through a through portion 888 formed on the left side of the second rotating shaft 884 in the movable production base member 881 and penetrating back and forth. there is Then, as shown in FIG. 14(b), one end of a torsion coil spring 889 is engaged with the back side of the movable production base member 881. As shown in FIG. The other end of the torsion coil spring 889 is locked by a locking portion 890 formed on the movable production base member 881, and the engaging portion 915 of the second central movable production member 910 is biased upward. It's like As a result, the biasing force of the torsion coil spring 889 assists in holding the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 at the initial position, which is the position of the upper end in the operating range, and downward. It assists the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 that have operated to return to their initial positions.

As shown in FIG. 13 , the third central movable effect member 920 arranged in the lower left part has a decoration part 921 that is decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41 . Also, at one end of the third central movable effect member 920, there is provided a third bearing portion 922 penetrating before and after the third rotating shaft 891 is inserted, and the third central movable effect member 920 is moved to the third rotation. It is rotatably supported around the drive shaft 891 .

In addition, in the vicinity of the third bearing portion 922, a sector-shaped fourth sector gear 923 and a sector-shaped fifth sector gear 924 centering on the rotation center of the third central movable effect member 920 are provided. The fourth sector gear 923 is provided so as to face the lower left side when viewed from the front side. The fourth sector gear 923 meshes with the gear of the motor 895 arranged at the lower left portion of the third rotating shaft 891 in the movable production base member 881 .

Also, the fifth sector gear 924 is provided so as to face rightward when viewed from the front side. The fifth sector gear 924 meshes with the sixth sector gear 933 provided on the fourth central movable production member 930 arranged adjacent to the right side of the third central movable production member 920 . As a result, the driving force from the motor 895 received by the fourth sector gear 923 is also transmitted to the fourth central movable effect member 930 via the fifth sector gear 924 . A guided shaft 925 extending rearward is provided on the back surface of the third central movable effect member 920 . The guided shaft 925 is inserted through the third guide portion 892, and is guided along the extending direction of the third guide portion 892 when the third central movable effect member 920 rotates. This enables smooth operation of the third central movable effect member 920 .

The fourth central movable effect member 930 arranged in the lower right part has a decorative part 931 that is decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41 . In addition, a fourth bearing portion 932 is provided at one end of the fourth central movable effect member 930 and penetrates before and after the fourth rotating shaft 893 is inserted. It is rotatably supported around the drive shaft 893 .

Further, in the vicinity of the fourth bearing portion 932, a fan-shaped sixth fan-shaped gear 933 and a seventh fan-shaped gear 934 centering on the rotation center of the fourth central movable effect member 930 are provided. The sixth sector gear 933 is provided so as to face leftward when viewed from the front side. The sixth sector gear 933 meshes with a fifth sector gear 924 provided on the third central movable production member 920 arranged adjacent to the left side of the fourth central movable production member 930 . A guided shaft 935 extending rearward is provided on the back surface of the fourth central movable effect member 930 . The guided shaft 935 is inserted through the fourth guide portion 894, and is guided along the extending direction of the fourth guide portion 894 when the fourth central movable effect member 930 rotates. This enables smooth operation of the fourth central movable effect member 930 .

Also, the seventh sector gear 934 is provided so as to face the lower right side when viewed from the front side. The seventh sector gear 934 meshes with an eighth sector gear 942 provided in an urging mechanism 940 arranged on the lower right side of the fourth central movable effect member 930 . The biasing mechanism 940 is rotatable about a rotation shaft 941 extending in the front-rear direction, and includes an eighth sector gear 942 . The biasing mechanism 940 is provided so as to extend leftward from the rotation shaft when viewed from the front side, and is biased downward (counterclockwise direction) by a biasing member (not shown). As a result, the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are urged in the direction toward the initial position, which is the position of the lower end in the motion range. Therefore, the biasing force by the biasing mechanism assists in holding the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 at the initial positions, and the third central movable effect member 920 and the upwardly operated third central movable effect member 920 and It assists when the fourth central movable effect member 930 returns to the initial position.

The central movable accessory unit 880 configured as described above can be converted between the initial state shown in FIG. 14 and the operation completed state shown in FIG. In the initial state shown in FIG. 14, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 are at the initial position, which is the upper end of the operating range, and the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 is at the initial position, which is the lower end of the operating range, and is substantially retracted from the front surface of the display device 41 . From this initial state, when the motor 886 is operated, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 rotate so as to descend, and when the motor 895 is operated, the third central movable effect member 920 and The fourth central movable effect member 930 rotates upward.

15, the decorative portion 901 of the first central movable production member 900, the decorative portion 911 of the second central movable production member 910, the decorative portion 921 of the third central movable production member 920, and the fourth central A decorative portion 931 of the movable effect member 930 is arranged so as to overlap the front surface of the display device 41 . In addition, the end surfaces of the respective decorative portions 901, 911, 921, 931 are opposed to and close to the end surfaces of the adjacent decorative portions 901, 911, 921, 931, forming a circular shape as a whole. ing. The decorative portions 901 , 911 , 921 and 931 are made of a material that can transmit light, and the display device 41 can be seen through the decorative portions 901 , 911 , 921 and 931 .

Next, the configuration of the special variable winning device 38 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 16 to 18, the special variable winning device 38 is arranged on the front side of the channel rear wall 962 arranged along the front surface of the game board main body 80 and the channel rear wall 962. It is sandwiched between the channel front wall 952 and has a downflow channel 38f in which game balls can flow down in a line. This flow-down path 38f is inclined so as to descend to the left when viewed from the front side, and the game balls flow down in a line toward the left.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the bottom surface of the substantially central portion of the downflow passage 38f is composed of an opening/closing member 990 that can slide in the front-rear direction. The opening/closing member 990 projects forward as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18(a) and is in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening 38d), and FIG. 18(b). As shown in FIG. 2, it is possible to convert to an open state in which the game ball can enter the big winning opening 38d by retreating backward. That is, when the opening/closing member 990 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the flow path 38f flows down the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 and passes through the large winning opening 38d, and when the opening/closing member 990 is in the open state, It is designed to flow into the big prize gate. In addition, when the opening/closing member 990 is in the closed state, there is a gap between the opening and closing member 990 and the channel front wall 952, but the gap is such that game balls cannot flow in.

As shown in FIG. 19, the special variable prize winning device 38 includes a front wall member 950 having a flow channel front wall 952, a rear wall member 960 having a flow channel rear wall 962, and a main body portion 970 to which an opening/closing member 990 and the like are attached. , and a cover member 979 that covers the back surface of the body portion 970 .

The front wall member 950 has a plate-like front surface portion 951 . The front surface of the front surface part 951 is arranged close to the back surface of the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15, and game balls are prevented from flowing down in front of this front surface. In addition, the front surface of the front surface portion 951 is a surface that can be visually recognized by the player, and is decorated with a lens that can partially transmit light. An LED (not shown) is arranged as a decoration means on the back surface of the front wall member 950, so that the special variable winning device 38 can be decorated with light. The color of the light that decorates the special variable winning device 38 is different from the color of light emitted from the collective display device 50, thereby preventing the display of the adjacent collective display device 50 from becoming difficult to understand. Further, the upper portion of the plate-shaped front surface portion 951 serves as a channel front wall 952 forming a side wall on the front side of the downstream channel 38f.

As shown in FIG. 17, a plurality of front wall projecting portions 954 projecting rearward are provided on the rear surface side of the channel front wall 952 . The front wall protruding portion 954 is a triangular prism-shaped protruding portion with slanted left and right side surfaces. It is provided to be located in The front wall protruding portion 954 and the protruding portion 992 have a function of guiding backward the game ball flowing leftward in order to meander the game ball flowing down the downflow path 38f as will be described later. That is, it forms a contact portion that can be contacted by a game ball flowing down the downflow path 38f. By positioning the front wall projecting portion 954 slightly upstream, the game ball flowing down to the left is guided backward by the front wall projecting portion 954 and then further backward by the projecting portion 992, A game ball can be guided effectively.

As shown in FIG. 20 , a plurality of rib-like extension walls 953 extending rearward from the back surface of a plate-like front surface portion 951 are provided on the back side of the front wall member 950 . The extension wall 953 has different functions depending on the place where it is provided, and includes a bottom portion 953a forming the bottom surface of the downflow passage 38f, a large winning opening forming portion 953b forming the side wall and the bottom surface of the large winning opening 38d, and a large winning opening forming portion 953b. Guidance channel forming portion 953c forming guide channel 955 for guiding the game ball that has won the opening 38d, switch mounting portion forming portion 953d forming the mounting portion 956 for mounting the big winning opening switch 38a, and forming the general winning opening 35 It has a function as a general winning opening forming portion 953e and a peripheral wall 953f that prevents game balls flowing down around the special variable winning device 38 from entering the inside.

A bottom surface portion 953a that forms the bottom surface of the downflow passage 38f is an inclined surface that inclines to the right when viewed from the back side. Also, the big winning hole forming part 953b is inclined so as to collect the game balls that have flowed into the big winning hole 38d into the guide channel 955. As shown in FIG. Game balls can flow into the guide channel 955 in a row, and a large winning opening switch 38a is provided at the inflow portion of the guide channel 955 . As a result, all the game balls that have flowed into the big winning opening 38d flow into the guide channel 955 after being detected by the big winning opening switch 38a. A guiding flow path 955 formed by the guiding flow path forming portion 953c is a flow path that guides the game ball from the big winning opening 38d to the back side of the game board 30. A rib 957 is formed for guiding to. In addition, the general prize winning opening forming part 953e forms the general winning prize opening 35 that opens to the right when viewed from the front side of the special variable prize winning device 38 . A rib 958 is formed on the rear surface of the front surface portion 951 for guiding the game ball that has flowed into the general winning hole 35 backward.

As shown in FIG. 21( a ), the rear wall member 960 has a plate-shaped rear surface portion 961 . A front wall member 950 is attached to the front surface of the rear surface portion 961, and the portion of the front surface of the rear surface portion 961 that is not hidden by the front wall member 950 is decorated. An upper portion of the rear surface portion 961 serves as a channel rear wall 962 forming a rear side wall of the downstream channel 38f. In addition, an opening/closing member inserting portion 963 is formed at the lower end of the flow path rear wall 962 so as to pass through the opening/closing member 990 from the back side of the rear wall member 960 .

A plurality of rear wall projecting portions 964 projecting forward are provided on the front side of the channel rear wall 962 . As shown in FIG. 17, the rear wall projecting portion 964 is a triangular prism-shaped projecting portion with sloped left and right side surfaces, and is provided at a position adjacent to a plurality of recessed portions 993 provided in the opening/closing member 990 . The rear wall projecting portion 964 and the recessed portion 993 have a function of guiding forward the game ball flowing leftward in order to meander the game ball flowing down the downflow path 38f as described later. That is, it forms a contact portion that can be contacted by a game ball flowing down the downflow path 38f. Since the rear wall projecting portion 964 is provided adjacent to the recessed portion 993, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down the right side portion of the downflow path 38f in the portion where the recessed portion 993 is not provided, and the game ball can be reliably discharged. It is possible to meander.

Returning to FIG. 21, in the central portion of the rear surface portion 961 and facing the portion where the guide flow path 955 is formed in the front wall member 950, the guide flow path 955 communicates with the rear surface side of the rear surface portion 961. A through portion 968 that penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed in the . Also, above the guide channel 955, a switch mounting portion 965 is formed that penetrates in the front-rear direction so as to accommodate the rear portion of the big winning opening switch 38a. Furthermore, in the right part of the rear surface part 961 and facing the part in which the general winning opening 35 is formed in the front wall member 950, the game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is pushed to the back side of the rear wall member 960. A penetrating portion 966a that penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed so as to communicate with the back surface side of the rear surface portion 961 to guide the general winning opening flow path 966 .

As shown in FIG. 21B, a plurality of rib-like extension walls 967 extending rearward from the back surface of the plate-like rear surface portion 961 are provided on the rear surface side of the rear wall member 960 . The extension wall 967 has different functions depending on the place where it is provided. It has a function as a peripheral wall 967c that forms the periphery of the special variable winning device 38.

The guide channel forming portion 967a forms a guide channel 955 so as to guide downward the game ball guided from the penetrating portion 968 to the back side. Further, a rib 969 for guiding the game ball backward is formed at the downstream end of the guide channel 955 formed in the rear surface portion 961 . The general winning opening flow path forming part 967b forms the general winning opening flow path 966 so as to guide downward the game ball guided to the back side from the penetrating part 966a. In addition, a rib 966b for guiding the game ball backward is formed at the downstream end portion of the general winning opening flow path 966 formed in the rear surface portion 961 .

The surrounding wall 967c is formed in accordance with the shape of a penetrating portion penetrating back and forth formed in a portion of the game board body 80 where the special variable winning device 38 is attached, and the special variable winning device 38 is attached to the game board body 80. At this time, the peripheral wall 967c is inserted into the through portion. Further, the rear surface of the rear surface portion 961 positioned outside the surrounding wall 967c is in a state of being in contact with the front surface of the game board main body 80 when the special variable winning device 38 is attached to the game board main body 80. A plurality of bosses for positioning and screw holes for screwing are formed in this portion.

As shown in FIG. 22 , the body portion 970 has a peripheral wall 971 that coincides with the peripheral wall 967c of the rear wall member 960 in the front-rear direction. The main body portion 970 is provided with a rear wall portion 972 that forms a rear wall of the guide channel 955 and faces the guide channel forming portion 967 a formed on the back surface of the rear wall member 960 . In the rear wall portion 972 , at a position facing the through portion 968 formed in the rear wall member 960 , a game ball guided to the rear surface of the rear wall member 960 through the through portion 968 is guided to the guide flow path 955 . A rib 973 is formed to guide it to the right along it. Further, a through portion 974 is formed in the rear wall portion 972 so as to face the downstream end portion of the guide flow path 955 formed in the rear wall member 960 . The game ball flowing down the guide channel 955 is guided backward by the rib 969 formed on the rear wall member 960, passes through the through portion 974, is guided to the back side of the main body portion 970, and is guided to the outside of the game machine. is designed to flow into a discharge channel for discharging the

In addition, in the portion facing the downstream end of the general winning opening flow path 966 formed in the rear wall member 960, a through hole for guiding the game ball flowing down the general winning opening flow path 966 to the back side of the main body part 970 A portion 975 is formed. The game ball that has flowed down the general winning port channel 966 is guided to the back side of the main body portion 970 through the penetration portion 975, and after being detected by the winning port switch 35a, the discharge flow that discharges the game ball to the outside of the game machine. It is designed to flow into the road.

An opening/closing member holding portion 976 that guides and supports an opening/closing member 990 that moves in the front-rear direction is provided at a position facing the opening/closing member insertion portion 963 formed in the rear wall member 960 . The opening/closing member holding portion 976 is a slit-shaped penetrating portion penetrating the main body portion 970 in the front and rear direction, and can contact the upper, lower, right, and left surfaces of the opening/closing member 990 to guide and support the opening/closing member 990 . A guide wall 977 is provided to extend along the front-rear direction.

An opening/closing member unit 980 having an opening/closing member 990 and an operation mechanism for operating the opening/closing member 990 is attached to the back side of the main body portion 970 . The opening/closing member unit 980 includes a unit base member 981 for attaching various members, an opening/closing member 990 capable of sliding in the front-rear direction, and a large winning opening solenoid 38b for operating the opening/closing member 990.

The opening/closing member unit 980 has a state in which the opening/closing member 990 is protruded forward as shown in FIG. The opening/closing member 990 can be converted to a state in which the member 990 is retracted backward and a state in which the special variable winning device 38 is opened. The opening/closing member 990 can appear above the big prize opening 38 d via an opening/closing member holding portion 976 formed in the main body portion 970 and an opening/closing member inserting portion 963 formed in the rear wall member 960 .

The opening/closing member 990 is slidably arranged back and forth on a holding portion 982 formed on the upper portion of the unit base member 981 . As shown in FIG. 24(a), the opening/closing member 990 has a flow passage forming portion 991 formed at the bottom surface of the downflow passage 38f by lowering the front end portion extending upward from the large prize winning opening 38d on the upper surface. ing.

A plurality of projecting portions 992 projecting upward are formed in the vicinity of the front end portion of the opening/closing member 990 in the flow path forming portion 991 . The side surface on the upstream side of the projecting portion 992 is inclined so that the rear side faces the downstream side, so that the game ball flowing down from the right side can be smoothly guided backward toward the recessed portion 993 . In addition, the downstream side surface of the projecting portion 992 is inclined so that the rear side faces the upstream side, so that when a game ball flowing forward from the recessed portion 993 comes into contact with it, it can be guided in the downstream direction.

In addition, a recessed portion 993 is formed in a stepped portion of the flow path forming portion 991 that is one step lower and is recessed rearward in a portion that faces the protruding portion 992 in the sliding direction. The gap between the side surface of the step portion forming the recess 993 and the side surface of the projecting portion 992 is such that the game balls can flow down in a line at any position. In addition, the downstream side surface of the step portion forming the recessed portion 993 is formed obliquely so that the front side faces the downstream side, so that the game ball can smoothly flow forward from the recessed portion 993. there is

That is, the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 is provided with undulations such as protrusions 992 and recesses 993 . As will be described later, such undulations increase the length of time that the game ball stays on the opening/closing member 990 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 24(b), the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 is an oblique surface that descends to the left, so that the game ball flows down toward the left. Slide portions 994 extending downward are formed on the left and right sides of the lower surface of the opening/closing member 990 . The sliding portion 994 is formed to extend in the front-rear direction, and contacts the upper surface of a holding portion 982 formed on the upper portion of the unit base member 981 so that the opening/closing member 990 is held on the holding portion 982 . It becomes slidable.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23(a), the front end portion of the opening/closing member 990 forms an inclined surface 996 that is inclined such that the lower end is located on the rear side of the upper end. Since the inclined surface 996 is formed in this way, when a game ball exists between the opening/closing member 990 and the channel front wall 952 when the opening/closing member 990 is closed, the game ball can be moved upward. Or the game ball can escape downward.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, a connecting portion 995 is formed in the central portion of the lower surface of the opening/closing member 990 to which a driving arm 983 for transmitting the driving force from the big winning opening solenoid 38b for driving the opening/closing member 990 is connected. ing. The drive arm 983 is positioned below the holding portion 982 . As shown in FIG. 25(b), the holding portion 982 is formed with a through portion 982a through which a connection pin 983a extending upward from the drive arm 983 can be inserted. 990 is connected to the connection portion 995 . Further, as shown in FIG. 25(a), the holding portion 982 is formed with guide ribs 982b positioned on the left and right sides of the connecting portion 995 and extending along the front-rear direction. The guide rib 982b guides the opening/closing member 990 in the front-rear direction by guiding the connecting portion 995 in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 26, one end of the drive arm 983 is connected to a connecting member 984 connected to the big winning opening solenoid 38b. In addition, the drive arm 983 is provided with a rotating shaft 983b extending in the vertical direction, and is rotatable about the rotating shaft 983b. In addition, the rotating shaft 983b is sandwiched from the front and rear by the main body portion 970 and the rear wall member 960 and held so as to be rotatable (see FIG. 19).

When the special variable winning device 38 is closed as shown in FIG. 26(a), the drive shaft 38g of the big winning opening solenoid 38b is extended and the drive arm 983 is positioned at the front end of the rotation range. . In this state, the drive arm 983 is most rotated clockwise about the rotation shaft 983b as viewed from the back side, and the connection pin 983a is positioned at the front end of the movement range.

When opening the special variable winning device 38 from this state, by retracting the drive shaft 38g of the big winning opening solenoid 38b, the drive arm 983 rotates counterclockwise around the rotation shaft 983b as viewed from the back side. direction to move the connecting pin 983a rearward to retract the opening/closing member 990 rearward. As a result, as shown in FIG. 26(b), the special variable winning device 38 is opened. When the special variable prize winning device 38 is to be closed, the operations described above are reversed.

27 to 30 show how game balls flow down in the special variable winning device 38. FIG. 29 and 30 show a part of the front wall member 950 as seen through for the sake of explanation. A game ball flowing down the downflow path 38f from right to left is first guided obliquely forward by the rear wall projecting part 964 positioned most upstream, and flows into the flow path forming part 991 of the opening/closing member 990 . Then, it is guided obliquely rearward by the front wall projecting portion 954 and guided obliquely rearward by the projecting portion 992 of the opening/closing member 990 to flow into the recessed portion 993 . The game ball that has flowed into the concave portion 993 is again guided diagonally forward by the downstream side surface of the concave portion 993 formed diagonally toward the downstream side and the front wall projecting portion 954 adjacent to the downstream side.

Thereafter, the diagonally backward guidance by the front wall projecting portion 954 and the projecting portion 992 and the diagonally forward guidance by the recessed portion 993 and the rear wall projecting portion 964 are repeated, and the game ball flowing down the downflow path 38f meanders back and forth. It begins to flow down. As a result, the time of stay on the opening/closing member 990 becomes longer than when the liquid flows straight down without undulations such as the front wall projecting portion 954, the rear wall projecting portion 964, the projecting portion 992, and the recessed portion 993 in the flow passage 38f. It will happen. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30(a), the game ball is always present on the opening/closing member 990, and the opening/closing member 990 is opened even when the opening time of the special variable winning device 38 is short. 30(b), there is a high possibility that the game ball existing on the opening/closing member 990 will fall and enter the big winning opening 38d, and even if the opening is short, the player will win a prize. can create expectations for In addition, it is preferable to secure the time necessary for the game ball to stay on the opening and closing member 990 for the interval time to close the special variable winning device 38 before the round that is short open. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 31(a), when the opening/closing member 990 is opened, the game ball staying on the opening/closing member 990 comes into contact with the projecting portion 992 formed on the opening/closing member 990. As shown in 31(b), it bounces and is guided in a direction away from the big winning opening 38d. In addition, the bouncing game ball may contact the front wall protrusion 954 of the flow path front wall 952, the rear wall protrusion 964 of the flow path rear wall 962, and the like, and may further move away from the big winning opening 38d. Also, since the protruding portions 992 formed on the opening/closing member 990 are arranged at intervals through which the game balls can pass, the game balls may pass through this interval and fall without coming into contact with the protruding portions 992 . In addition, the opening time of the special variable winning device 38 in the case of short opening, which will be described later, is the time during which even the game ball that bounces in contact with the projecting portion 992 or the like as described above can flow into the big winning opening 38d. ing. As a result, it is possible to flow into the big winning opening 38d even if the opening is short.

By providing the projecting portion 992, the front wall projecting portion 954, and the rear wall projecting portion 964 in this manner, the game ball can roll in various manners when the opening/closing member 990 is opened, and the amusement of the game can be improved. . In addition, when the opening/closing member 990 is opened, the timing of the inflow of a plurality of game balls into the large winning opening 38d existing on the opening/closing member 990 can be shifted, and the ball clogging occurs in the large winning opening 38d. can be prevented.

Although the front wall protrusion 954, the rear wall protrusion 964, the protrusion 992, and the recess 993 are provided as undulations in the downflow passage 38f, other than these may be used. For example, meandering grooves may be formed on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 as undulations so that game balls flow down while meandering along the grooves. In addition, as undulations, rib-like projections and grooves are provided on the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990 so as to be substantially perpendicular to the flowing direction, and when the game ball flows down, it is moved vertically by the projections and grooves so that it flows down. You can do it.

From the above, the game board 30 having the game area 32 in which the game ball can flow down is provided, and the start area provided in the game area 32 (the first start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the second starting winning opening 97) is a game that executes a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of identification information based on the winning of a game ball in 97), and generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. The machine is equipped with a special variable winning device 38 which can be converted into a closed state in which game balls cannot win a prize and an open state in which game balls can win a prize, and which is converted to the open state in a special game state, and the special variable winning device 38 is , a game ball can win a prize from an opening facing upward, and in a closed state the opening is closed to disable the winning of the game ball, and in an open state the opening is opened to enable the winning of the game ball. 990 is provided, and in the closed state, the game ball is configured to be able to flow down the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990, and the opening and closing member 990 is provided with undulations (projection 992, recess 993) on the upper surface. Also, the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the number of game balls during the special game state, and to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, a contact portion (front wall protrusion 954, rear wall protrusion 964) that can be contacted by a game ball flowing down the downflow path 38f is provided around the downflow path 38f configured by the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990. There will be Therefore, by contacting the contact portion, the game balls remain on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 for a longer period of time, thereby suppressing the decrease in the number of game balls during the special game state and increasing the interest of the game. can.

In addition, in the closed state, the game ball is configured to flow down from one of the left and right ends of the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 to the other. It is formed so as to meander. Therefore, the game balls remain on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 for a longer period of time, so that the decrease in the number of game balls during the special game state can be suppressed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

The special variable winning device 38 is opened and closed by the opening/closing member 990 that slides in the front-rear direction. may be configured to rotate downward.

In addition, a game board 30 having a game area 32 in which game balls can flow down is provided, and the start area provided in the game area 32 (first start winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening 97) A game machine that executes a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information based on the winning of a game ball, and generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result, It is equipped with a special variable winning device 38 which can be converted into a closed state in which game balls cannot win a prize and an open state in which game balls can win a prize, and which is converted to the open state in a special game state, and the special variable winning device 38 moves upward. A game ball can win a prize from the facing opening, and in a closed state, the opening is protruded forward to close the opening to prevent the game ball from winning a prize, and in an open state, the game ball retreats backward and opens the opening to allow the game ball to win a prize. An opening/closing member 990 is provided that slides in the front-rear direction so as to enable the opening and closing member 990, and in the closed state, game balls can flow down the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990, and the opening/closing member 990 has undulations on the upper surface (protrusion 992 , recesses 993) are provided so that the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990 for a longer time than when there is no undulation. Therefore, the inclined surface 996 is formed such that the thickness in the direction perpendicular to the sliding direction is reduced.

Therefore, the opening and closing member 990 is provided with undulations on the upper surface so that the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening and closing member for a longer time than when there is no such undulation. can be suppressed, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced. In addition, since the front end portion of the opening/closing member 990 is formed with an inclined surface 996 whose thickness in the direction perpendicular to the sliding direction decreases toward the front end, it is possible to prevent a game ball from being caught when closed.

Further, the upper surface of the front end portion of the opening/closing member 990 is a flat surface along the sliding direction, and the portion below the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 is an inclined surface 996 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being caught when closing, and by being guided downward by the inclined surface 996, it is possible to suppress the reduction of the game balls during the special game state, thereby increasing the interest of the game. can.

FIG. 32 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for overall control of the game. an input unit 120 having an input port; an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver; and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120 and the output unit .

The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a reference clock for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generation and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 to enable operation. be done.

The power supply device 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates the DC32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V or DC5V from the DC32V voltage, and the like. 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal that notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of power failure. and a control signal generator 430 for generating and outputting a control signal such as a reset signal.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 are installed on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the , it is possible to remove it from the object of replacement and to reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. Backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially built-in RAM) of the game control device 100 so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and when it drops below 17 V, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal after a predetermined time. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112 . When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, based on which the information stored in the RAM 111C in the game microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. processing takes place. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 . A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores immutable information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area for the CPU 111A during game control and a storage area for various signals and random values. used as An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or RAM 111C.

Further, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence or absence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a win, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means having a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the game state becomes a game state (special game state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is set, a part of a plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not have And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called all-rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. A display state in which at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same The state of the identification information (excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this ready-to-win state.

This ready-to-reach state includes a plurality of ready-to-reach effects, and as ready-to-win effects with different possibilities of deriving special result modes (different expected values), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value is higher in the order of no reach<normal reach<special 1 reach<special 2 reach<special 3 reach<premier reach. Further, this ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it becomes a loss). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state occurs is a state with a higher possibility of winning a big hit than the case in which the ready-to-win state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or to generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices, and output them to the game machine. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a hit in the special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining the jackpot pattern, and a variation pattern (various types) in the special figure variation display game. Random number generation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining reach and execution time of variation display game in variation display without reach, hit random numbers for determining hit of normal figure variation display game, etc. and a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock that gives the update timing of the random number generation circuit. there is

In addition, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result of the special figure variation display game (hit (big hit or small win) or loss), or the probability state of the special figure variation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 as the current game state (time-saving operating state (general electric support state)), the number of starting memories, etc., from among a plurality of variation pattern tables, any one Select and acquire a fluctuation pattern table. Here, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table out of a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby releasing the prize balls. Perform control for paying out. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning port 36, and a starting port 2 switch in the normal variable winning device 37. 37a, the starting port 3 switch 97a in the second starting winning port 97, the gate switch 34a in the normal starting gate 34, the winning port switch 35a, the special variable winning device 38 It is connected to the big winning port switch 38a, and these switches An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided for inputting a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from the , and converting it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. The proximity I/F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch may be illegally shorted, the sensor or switch may be disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire may be cut and floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as an abnormal condition, and to output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the starting port 3 switch 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a and the big winning port switch 38a are the second input. Input to port 123 . Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124 . Further, the third input port 124 receives the detection signal of the magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the game machine 10 or the like, or the glass frame open detection signal provided on the glass frame 15 of the game machine 10 or the like. A detection signal from the switch 63 and a detection signal from a body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 of the game machine 10 are also inputted. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine so that the detection signal is input to the third input port 124 .

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 through the relay board 70 to a test fire test device (not shown). Furthermore, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97a among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 are input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. It is configured.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It's becoming

The data held by the second input port 123 is read by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level) by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device 200 is ready to accept commands), abnormal payout status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout), shot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (filled)), touch switch signal (input of the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the input signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 .

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as power failure monitoring signals and reset signals from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply 400 and an initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output section 130 . In addition, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus is turned off. is configured as Also, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122 , 123 , 124 of the input section 120 . The data set in each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a trial firing test device of a certification organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, etc. via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor 61 and board radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be directly supplied to the test-firing test device, are temporarily taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. The data bus 140 is supplied to the test-firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that it is not possible. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for taking in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector for relaying the signal line of the detection signal of the switch not via the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

The output unit 130 also has a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 for opening the special variable winning device 38 and a solenoid (universal electrical solenoid) 37c for opening the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. A second output port 134 is provided for outputting the open/close data of the. The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on/off data for the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

The output unit 130 is also provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as big win information to the external information terminal board 71 . The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game arcade, and information about the game machine 10 is transmitted. It can be supplied to an external device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 .

Further, the output section 130 is provided with a first driver (driving circuit) 138a that receives open/close data signals of the big winning opening solenoid 38b and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. , a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the current of the collective display device 50 that is output from the fourth output port 136. A third driver 138c for outputting an ON/OFF drive signal for the lead-in side digit line, and a fourth driver 138d for outputting to the external information terminal board 71 an external information signal to be supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device. is provided.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. Also, the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50 is supplied with DC 12V. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal through the segment line. A power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each game machine to an external inspection device 450 . The photocoupler 139 is configured to allow two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 450 by serial communication. It should be noted that since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using a serial communication terminal of the game microcomputer 111 as in a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 33 .
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 111, and a command and data from the main control microcomputer 311 for displaying images on the display device 41. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 includes a program ROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and a memory content that can be restored even if power is not supplied at the time of a power failure. An FeRAM 323 capable of holding data and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 forming a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a working area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 . A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the content of the performance, instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, lights the decorative lamp, and controls the motor. , solenoid drive control, performance time management, etc.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a working area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. Sending and receiving data in parallel allows commands and data to be sent in a shorter time than in serial mode.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is entered. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to inform the processing status such as the completion of drawing to the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like for the purpose is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311 . The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Via this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure pending number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are transmitted to the production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. there is

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls the board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the information display device 630. , a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18, etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15; A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling the board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory or the like that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . Note that the glass frame 15 may be provided with a frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and may be provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes a effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, etc. The function of detecting the on / off state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) that detects the and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 is provided for detecting and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 .

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a desired level of DC voltage to the production control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by it, and drives a motor and a solenoid. DC 32 V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC 12 V for driving motors and LEDs, DC 5 V as power supply voltage for command I/F 331, and DC 15 V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. is configured to Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC- A DC converter is provided in the performance control device 300 . Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, in the form output from the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc. signal) to put them in the reset state. A cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the performance control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the performance control device 300 is powered on.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by shooting game balls (pachinko balls) toward the game area 32 from a shooting device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills placed in various places in the game area 32, and the normal figure start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 , First start winning port 36 Second starting winning port 97, normal variable winning device 37 or special variable winning device 38, or flow into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and exit the game area 32 Ejected. When the game ball wins the general winning port 35, the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 97, the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38, the number corresponding to the type of the winning winning port Prize balls are discharged to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15 from a payout unit controlled by a payout control device 200 (see FIG. 32).

A gate switch 34a (see FIG. 32) consisting of a non-contact type switch or the like for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided in the normal pattern starting gate 34. When the game ball hit inside passes through the normal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal pattern start gate 34, the normal pattern start memory number is the upper limit number (for example, 4 ) If it is less than the normal pattern start memory number is added (+1) and one normal pattern start memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The number of memory of this normal figure start winning prize is displayed on the normal figure reservation indicator of the collective display device 50. - 特許庁In addition, the normal pattern start memory stores a hit judgment random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal pattern variation display game extracted based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a. It is designed to be

Then, when there is a normal pattern start memory and the normal pattern fluctuation display game can be started, that is, when the normal pattern fluctuation display game is not being executed, the normal pattern fluctuation display game wins and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If it is not in a winning state, the random value for winning determination stored in the first stored normal pattern start memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit or miss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. Then, processing for starting the normal pattern fluctuation display game is performed. When the hit determination random number matches the determination value, the normal pattern variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal pattern specific result) is derived.

In addition, the game control device 100, as a process of executing the normal pattern fluctuation display game, the normal pattern display device provided in the collective display device 50, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are determined in advance over a predetermined fluctuation time. After performing the normal pattern fluctuation display that is repeatedly displayed in the order shown, the process of displaying the normal pattern fluctuation display game that stops and displays the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed. In addition, the display device 41 is used as the normal figure display device, and for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc. are used as the normal identification information. You can

When the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a win, the lighting pattern of any one of the 1st winning stop pattern to the 3rd winning stop pattern forming a special result mode on the normal pattern display corresponding to the type of win is stopped. Along with the display, the general electric solenoid 37c is operated to control the movable member 37b of the ordinary variable winning device 37 to be opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a loss, control is performed to display a lighting pattern corresponding to the result mode of the loss on the normal pattern display.

In addition, the winning ball to the first start winning opening 36, the winning ball to the second starting winning opening 97 and the winning ball to the normal variable winning opening 37 are respectively provided inside the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 It is detected by the switch 37a and the starting port 3 switch 97a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first start memory forming the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning to the first start winning port 36 is set to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). In addition to storing the limit, the second start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the second start winning port 97 or the normal variable winning device 37 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) memorize to Based on the winning to the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 97, and the normal variable winning device 37, a big hit random number value, a big winning pattern random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as start storage information, respectively. , and the extracted random number values are stored in the RAM 111B as the first start memory and the second start memory. Then, the number of memories of this starting memory is displayed on the special figure 1 reservation display and the special figure 2 reservation display of the collective display device 50, and also in the display device 41 of the center case 40 as a decoration special figure start memory display Is displayed. Furthermore, it is also displayed on the information display device 630 .

Then, when the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game can be started, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 stores in the earliest start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game to be started. The random number for judging the big hit is compared with the judging value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of judging the hit or miss of the special figure variation display game is performed. Furthermore, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure variation display game to be executed.

When executing the first special figure variation display game, a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined by the special figure 1 indicator 51 (variation display device) are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined variation time. After performing the display during the special figure 1 fluctuation, the process of displaying the first special figure fluctuation display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed. Also, when executing the second special figure variation display game, a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined by the special figure 2 indicator 52 (variation display device) are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined variation time. After performing the display during the special figure 2 fluctuation, the process of displaying the second special figure fluctuation display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed.

Also, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 (variation display device) and the information display device 630 correspond to the special figure variation display game, and a plurality of types of identification information (for example, (numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) is displayed in a decorative special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the setting of the production state, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the processing of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. In other words, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling effects related to games (such as variable display games).

The decoration special symbol variation display game in the display device 41 is, for example, the decoration special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-described numbers etc. in the display device 41 in the left variation display area (first special symbol), the right variation display area ( 2nd special symbol), in each of medium fluctuation display area (3rd special symbol), each symbol is variably displayed (high-speed variability) at a speed at which identification is difficult. After a predetermined time, the changing symbols are sequentially stopped in the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and stopped in each of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode configured by the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 performs various presentation displays such as the appearance of a character to enhance interest. In addition, the decorative special figure variation display game on the information display device 630 blinks the light emitting member during the variation display, and when the stop time comes, the light emitting member is changed to a light emission mode (lighting, blinking, extinguishing) corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game. etc.). That is, the result mode is displayed by the decoration special pattern (fourth pattern) configured by the light emission mode of the light emitting member.

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 makes the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special figure 2 display device 52 a special result mode or a small win result mode. A lighting pattern is displayed, and processing for generating a special game state or a small winning game state is performed. Moreover, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 or the information display device 630 corresponding to this is also the special result mode or the small hit result mode.

In the process of generating the special game state or the small winning game state, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100, for example, opens the opening/closing member 990 of the special variable winning device 38 by the big winning opening solenoid 38b, and the game enters the big winning opening. Perform control to enable the influx of spheres. Then, until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning opening or a predetermined openable time elapses after the opening of the big winning opening is achieved. is set as one round, and control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeated) this for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening/closing control means for controlling opening and closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost, the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special figure 2 display device 52 is controlled to display the result mode of the loss.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state is finished based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of winning results in the special figure variation display game is higher than in the normal probability state. In addition, even if the high probability state is reached based on the result mode of either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state, general-purpose high-probability state) as a game state after the special game state is finished based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this time-saving state, the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern probability) is set to a high probability (normal pattern high probability state) higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal pattern low probability state). is possible. As a result, the opening time of the normal variable prize winning device 37 per unit time is increased more than when the normal variable prize winning device 37 is in the normal low probability state. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in this embodiment, the normal pattern probability is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal game state.

In addition, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 ms, and the normal pattern stop time for displaying the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 ms, When the normal fluctuation display game results in a winning result and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal electric open time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 ms × 1 time) of the first winning stop pattern, The opening time of the second per stop pattern (general electric open time) and the number of times of opening (e.g., 1700 ms x 2 times), the opening time of the third per stop design (electrical open time) and the number of times of opening (e.g., 1700 m seconds x 3 times).

In addition, the execution time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, the normal pattern stop time, the number of times the normal pattern is opened, and the normal pattern open time are set appropriately so as to control the normal pattern fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 to the time saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (ordinary figure fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display game to be the second fluctuation time shorter than the first fluctuation time (eg 10000ms is 1000ms). In addition, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal pattern stop time for displaying the results of the normal pattern fluctuation display game to be a second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms 704 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation display game results in a winning result and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (general electric open time) is set to the normal state (normal low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than one opening time (eg 100 ms to 1352 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, the number of openings of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 (the number of openings of the general electric power) is greater than the first number of openings (for example, 2 times) for one winning result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number of times (eg, four times). In addition, in the time-saving state, the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal pattern low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the case of the normal operation state. It can be a probability (universal pattern high probability state, eg, 250/251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing one or more of the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal pattern stop time, the normal pattern open number of times, the normal pattern open time, and the normal pattern probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-saving states with different things to be changed. In addition, it is also possible to select either the first opening mode or the second opening mode when the win is achieved. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Also, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated.

In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 may be separate indicators or the same indicator, but each special figure fluctuation display so as not to be executed at the same time. A game is displayed. Also, the display device 41 may use separate display devices and separate display areas for the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, or the same display device and display area may be used. However, the decorative special figure variation display games are displayed independently and not simultaneously. Also, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. - 特許庁Further, in the description of the present embodiment, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as special figure variation display games.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, and the starting port 3 in the second starting winning port 97 The switch 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning slot switch 35a, and the big winning slot switch 38a are provided with coils for detecting magnetic fields. type magnetic proximity sensors (hereinafter referred to as proximity switches) are used. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the game machine 10 are microswitches having mechanical contacts. can be used.

The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be explained. Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, first, a process of prohibiting interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then, when an interrupt occurs, the first address of the area where the values of registers and the like are saved is stored. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of this embodiment, the range of RAM addresses is 0000h to 01FFh, 00h or 01h is taken as the higher order, and 00h at the beginning is set in step S4. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step S5). When at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 is outputting a firing stop signal, the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state, and the firing of game balls is prohibited.

Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the program of the subordinate control means (for example, payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to the instructions from the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for waiting for normal startup. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and waits for the start of the sub-control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It constitutes waiting means for setting a waiting time.

In addition, the power-on delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area from the calculation, so that the control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the standby time starts, the operation of the initialization switch 112 can be reliably performed. detectable. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from power-on until the standby time has elapsed. I have to keep doing it. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, even if you do not perform such a troublesome operation, it will be detected by performing an operation immediately after turning on the power. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read through the port and data bus and the number of times (for example, two times) to be checked is set (step S8), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. (Step S9).

If the power failure monitor signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitor signal has been on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S9). Also, if the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game machine waits for the power to be cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and appropriately handle problems that occur when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with troubles at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents of the previous power shutdown are still retained, so backup processing, etc. will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if no power failure has occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and the value of the timer is 0. is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the timer value is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the waiting time has expired, access to a readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). ), output OFF data to all output ports (set to a state of no output) (step S14).

Next, the serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, in this embodiment, used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step S15), read first However, it is judged from the state of the first input port 122 whether the initialization switch is turned on (step S16).

If the initialization switch is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S17). If so (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), checksum calculation processing is performed to calculate the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM (step S19). match the checksum (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 in FIG. 35, and the process for the normal recovery from the power failure is performed.

Also, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 in FIG. 35 to perform initialization. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation section that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation section. form.

In step S21 of FIG. 35, the initial value at the time of power failure restoration is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are the blackout inspection area, the checksum area, and the area related to error monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept commands, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is in an indeterminate state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared and set to an indeterminate state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined. After that, the area for storing the game state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step S22). Here, if the special figure is not in the high probability (step S22; N), skip steps S23 and S24 and proceed to step S25. Also, if the special figure is in the high probability (step S22; Y), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided on the game board 30 is saved in the segment area (step S24). Then, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special game processing described later is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S25), and step S31. proceed to In the case of this embodiment, in step S25, model designation command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, screen specification command (customer waiting demo screen command if customer waiting, other Then, a plurality of commands such as the command for the recovery screen are sent. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a number-of-effects information command or a high-probability number-of-times information command is also transmitted.

On the other hand, when jumping from steps S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibition area is set to access permission (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are cleared. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial values at the time of RAM initialization are saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. And the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the production|presentation control board (production|presentation control apparatus 300) (step S30), and it progresses to step S31. In the case of this embodiment, in step S30, the model designation command, the special figure 1 reservation number command, the special figure 2 reservation number command, the probability information command, the RAM initialization command (display the customer waiting demo screen, and for a predetermined time ( For example, for 30 seconds), a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying RAM initialization with light and sound) are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a number-of-effects information command or a high-probability number-of-times information command is also transmitted.

In step S31, processing for activating a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit for generating a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the frequency-divided signal. and a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for triggering random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC start-up process of step S31, a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generating circuit is set. The bit permutation pattern is a method of permuting the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit permutation pattern, it is possible to break the regularity of the random number and improve the secrecy of the random number. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be allowed to arbitrarily set.

After that, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on is extracted, and the corresponding various initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, the random number that determines the winning pattern of the special figure (Big hit pattern random number, small hit pattern random number), random number to determine the hit of the normal pattern (hit random number), random number to determine the hit pattern of the normal pattern (hit pattern random number)) as the initial value (start value) of RWM After saving in the area (step S33), interrupt is permitted (step S34). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S35) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random number, the jackpot pattern random number, the small hit pattern random number, the hit random number, and the hit pattern random number are generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. is configured as However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock that is faster than the operating clock of the CPU. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from the CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process) that has the same period as the timer interrupt process, which is a unit. In addition, in the jackpot pattern random number, the small hit pattern random number, the hit random number, and the hit pattern random number, each time the random number goes around, the initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value. ” is adopted. Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter with +1 or -1, or may be updated by a random method in which all the values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the jackpot pattern random number, small hit pattern random number, hit random number, and hit pattern random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times (for example, 2 times) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 via the port and data bus is set (step S36), and the power failure is performed. It is determined whether or not the monitor signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not ON (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By enabling the interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number update process (step S35), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt processing due to the waiting by the initial value random number update processing.

Note that the initial value random number update process in step S35 may be performed in the main process as well as in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid executing the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable interrupts and then update to cancel the interrupts. In addition, if the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing and it is only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing. It has the advantage of being simplified.

If the power failure monitor signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitor signal has been on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal continues to be turned on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the interrupt is temporarily prohibited (step S39), and all A process of outputting OFF data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42). Furthermore, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off and a process (step S44) for saving the calculated checksum, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45) is performed. ), and then wait until the gaming machine is turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. It can be determined when re-entering.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game overall, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means ), the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device 100) and power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

Also, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) , it is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the operation of the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation section (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, and the initialization operation section. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation process]
FIG. 36 shows the checksum calculation processing (steps S19 and S43) in the main processing described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculation address (step S51), the number of repetitions is set (step S52), and "0" is set as the calculation value (step S53). . The number of bytes of the RAM being used is set in the number of repetitions.

After that, the value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step S54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step S55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step S56), and the checksum is completed (step S57). If the calculation is not completed (step S57; N), the process returns to step S54 and the above processing is repeated. If the calculation is finished (step S57; Y), the checksum calculation process is finished.

[Initial value random number update process]
FIG. 37 shows the initial value random number updating process (step S35) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, first, the big hit design initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S61), and the small hit design initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S62). Then, the winning initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S63), the winning design initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S64), and the initial value random number updating process is terminated.
Here, the "jackpot design initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the jackpot stop pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game, and the "small hit design initial value random number" is the small hit of the special figure fluctuation display game. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the stop symbol. In addition, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, and the "hit symbol initial value random number" is the random number that determines the winning stop pattern of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. It is a random number that becomes the initial value. In this way, by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main processing, the randomness of the random number can be enhanced.
It should be noted that the small hit symbol random number does not naturally exist in machines without a small hit. In addition, depending on the model, there is also a game machine that does not have a winning symbol initial value random number.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 38 is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step S101). By switching to register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register saving process to move the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, an input process (step S103) for reading inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, reading the state of each input port is performed. Then, output processing (step S104) for driving control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general electric solenoid 37c) and the like is performed based on output data set in various processes. When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, signal processing and the like are not performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the state of launch permission viewed from the game control device, and the second signal (fire permission signal) indicating the state of firing permission viewed from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated within the device and output to the launch control device. In other words, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, payout command transmission processing (step S105), random number update processing 1 (step S106), and random number update processing 2 (step S107) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 are performed. After that, it is monitored whether normal signals are input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the starting port 3 switch 97a, the normal gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a. Also, a winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S108) for monitoring errors (whether the front frame or the glass frame is open, etc.) is performed. In addition, a special figure game process (step S109) for performing a process relating to a special figure variation display game and a normal figure game process (step S110) for performing processing relating to a normal figure variation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S111) for driving the segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 to display the special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired content (step S111), the magnetic sensor 61 Magnet fraud monitoring processing (step S112) for checking the detection signal from the board to determine if there is any abnormality, board radio wave fraud monitoring processing (step S112) for checking the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 and determining whether there is any abnormality Monitoring processing (step S113) is performed. Then, the external information editing process (step S114) is performed to set the signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, and the timer interrupt process ends.
Here, in this embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of enabling interrupts) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) automatically (at the end of timer interrupt processing). It should be noted that depending on the CPU used, there are game machines that require an instruction to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input processing (step S103) in the timer interrupt processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 39, in the input process, first, the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S121). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 1), the state of that bit is cleared (step S122).

Subsequently, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S123), and the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S124). ), the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S125). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared (step S126). is prepared (step S127), and the switch reading process (step S128) is performed. Here, "preparation" in this embodiment means setting a value in a register, but it is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.

Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S130). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared (step S131). is prepared (step S132), switch reading processing (step S133) is performed, and the input processing ends.

Unused bit data and bit data to be inverted are prepared for each input port.
Therefore, although the unused bit data of input port 2 prepared in step S126 and the unused bit data of input port 3 prepared in step S131 are different data, they may have the same value as a result. be.
In addition, the bit data to be inverted for input port 2 prepared in step S127 and the bit data to be inverted for input port 3 prepared in step S132 are different data, but may result in data having the same value. be.

[Switch read processing]
Next, the details of the switch reading process (steps S128 and S133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 40, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S141). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S142), and after inverting the bit that needs to be reversed (step S143), the port input state 1 of the target switch control area is obtained. (step S144). After that, it waits until the delay time (for example, about 100 μsec) elapses until the second reading (step S145).

After the delay time has elapsed, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read for the second time (step S146). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S147), and after inverting the bit that needs to be inverted (step S148), the port input state 2 of the target switch control area is obtained. (step S149). After that, in the first and second readings, a definite bit pattern is created in which bits with the same state are set to 1 and bits with different states are set to 0 (step S150). It is set as a fixed bit (step S151).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern is created in which bits with the same state are set to 0 and bits with different states are set to 1 in the first and second readings (step S152). The product is taken and used as the previously held bit (step S153). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to switch chattering or the like is removed. Then, the current defined bit and the previously held bit are synthesized and saved as the current defined state (step S154), and the exclusive OR of the previous and current defined states is taken and saved as a rising edge (step S155). , terminates the switch read process.

If the cycle of the timer interrupt is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch is read once for each interrupt process and compared with the results of the previous reading to obtain the signal. There is a method for determining whether or not there has been a change, but in that case, if the switch state read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, there is a risk that a correct determination cannot be made. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by performing two switch read processes in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference, it is possible to avoid the above problem.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S104) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 41, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the output port 135 for outputting segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, the data output to the output port 134 that outputs the data of the general electric solenoid 37c and the big winning opening solenoid 38b is synthesized and output (step S162).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is obtained (step S164). In this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 3. Next, the obtained data and the external information data are combined (step S165), and the combined data (eg, "door/frame open" data, "security signal" data) is sent to the output port for digit/external information output. 136 (step S166).
After that, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S167), and the loaded data is output to the output port 135 for segment output (step S168). In this embodiment, for example, various indicators provided in the collective display device 50, special figure 1 indicator 51, special figure 2 indicator 52, general figure indicator, special figure 1 reserved indicator, special figure 2 reserved The indicator, the normal figure holding indicator, the round indicator and the second game state indicator are dynamically lit.

Subsequently, the various output data of the external information are synthesized (step S169), and the synthesized data (for example, "jackpot signal 1" data, "jackpot signal 2" data, "jackpot signal 3" data, "jackpot signal 4' data, 'symbol determination number signal' data, 'start signal' data, 'main prize ball signal' data) and the output data of launch permission are combined (step S170), and the combined data is It outputs to the output port 137 for outputting the external information/launch permission signal (step S171). Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (step S172). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S173).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (step S174). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step S175). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S176), the output process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S105) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 42, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing payout of prize balls to the payout control device 200. Winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the prize number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command.

The winning number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device each time the number of winning balls generated by winning a prize in the winning opening (scheduled number of payouts) reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). This is an area to be used, and stores prize winning data corresponding to prize balls for which main prize ball signal generation processing has not been performed. That is, the prize number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal. In addition to this main prize ball signal, the payout control device 200 also outputs a payout prize ball signal to the external device each time the number of prize balls actually paid out reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By comparing these two signals, it is possible to monitor fraudulent payouts.

Each of these winning number counter areas has a winning number counter area according to the number of winning balls set for each winning hole (in the case of this embodiment, 3 winning balls, 10 winning balls, and 14 winning balls). is provided, and the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one based on the winning to the winning opening. In other words, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is allocated a wider area than the winning number counter area 2, so that more winning data can be stored. This is because while the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 to which it is sent. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of this embodiment, up to 65535 prizes can be stored in each of the 3 prize ball counter area, the 10 prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 1. , the 3 prize ball counter area, the 10 prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 2 are configured to be able to store up to 255 prizes, respectively.

In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181), the winning number counter area to be checked among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls is "0". Determine if there is a count number that is not If there is no count (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is checked whether the count number of all winning number counter areas has been checked. Determine (step S183). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above processing is repeated. In the case of this embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area→10 prize ball counter area→14 prize ball counter area.

Also, in step S181, when it is determined that there is a count (step S181; Y), the count of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184), and the target winning number counter area 2 acquires the number of payouts corresponding to the address of (step S185). Then, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area and the acquired number of payouts are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S187). As the value of the remaining number of prize balls area before this processing, a fractional number which is less than the predetermined number which is the reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

After that, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189). Also, if it is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, every time the remaining number of prize balls reaches 10, the number of output times of the main prize ball signal is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S191), and the process returns to step S188. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting to the outside of the gaming machine a main prize ball signal including information regarding the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as the game balls enter a predetermined prize area. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of game balls is concentrated during a big win, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game balls, and the accuracy of the prize ball signal generated during the big win is delayed. It is possible to prevent the problem that the number of winning balls cannot be counted.
Here, the process of steps S181 to S191 is a process of updating (increasing) the number of output times of the main prize ball signal, and the process of steps S192 to S201 is a process of transmitting a payout command.

In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has reached "0" (step S193). If the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process is terminated. If the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is in a busy state (step S194).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control. When the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is on (busy state). be done. In other words, the payout busy signal can also be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal serves as a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control.

When this payout busy signal indicates a busy state (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, instead of transmitting a payout command for each timer interrupt, a predetermined time elapses (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 can pay out prize balls. It is configured to transmit a payout command when it is in the state. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, the subsequent processing related to the transmission of the payout command is not performed, thereby avoiding unnecessary processing. It is designed to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

Conditions for the payout busy signal to turn on (busy state) are, for example, during payout operation, during ball lending operation, during shoot ball running out error, during overflow error, during frame radio wave fraud, payout ball detection switch (distributed ball detection switch) during abnormal payout error, during overpayment error, during payout control device 200, the number of prize balls to be paid out is counted in the memory of payout control device 200 (the number of prize balls that have not been paid out = the number of acquired game balls remaining). ) (when not = 0).

If the payout busy signal is not in a busy state (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the win number counter area 1 (step S195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195), the winning number counter area to be checked among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls is "0". Determine if there is a count number that is not

If there is no count (step S195; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is determined whether the check of the count number of all winning number counter areas has been completed. Determine (step S197). When it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above processing is repeated. In the case of this embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area→10 prize ball counter area→14 prize ball counter area.

Also, in step S195, when it is determined that there is a count (step S195; Y), the count of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198), and the target winning number counter area 1 acquires the number-of-payouts command corresponding to the address of (step S199). Then, the acquired payout number command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing transmission intervals, and is set to 200 milliseconds as an initial value, for example.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) is generated in units of winning one prize in the prize winning area, and is transmitted to the payout control device 200 . The payout control device 200 performs control to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on this payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control. It constitutes a prize ball command transmission means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means when it is.

In this way, the game control device 100 performs control to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so the prize is awarded only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute payout control. A ball command will be sent. As a result, the data corresponding to winning prizes that have not yet been paid out are held on the game control device 100 side, so that they are backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and backed up by the payout control device 200.例文帳に追加Accurate payout control can be realized without having a function for doing so.

[Random Number Update Processing 1]
FIG. 43 shows the random number update process 1 (step S106) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit pattern random number, the small hit pattern random number, the hit random number, and the hit design random number which are the targets of the initial value random number update process. In this random number update process 1, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for setting of the next initial value (start value) (step S211).
If the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; N), it is determined whether the small winning symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214). Also, when the jackpot pattern random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; Y), the jackpot pattern initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S212), and the next initial value of the loaded jackpot pattern random number corresponds. A register (start value setting register) holding the start value of the random number counter (random number area) is set (step S213). After that, it is determined whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214).

If the small winning pattern random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; N), it is determined whether the normal winning random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217). In addition, when the small winning design random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; Y), the small winning design initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S215), and the next initial of the loaded small winning design random number The value is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S216). After that, it is determined whether the random number for the normal pattern is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217).

If the normal pattern winning random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; N), it is determined whether the normal pattern winning random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S220). Also, if the normal pattern hit random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; Y), the hit initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S218), and the next initial value of the loaded normal pattern hit random number The value is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S219). After that, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S220).

If the winning pattern random number for the normal pattern is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S220; N), the random number update process 1 is terminated. In addition, when the winning pattern random number of the normal pattern is waiting for the initial value setting (step S220; Y), the winning pattern initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S221), and the loaded winning pattern random number of the normal pattern The next initial value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S222), and the random number update process 1 ends.

[Random Number Update Processing 2]
FIG. 44 shows the random number update process 2 (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display games of special figure 1 and special figure 2. FIG. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (fluctuation pattern random number 1) as fluctuation pattern random numbers, and random number update processing 2 updates both. , and the update target is switched each time an interrupt occurs. Moreover, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, update processing is performed at different interrupt times for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (random number for reach fluctuation mode determination) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. is configured as follows.

In this random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be subjected to the current update process is updated (step S231). In this embodiment, the value of the random update scan counter is updated in the range of 0-3. Then, when the value of the random number update scan counter is "0", the variation pattern random number 1 (upper) is updated, when it is "1", the variation pattern random number 1 (lower) is updated, and when it is "2", it varies. Pattern random number 2 is updated, and when it is "3", variation pattern random number 3 is updated. Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232).
Next, the upper limit determination value of the random number is obtained from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S234). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit judgment value for each type of random number, that is, a value for judging whether or not the random numbers have made a round.

Next, for example, the CPU used as a game microcomputer in this embodiment is not provided with a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as "R register") used for refreshing the DRAM, etc. has a built-in counter called "M1 counter" that operates in the same manner as the R register, and the value of the M1 counter is loaded (step S234). By using the value of the M1 counter, randomness can be imparted to the random number. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S235). The mask value has a different number of bits depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter, is set in the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter, and when updating the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower order of the M1 counter Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). If the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; Y), the value remaining after masking the upper 1 byte of the M1 counter value with a mask value (hereinafter referred to as this is called a "masked value") and "1" is added to the mask update value, the lower 1 byte is set to "0" (step S237), and the process proceeds to step S239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to "0" and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value as the addition value ( Step S238) and proceeds to step S239. The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is to avoid the fact that the masked value may become "0", and if "0" is added afterward, the value before addition will not change. be.

Then, it is determined whether the random number area to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239). If it is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step S240). ) and proceed to step S242. If the random number area to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; N), "0" is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value, and the value (1) of the random number area to be updated is set as the lower 1 byte of the random number value. byte) is set (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

In step S242, a value obtained by adding the additional value determined in step S237 or S238 to the random value is set as a new random value, and it is determined whether or not this new random value is greater than the upper limit judgment value acquired in step S233 (step S243). If the new random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step S243; N), the new random number is saved in the lower random number area of the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S245). If the new random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step S243; Y), the value obtained by subtracting the upper limit judgment value from the new random number is used as a new random number (step S244). Byte random numbers or 2-byte random numbers are saved in the lower random number area (step S245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number area is a 2-byte random number (step S246), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; N), the random number update process 2 is terminated. If it is a 2-byte random number (step S246; Y), a new random number value (if a new random number value is calculated again, that value) is saved in the upper random number area of the 2-byte random number (step S247). ), the random number update process 2 ends.
In the case of this embodiment, the upper limit judgment value, the mask value of the M1 counter, and the type information of the random number area to be updated (1-byte random number, 2-byte random number (upper), 2-byte random number (lower)) are stored in the effect random number update table. , the address of the update area, etc. are defined for each type of random number to be updated (4 blocks).

Thus, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the special figure 1 and special figure 2 variation display games. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting area of the start winning port 36 or the normal variation winning device 37. Random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for

[Winning gate switch/state monitoring process]
FIG. 45 shows the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In this winning hole switch/state monitoring process, first, a winning hole monitoring table corresponding to the big winning hole switch 38a in the big winning hole (special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and the big winning hole is open. A fraudulent and winning monitoring process (step S304) is executed to monitor whether there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening and to detect a normal winning even though there is no illegal winning.

The winning opening monitoring table contains a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input to the target switch, the lower address of fraud monitoring information, the lower address of the fraudulent winning number area, the fraudulent winning error notification command, and the fraudulent winning The upper limit of the number (the number of judging fraud occurrence), the address of the prize winning port switch table, and the information of the notification timer update information (permission/update) are defined. In addition to the number of times of monitoring (the number of switches), the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table contains, for each switch, a monitoring switch bit, a lower address of the winning number counter area 1, and a winning number counter area 2. information of the lower address of is defined. The winning hole monitor table is prepared for each switch to be monitored.

Next, a prize winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the general electrical system is prepared (step S305). (Step S306) is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table is prepared for winning opening switches (for example, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 3 switch 97a, and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that do not require fraud monitoring processing (step S307). Winning number counter update processing (step S308) for updating the number is performed.

Next, update the state scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches and signals whose states are to be monitored and which switch or signal is to be monitored this time (step S309). In this embodiment, the state scan counter is updated from 0 to 3. After that, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) for determining the state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of this embodiment, by referring to the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for the value of the state scan counter, if the value of the state scan counter is "0", the switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector, etc. State monitoring based on the 1 signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "1", state monitoring based on the shot ball cut switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is "2", the state monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "3", the state monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. be.

Next, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) is performed to determine the state such as whether an error has occurred.

In the case of this embodiment, by referring to the game machine state monitoring table 2 for the value of the state scan counter, if the value of the state scan counter is "0", it is based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch 63. When the state monitoring is set and the value of the state scan counter is "1", the state monitoring based on the signal output from the body frame open detection switch 64 is set. Further, when the value of the state scan counter is "2", state monitoring based on the frame radio wave fraud signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "3", state monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set. set.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the state scan counter is "0" (step S314), and if the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the winning opening switch/state monitoring process is executed. finish. In this case, there is no state to be monitored in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is "0" (step S314; Y), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315), and the status of the gaming machine is determined such as whether an error has occurred. A state check process (step S316) is performed.

In the case of this embodiment, by referring to the game machine state monitoring table 3 for the value of the state scan counter, if the value of the state scan counter is "0", the switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector, etc. Two-signal based condition monitoring is set up. It should be noted that the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 does not define the state scan counter from "1" to "3".

Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step S317) for checking a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch/state monitoring process is terminated. Note that the processing of steps S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter, which is updated for each timer interrupt, is "0", so that it is executed once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 milliseconds, the processing of steps S315 to S317 is performed every 16 milliseconds.

[Fraud & Winning Monitoring Process]
FIG. 46 shows fraud and winning monitoring processing (steps S302, S304, S306) in the above-described winning opening switch/state monitoring processing. This fraud & winning monitoring process is a process performed on the big winning opening switch 38 a of the special variable winning device 38 and the starting opening 2 switch 37 a of the normal variable winning device 37 . With regard to the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) and general electrical (ordinary variable winning device 37), it is easy to forcibly open the opening and closing member, insert the game ball, and pay out the prize ball. In addition to monitoring fraud.

In the fraud & winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning opening switch to be monitored for error is checked (step S321), and it is determined whether or not it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during a special game state in which the special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning opening switch to be monitored for errors is the big winning opening switch 38a, and the winning opening switch to be monitored for errors is started. If it is the mouth 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is executed based on the hit of the normal figure.

Then, if it is the fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323). If there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332). In addition, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the number of fraudulent winnings of interest is updated by +1 (step S324), and the number of fraudulent winnings after updating is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations to be monitored. It is determined whether there is (step S325).

In the case of this embodiment, regardless of the type of winning opening switch to be monitored for errors, the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations is set to five, but the number of fraudulent occurrences is defined differently for each type of winning opening switch. can also The reason why the determination number is set to 5 is that, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state is changed to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the big winning opening, and the game ball is caught in the valid period of the big winning opening switch. This is to avoid judging it as fraud when a prize is won after the time period or when noise is superimposed on the signal, and to avoid simply judging it as an error even though it is not fraudulent.

Then, if the number of fraudulent winnings is not equal to or greater than the monitoring target fraud occurrence judgment number (step S325; N), a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S330). If the fraudulent winning number is greater than or equal to the monitoring object fraud occurrence determination number (step S325; Y), the fraudulent award winning number is kept at the fraud occurrence determination number (step S326), and the target fraudulent winning notification timer area is set to the initial value. (for example, 60000 ms) is saved (step S327). Next, a target fraudulent occurrence command is prepared (step S328), a fraudulent winning occurrence flag is prepared as a fraudulent flag (step S329), and the prepared fraudulent flag is compared with the value of the target fraudulent flag area (step S338). ).

On the other hand, if it is not during the fraud monitoring period (step S322; N), a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S330), and winning number counter update processing (step S331) for setting prize balls is executed. conduct. If the target notification timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step S332). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero. After that, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S333), and if the value is not 0 (step S333; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the cheating & winning monitoring process is terminated. Also, if the value is 0 (step S333; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, a target fraud cancellation command is prepared (step S334), and the illegal winning cancellation flag is set as the fraud flag. Prepare (step S335). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336).

If it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336; Y), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the fraudulent & winning monitoring process this time, the target number of fraudulent winnings is cleared ( Step S337), the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S338). Also, if it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336; N), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the fraud & winning monitoring process before the previous time, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. It is compared with the value of the illegality flag area (step S338).

Then, when the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S338; Y), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area do not match (step S338; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step S339), and effect command setting processing is performed. (Step S340), the dishonesty & winning monitoring process is terminated. By the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the production control device 300 with the occurrence of an error, and an illegal winning error cancellation command is transmitted to the production control device 300 with the cancellation of the error, and the start and end of the error notification are set. It will be done.

[Processing for updating winning number counter]
FIG. 47 shows winning number counter update processing (steps S308 and S331) in the above-described winning opening switch/state monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter update process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening monitoring table (step S351), and it is checked whether there is an input (exactly, a change in input) to the target winning opening switch. Determine (step S352).

If there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether or not all switches have been monitored (step S362). Also, if there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S353), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S354), It is determined whether overflow occurs (step S355). If no overflow has occurred (step S355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). ). Also, if an overflow occurs (step S355; Y), the value of the target win number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). In the case of this embodiment, in step S354, the counter for prize balls (payout command transmission) is updated. The counter size is 2 bytes (range 0 to 65535).

After loading the target win number counter area 2 value (step S357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S358), and it is determined whether or not there is an overflow (step S359). If no overflow has occurred (step S359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361). , whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S362). If an overflow occurs (step S359; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether or not all switches have been monitored (step S362). In this embodiment, step S358 updates the counter for the main prize signal. The counter size is 1 byte (ranging from 0 to 255).

If the monitoring of all switches has not been completed (step S362; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352). Also, when the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S362; Y), the win number counter update process is completed. By the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning to the winning area, and the winning information is stored.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 48 shows gaming machine state check processing (steps S311, S313, S316) in the above-described winning hole switch/state monitoring processing. In this gaming machine state check process, first, the state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is obtained (step S371), and it is determined whether or not the signal to be monitored is on (step S372).

Information corresponding to the state scan counter is defined in the state monitoring table (gaming machine state monitoring table prepared in the winning hole switch/state monitoring process). This information includes, for example, the lower address of the top address of the state monitoring area, the lower address of the port input state area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, the mask data for extracting only the bits of the target signal, the signal ON judgment data, status OFF command (error notification end command for error system), status ON command (error notification start command for error system), status OFF monitoring timer comparison value, status ON monitoring timer Contains a comparison value.

If the target signal is not ON (step S372; N), a state OFF flag is prepared as a state flag (step S373), and the target state OFF command is acquired and prepared (step S374). Thereafter, the target state OFF monitoring timer comparison value is obtained (step S375), and the value of the target signal control region and the current signal state are compared (step S379). If the target signal is not ON (step S372; N), the error signal indicates that there is no error (normal), and the signal from the touch switch indicates that the touch switch is not touched. be.

On the other hand, if the target signal is ON (step S372; Y), a state ON flag is prepared as a state flag (step S376), and the target state ON command is acquired and prepared (step S377). After that, the target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is obtained (step S378), and the value of the target signal control region and the current signal state are compared (step S379). If the target signal is ON (step S372; Y), it means that the signal of the error system indicates an error (abnormality or illegality), and that the signal from the touch switch is touched. It is a state indicating

If the value of the target signal control region matches the current signal state (step S379; Y), that is, if the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382). , the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383). If the value of the target signal control region and the current signal state do not match (step S379; N), that is, if the signal state has changed, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control region ( step S380). Then, the target state monitoring timer is cleared (step S381), the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382), and it is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is greater than or equal to the monitoring timer comparison value ( step S383).

If the target state monitoring timer value is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; N), the gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the value of the target status monitoring timer is greater than or equal to the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; Y), the status monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the comparison value -1 (step S384). The obtained state flag is compared with the value of the target state flag area (step S385).

Then, when the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (step S385; Y), the gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area do not match (step S385; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S386), and effect command setting processing is executed. (step S387), and ends the gaming machine state check process. As a result, the state off command prepared in step S374 or the state on command prepared in S377 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Payment busy signal check processing]
FIG. 49 shows the payout busy signal check process (step S317) in the winning hole switch/state monitoring process described above. In this payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step S391). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start the payout control.

If the payout busy signal is on (step S391; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S392), and an ON determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S393), It is determined whether the value of the busy signal state field matches the current signal state (step S396). Also, if the payout busy signal is not on (step S391; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S394), and an OFF confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S395). , busy signal state field match the current signal state (step S396). This makes it possible to check whether the same state continues for multiple timer interrupts.

If the value in the busy signal state area does not match the current signal state (step S396; N), the current signal state is saved in the busy signal state area (step S397), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0. Then (step S398), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399). If the value of the busy signal state area matches the current signal state (step S396; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value set in step S393 or step S395 (step S400). End the payout busy signal check process. Also, if it is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the comparison value of -1 (step S401), prepared in step S392 or step S394. The status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S402), and the payout busy signal check process ends.

By this processing, the busy signal status is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal status is not changed immediately, and the busy signal status is changed when the changed state continues for the signal determination time. etc.

In addition, since the busy signal status is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal status is not set and becomes an indefinite state until any signal state continues for the signal determination time. As a result, when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure, even if the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200. , and the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and immediately grasps that the payout process can be performed, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being broken.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (step S109) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the special figure game process, the input of the starter 1 switch 36a, the starter 2 switch 37a, and the starter 3 switch 97a is monitored, the control of the whole process relating to the special figure variation display game, and the display of the special figure are set.

As shown in FIG. 50, in the special game process, first, a start switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring winning of the start 1 switch 36a, the start 2 switch 37a, and the start 3 switch 97a is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when there is a game ball winning in the first starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the second starting winning opening 97, various random numbers (such as jackpot random numbers) are extracted, and the winning Before the start of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the game result pre-determination is performed to determine the game result based on the winning prize in advance.

Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this big winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of game balls by the big winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed.

Next, if the special game processing timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step A3). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special game processing timer is "0" (step A4). If the value of the special game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already timed up, refer to branch to the processing corresponding to the special game processing number A special figure game sequence branch table is set in a register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special game processing number (step A7).

At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special figure variation are performed. A special figure normal process (step A8) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
At step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "1", the setting of the special figure stop display time, the setting of the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, etc. (Step A9) is performed.

At step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the kind of the big win and the big winning opening of each big win are performed. Processing during special figure display (step A10) for setting fanfare time according to the opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing processing during fanfare/interval, etc. is performed.

At step A7, if the special game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the big winning gate, the update of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the big winning gate, etc. are performed. A fanfare/interval process (step A11) is performed.
At step A7, if the special game processing number is "4", if the jackpot round is not the final round, an interval command is set, and if it is the final round, an ending command is set; A large winning opening opening process (step A12) for setting information necessary for ball processing is performed.

At step A7, if the special game process number is "5", if the big win round is the last round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged and the big win end process are performed. A large winning hole remaining ball processing (step A13) is performed for setting information necessary for performing the processing.
At step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "6", a jackpot end process (step A14) for setting information necessary for carrying out the special figure normal processing is performed.

At step A7, if the special game processing number is "7", the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small win occurs are set, the fanfare command is set, and processing during the small win is performed. Processing (step A15) during a small winning fanfare for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
At step A7, if the special game processing number is "8", small hit middle processing (step A16) for setting information necessary for setting the ending command and performing small hit remaining ball processing is performed. .
In step A7, if the special game processing number is "9", processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls that have won the prize in the big winning opening during processing during the small winning, and processing for ending the small winning. A small hit remaining ball process (step A17) for setting information necessary for performing is performed.
At step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "10", small winning end processing (step A18) for setting information necessary for carrying out special figure normal processing, etc. is performed.

Thereafter, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step A19), the symbol variation control process related to the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step A20) is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step A21), the symbol variation control process (step A22) pertaining to the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed, and the special figure game process is finished. do. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step A19, and the subsequent processes are executed. conduct.

Incidentally, a small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of a conditional device, and a big win is a special result that accompanies the operation of a conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit pattern). It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable prize winning device 38 is set (the character product continuous operating device is operated). The fact that the conditional device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small prize lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, "conditional device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term with a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the startup switch monitoring process (step A1) in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, in the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, a first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and a hardware random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target starting port switch (starting port 1 switch 36a in this case), the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and is sent to the target starting port. Set information indicating that a prize has been won. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a prize to the first start opening, which is the start opening of Toku-zu 1 (step A103).
At step A103, when it is determined that there is no winning to the first start opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A103, if it is determined that there is a winning prize to the first start port (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not during special figure time saving (during general electricity support) (step A104 ).

At step A104, when it is determined that it is not in the special figure time saving (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A104, when it is determined that it is in the special figure time saving (step A104; Y), prepare a right-handed instruction notification command (step A105), and perform production command setting processing (step A106) . That is, if it is a time-saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first starting hole (first starting winning hole 36) is not won unless the player is left-handed, and the normal variable prize-winning device 37 is not won unless the player is right-handed. Therefore, the time-saving state is a game state in which right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting, but when there is a first start opening winning during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state) , a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 performs notification (warning) instructing to hit to the right.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) (step A107), special figure starting opening switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

Next, the second starting point (normal variable winning device 37) prepares a winning monitoring table (step A109), and performs hardware random number acquisition processing (step A110). In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target starting port switch (starting port 2 switch 37a in this case), the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and is sent to the target starting port. Set information indicating that a prize has been won. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a prize to the second start opening which is the start opening of the special figure 2 (step A111).
At step A111, when it is determined that there is no winning in the second start opening (step A111; N), the process proceeds to step A116 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A111, when it is determined that there is a prize to the second start port (step A111; Y), the normal electric accessory (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is in operation, that is, normal fluctuation It is determined whether or not the prize winning device 37 is in an open state in which the game ball can win a prize (step A112). It shifts to the processing of A114 and performs the subsequent processing. On the other hand, in step A112, when it is determined that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not normal electric fraud is occurring (step A113).

In step A113, it is determined that fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (eg, 5). The normal variable winning device 37 cannot win a game ball when it is closed, and can win a game ball only when it is open. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent wins. Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (upper limit) for determination of fraud occurrence, it is determined that fraud is occurring.

At step A113, if it is determined that the general electric fraud is not occurring (step A113; N), prepare a table for setting information on suspension by the second start port (normal variable winning device 37) (step A114), After performing the special figure starting mouth switch common processing (step A115), the process proceeds to step A116, and the subsequent processing is performed. Further, when it is determined in step A113 that electricity fraud is occurring (step A113; Y), the process proceeds to step A116 and the subsequent processes are performed.

Next, a third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A116), and hardware random number acquisition processing (step A117) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target starting port switch (starting port 3 switch 97a in this case), the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and is sent to the target starting port. Set information indicating that a prize has been won. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a prize to the third start opening, which is the start opening of the special figure 2 (step A118).
When it is determined in step A118 that there is no winning to the third starting port (step A118; N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step A118, when it is determined that there is a winning prize to the third start port (step A118; Y), it is determined whether or not during special figure time saving (during general electricity support) (step A119 ).

At step A119, when it is determined that it is not in the special figure time saving (step A119; N), the process proceeds to step A122 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A119, when it is determined that it is in the special figure time saving (step A119; Y), prepare a right-handed instruction notification command (step A120), and perform production command setting processing (step A121) . That is, if it is a time-saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A120), and effect command setting processing (step A121) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, no prize is awarded to the third start port (second start prize port 97) unless the player is left-handed, and the normal variable prize-winning device 37 is not awarded unless the player is right-handed. Therefore, the time-saving state is a game state in which right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting, but when there is a third start opening winning during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state) , a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 performs notification (warning) instructing to hit to the right.
Then, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) (step A122), special figure starting opening switch common processing (step A123) is performed, starting opening switch monitoring End the process.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, the details of the hardware random number acquisition process (steps A102, A110, A117) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring process will be described. As shown in FIG. 52, in the hardware random number acquisition process, first, the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36), the second starting opening (normal fluctuation winning opening 37), and the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97), set the non-winning information of the starting opening to be monitored (step A131), and set the starting opening to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the starting opening 3 switch 97a. It is determined whether or not there is an input to the switch (step A132).
If there is no input to the starting switch to be monitored (step A132; N), the hardware random number acquisition process is terminated.
On the other hand, if there is an input to the starting switch to be monitored (step A132; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A133), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the random number latch register to be monitored (step A134). .

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.
If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134; Y), the extracted jackpot random number is loaded into the monitored hard random number latch register and prepared (step A135). Then, among the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36), the second starting opening (normal variable winning device 37), and the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97), the starting opening to be monitored wins Yes information is set (step A136), and the hard random number acquisition process ends.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
Next, the details of the special figure starting opening switch common processing (steps A108, A115, A123) in the starting opening switch monitoring processing described above will be described. Special figure starting mouth switch common processing, when there is an input of the starting mouth 1 switch 36a, the starting mouth 2 switch 37a, the starting mouth 3 switch 97a, is a process that is performed in common for each input.

As shown in FIG. 53, in the special figure starting opening switch common processing, first, among the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the starting opening 3 switch 97a, the number of winnings to the starting opening switch to be monitored information is output to the management device external to the gaming machine 10 (step A141), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A142), and the output count overflows. (Step A143).
If the output count does not overflow (step A143; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM starting signal output count area (step A144), and the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A143; Y), the process proceeds to step A145. In this embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting signal output count area. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the number of output times overflows, so that saving is not performed.

Next, among the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97a, it is determined whether the update target special figure holding (starting memory) number corresponding to the monitored starting port switch is less than the upper limit value. Determine (step A145).
When the special figure reservation number to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A145; N), the special figure start opening switch common processing is terminated.
Also, if the number of special figures pending to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A145; Y), the number of special figures pending to be updated (the number of special figures 1 pending or the number of special figures 2 pending) is updated by +1 ( Step A146), prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number (step A147), perform production command setting processing (step A148), target starting opening winning flag is saved (step A149). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number is calculated (step A150), and the jackpot random number prepared in the hardware random number acquisition process of steps A102, A110, and A117 is RWM. (step A151). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A152), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A153). This jackpot symbol random number is used in the special figure reservation information determination process (step A160).

Next, the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in this embodiment) are saved in the corresponding RWM variation pattern random number storage area (step A154). Then, it is determined whether or not the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) is won (step A155). If it is determined in step A155 that the first start opening is not won (step A155; N), the process proceeds to step A158. On the other hand, in step A155, when it is determined that the first start opening is won (step A155; Y), a small hit pattern random number is extracted and prepared (step A156), and a small hit pattern of RWM is prepared. Save in the random number storage area (step A157). In step A158, the address of the variation order flag storage area corresponding to the sum of the special figure 1 reserved number and the special figure 2 reserved number (any place from 1 to 8) is calculated (step A158), the calculated area Save the target (special figure 1 or special figure 2) variation order flag (step A159), perform special figure reservation information determination processing (step A160), and end the special figure start opening switch common processing.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the starting winning areas of the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the normal variable winning opening 37. It constitutes a start memory means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start memory which is the execution right of the variable display game. In addition, the starting storage means (game control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning port 36, which is the starting port of the special figure 1, to the first Stored as a start memory, various random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning port 97 or the normal variable winning device 37, which is the starting port of the special figure 2, are set to the second start with a predetermined number as the upper limit Store as memory.

[Special Figure Reservation Information Judgment Process]
Next, the details of the special figure reservation information determination process (step A160) in the special figure start opening switch common process described above will be described. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 54, first, a big-hit determination process (step A161) is performed to determine whether or not the game is a big-hit according to whether or not the big-hit random number matches the big-hit determination value. If the determination result is a big hit (step A162; Y), a big hit pattern random number check table corresponding to the target starting switch is set (step A163), and the big hit pattern random number prepared in step A152 is checked. Stop symbol information is acquired (step A164), and the process proceeds to step A171.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A162; N), it is determined whether or not the first start opening (start winning opening 36) is won (step A165).
At step A165, when it is determined that the first start opening is not won (step A165; N), stop symbol information is set (step A170), and the process proceeds to step A171.
On the other hand, in step A165, when it is determined that the first starting port is won (step A165; Y), whether or not the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. A small hit determination process (step A166) for determining whether is performed. Then, if the result of determination is not a small hit (step A167; N), stop symbol information for losing is set (step A170), and the process proceeds to step A171.
On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (step A167; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A168), and stop pattern information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A156 is displayed. Obtained (step A169), and proceeds to the process of step A171.

Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A171), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A172). Next, a special figure information setting process (step A173) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed, and a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A174).

After that, prepare a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game (step A175), and perform the production command setting process. (Step A176), end the special figure reservation information determination process. In addition, the special figure information setting process in step A173 and the variation pattern setting process in step A174 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

By the above processing, the look-ahead pattern command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead object and the look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. and transmitted to the effect control device 300 . As a result, the judgment result (read-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, especially by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, etc., to the player before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the starting memory in the starting winning memory means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the starting memory (for example, whether or not a special result will be obtained). (e.g., determination of whether or not)) constitutes prior determination means. The timing for determining the random value stored in correspondence with the starting memory in advance is not limited to the time when the starting memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played. good.

[Large winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 55, in the big winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special game processing number is "4", that is, whether the big winning opening opening process is in progress (step A201). . If the big winning opening is being processed (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. In addition, if the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is not being performed (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special game processing number is "5", that is, whether the remaining ball processing for the large winning opening is being performed (step A201; N) A202).

If the large winning hole remaining balls are being processed (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. Also, if the big winning hole remaining balls are not being processed (step A205; N), it is determined whether the value of the special game processing number is "8", that is, whether the small winning process is being performed (step A203 ). If it is during the small hit process (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. Also, if the small hit process is not in progress (step A203; N), it is determined whether the value of the special game process number is "9", that is, whether the small hit remaining ball process is in progress (step A204). Since the special game processing number does not move to the next until the special game processing timer reaches "0", the progress of the game can be checked by the special game processing number.

When the small hit remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A204; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring processing is terminated. Further, when the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. Then, the winning counter is set to "0" (step A205), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the big winning opening switch (step A206).

If there is no input to the big winning opening switch (step A206; N), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214). Also, if there is an input to the big winning slot switch (step A206; Y), a big winning slot count command is prepared (step A207), and effect command setting processing (step A208) is performed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A209), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214).

When it is determined whether the winning counter value is "0" (step A214), if the winning counter value is "0" (step A214; Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
If the value of the winning counter is not "0" (step A214; N), it is determined whether or not the big winning hole remaining balls are being processed (step A215).
When the big winning opening remaining balls are being processed (step A215; Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is finished, and when the big winning opening remaining balls are not being processed (step A215; N), the small winning opening remaining balls are processed. It is determined whether it is in the middle (step A216).
If the remaining small hit balls are being processed (step A216; Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. It is added to the mouth count (step A217), and it is determined whether or not the big winning mouth count exceeds the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round. For example, "9") (step A218).

If the large winning opening count number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the number of large winning opening counts is equal to or higher than the upper limit (step A218; Y), the number of large winning openings is kept at the upper limit (step A219), and the special game processing timer area is cleared to 0 ( Step A220), it is determined whether or not during small hit processing (step A221). If the small winning process is not in progress (step A221; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If the small winning process is in progress (step A221; Y), the small winning opening control pointer area The value for ending the opening operation is saved (step A222), and the big winning opening switch monitoring process ends. As a result, the big winning opening is closed and one round ends.

[Special normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (step A8) in the special figure game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 56, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number are both "0" (step A301).
In step A301, when it is determined that both the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number are not "0" (step A301; N), the flag is loaded from the fluctuation order flag storage area (for the total number of reservations 1) Then (step A302), it is determined whether this variation is the variation of special figure 1 (step A303).
In step A303, if it is determined that this variation is the variation of special figure 1 (step A303; Y), prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number (step A304), Effect command setting processing (step A305) is performed, special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A306) is performed, and special figure normal processing is ended. It should be noted that, at this point, the special figure 1 reservation number is not updated by -1, but in step A304, prepare a command (decorative special figure reservation number command) corresponding to the -1 updated value.

On the other hand, in step A303, if it is determined that this variation is not the variation of special figure 1 (step A303; N), that is, if this variation is the variation of special figure 2, it corresponds to the number of special figures 2 pending Prepare the decoration special figure reservation number command (step A307), perform the effect command setting process (step A308), perform the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A309), and end the special figure normal process. It should be noted that, at this point, the special figure 2 reservation number is not updated by -1, but in step A307, prepare a command (decoration special figure reservation number command) corresponding to the -1 updated value.

Also, in step A301, when it is determined that both the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number are "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started ( Step A310), if the customer waiting demonstration has not started yet (step A310; N), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step A311).
Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A312), and effect command setting processing (step A313) is performed.
Next, set "0" for special figure normal processing as the processing number (step A314), save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step A315), and clear the fluctuation pattern discrimination flag area ( Step A316). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A317), and the special figure normal processing is terminated.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A306) in the special figure normal processing described above will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 57, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A321), and the first special figure A big win flag 1 setting process (step A322) is performed to set the deviation information and the big win information to the big win flag 1 for determining whether or not the variation display game is a big win.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure to set the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern Information setting processing (step A324) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is set. (Step A325). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting information on the start of variation of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A327) is performed.
Next, set "1" for special figure fluctuation processing as the processing number (step A328), and save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step A329).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal relating to the start of variation of special symbol 1 (for example, a special symbol 1 varying signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the initial value ( For example, 52 ms) is saved (step A333), the initial value (eg, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A309) in the above-mentioned special figure usual processing will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. 57 is performed for the second start memory. It is done as

As shown in FIG. 58, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A341), and the second special figure A big win flag 2 setting process (step A342) is performed for setting the deviation information and the big win information to the big win flag 2 for determining whether or not the variation display game is a big win.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure to set the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern Information setting processing (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting information on the start of variation of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed.
Next, set "1" for special figure fluctuation processing as the processing number (step A348), and save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step A349).

Next, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol 2 (for example, the signal during special symbol 2 fluctuation is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the initial value ( For example, save 104 ms) (step A353), save the initial value (for example, 0) in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern number area (step A354), and end the special figure 2 fluctuation start process.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 59 shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In this big-hit flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small-hit flag area (step A361), and deviation information is saved in the big-hit flag 1 area (step A362). Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for reservation number 1), prepare (step A363), and clear the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for reservation number 1) to 0 (step A364). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here, the first among the special figures 1). After that, a big-hit determination process (step A365) is performed to determine whether or not the big-hit is a big-hit according to whether or not the prepared big-hit random number matches the big-hit determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A365) is a big hit (step A366; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the losing information is saved in step A362 (step A367 ), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A365) is not a big hit (step A366; N), whether or not the prepared big hit random number matches the small hit determination value is a small hit or not. A small hit determination process (step A368) for determining is performed.

Then, when the judgment result of the small hit determination process (step A368) is a small hit (step A369; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag area where the loss information is saved in step A361. (Step A370), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the small hit determination process (step A368) is not a small hit (step A369; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed while saving the loss information in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. Thus, in the present embodiment, the result of the first special figure variation display game is one of "big win", "minor win", and "lose".

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 60 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this big-hit flag 2 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the big-hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, load the jackpot random number from the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) of RWM, prepare (step A372), and clear the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) to 0 (step A372). It should be noted that the reserved number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here, the first among the special figures 2). After that, a big-hit determination process (step A374) is performed to determine whether or not the big-hit is a big-hit depending on whether the prepared big-hit random number matches the big-hit determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is a big hit (step A375; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A371 (step A375 ), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the big-hit judgment process (step A374) is not a big-hit (step A375; N), the big-hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big-hit flag 2. Thus, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special figure variation display game is either "big hit" or "loss".

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 61 shows the big hit determination process (steps A161, A365, A374) in the above-described special figure reservation information determination process, big hit flag 1 setting process and big hit flag 2 setting process. In this jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A381), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382). A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A382; Y), set a loss as the judgment result (step A387), and end the jackpot judgment processing. Specifically, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A365) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, when the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), Since it is a small hit or a loss, "other than a big hit (small hit or loss)" is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), it is a loss. Therefore, "other than big win (lost)" is set as the determination result (step A387).
Also, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A382; N), it is judged whether or not it is in a high probability state (step A383).

And, if the high probability state (step A383; Y), set the upper limit judgment value in the high probability (step A384), determine whether the target jackpot random number value is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A386 ). Also, if it is not a high probability state (step A383; N), set the upper limit judgment value in the low probability (step A385), and determine whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A386) .

If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A386; Y), the judgment result is set to be lost (step A357), and the jackpot judgment processing is terminated. Specifically, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A365) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is greater than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), a small Since it is a hit or a loss, "other than a big win (minor win or loss)" is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, if the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A374) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process, and if the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), it is a loss. , "Other than big win (lost)" is set as the determination result (step A387).
If the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A386; N), that is, if the game is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the judgment result (step A388), and the jackpot judgment process is terminated.

[Small hit determination process]
FIG. 62 shows the small hit determination process (steps A166, A368) in the above-described special figure reservation information determination process and the big hit flag 1 setting process. In this small hit determination process, first, a small hit lower limit judgment value is set, and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391). In addition, the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit determination is used to perform the small hit determination. That is, the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value If it is equal to or less than the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit. Of course, the range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value are set so as not to overlap each other.

If the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; Y), that is, if it is a loss, the judgment result is set to be a loss (step A393), and the small hit determination process is terminated.
Also, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; N), set the small hit upper limit judgment value, and determine whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value. (Step A392).

If the value of the big hit random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A392; Y), that is, if it is a loss, the judgment result is set to be a loss (step A393), and the small hit judgment process is terminated.
Also, if the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A392; N), that is, if it is a small hit, the small hit is set as the judgment result (step A394), and the small hit judgment process ends. do.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
FIG. 63 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In this special figure 1 stop design setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401), and if it is a big hit (step A401; Y), the special figure 1 big hit pattern random number storage area (reservation number 1 ) to load the jackpot pattern random number (step A402). Next, a special figure 1 jackpot design table is set (step A403), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded jackpot design random number is acquired, and saved in a special figure 1 stop design number area (step A404). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the special figure 1 jackpot stop design information table is set (step A405), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A406). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 1 display device 51) and the stop design in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A407), the probability fluctuation judgment data corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired, and the probability fluctuation judgment is made. It saves in the data area (step A408), and saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (step A409).

These pieces of information are for setting the mode of execution of the special game state and the effect mode after the special game state ends. In the case of the present embodiment, the performance mode shifts with a hit as a trigger, and the shift destination of the performance mode after the end of the winning changes according to the type of winning pattern (type of big winning pattern or small winning pattern). Also, in the case of a specific jackpot pattern (for example, 4R probability variation pattern) among the jackpots in special figure 1, depending on whether the game state is in probability variation, the production mode of the transition destination is dedicated to confirmation of probability variation It is determined whether to shift to a production mode in which it is difficult to distinguish whether it is a probability variation or not. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is a small hit (step A410), and if it is a small hit (step A411; Y), the special figure 1 small hit A small winning design random number is loaded from the design random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) (step A411). Next, a special figure 1 small hit design table is set (step A412), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded small hit design random number is acquired, and saved in a special figure 1 stop design number area (step A413).
After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414), and the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415). Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

Also, if the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A410; N), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop pattern number area (step A416), and the losing stop design pattern is saved in the stop design pattern area. Save (step A417) and prepare a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A418). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A419), and production command setting processing (step A420) is performed. This decoration special figure command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A421), the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A422), and the special figure 1 The small hit symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A423), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
FIG. 64 shows the special figure 2 stop design setting process (step A343) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this special figure 2 stop pattern setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431), and if it is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 2 big hit pattern random number storage area (reservation number 1 ) to load the jackpot pattern random number (step A432). Next, a special figure 2 jackpot design table is set (step A433), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded jackpot design random number is acquired, and saved in a special figure 2 stop design number area (step A434). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop design information table is set (step A435), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A436). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 2 display device 52) and the stop design in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired, saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A437), the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the probability fluctuation judgment is performed. It is saved in the data area (step A438), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). These pieces of information are for setting the mode of execution of the special game state and the effect mode after the special game state ends. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442).

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A431; N), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop pattern number area (step A440), and the losing stop pattern pattern is saved in the stop pattern pattern area. Then (step A441), a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A443), and production command setting processing (step A444) is performed. This decoration special figure command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A445), the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A446), and the special figure 2 End the stop symbol setting process.

That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball in the first start winning port (start winning port 36), and executes the second starting winning port (normal variable winning port). It constitutes a variable display game executing means for executing a second variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of a game ball by the device 37). Also, the game control device 100 serves as variable display game execution control means for controlling execution of the variable display game based on the determination result of the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process (steps A173, A324, A344) in the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination process, special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. In the case of this embodiment, the probability state (low/high probability, with/without time saving) does not affect the distribution of fluctuations, but the production mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. One production mode is set from a plurality of production modes according to the probability state, the presence or absence of the time saving state, the progress of the special figure fluctuation display game, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the special figure information setting process, first, the first half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A452).
Next, the first half variation group selection offset table is set (step A453), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure reservation number and the stop design pattern are acquired (step A454).
Next, the first half fluctuation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A455), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area (step A456). As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the fluctuation distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the presentation mode is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is used for selecting a fluctuation group later. However, although it depends on the specifications of the model, when the number of holds is large, the fluctuation time is shortened only in the case of loss, so in cases other than loss, the number of holds does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation. A variation group includes multiple variation patterns, and when determining a variation pattern, first select a variation group, and then select one variation pattern from this variation group. ing.

Next, the second half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A457), and the second half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A458).
Next, the second half variation group selection offset table is set (step A459), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure reservation number and the stop design pattern are acquired (step A460).
Next, the second half variation group selection pointer and offset data are added (step A461), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 2 area (step A462), and the special figure information setting process ends. As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area, the fluctuation distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the presentation mode is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing fluctuations in the second half (types of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, only in the case of loss, the rate of reach changes according to the number of holds (the rate of reach is lower when the number of holds is large), so in cases other than losses, the number of holds is distributed in the second half as a result. does not affect

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination processing, special figure 1 variation start processing, and variation pattern setting processing (steps A174, A326, A346) in the special figure 2 variation start will be described. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation, which is the fluctuation form from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

As shown in FIG. 66, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group selection address table is set (step A471), the address of the second half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step A472), the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for reserved number 1) and prepared (step A473). In this embodiment, the structure of the second half variation group table is different for winning and losing. Specifically, the size is 1 byte for winning, and 2 bytes for losing. Since the probability of winning is lower than the probability of losing, and even 1 byte is sufficient, the size of the winning is 1 byte from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity. Therefore, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used at the time of winning. In addition, since the probability of losing is higher than the probability of winning, and it is desired to produce more diverse effects, the size for losing is set to 2 bytes.

Then, it is determined whether the result of the special figure variation display game is lost (step A474), and if it is lost (step A474; Y), 2 bytes distribution processing (step A475) is performed, and step A477 Go to processing. If it is not lost (step A474; N), sorting processing (step A476) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A477.

Then, the address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of the sorting is obtained and prepared (step A477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the reserved number 1), Prepare (step A478). Then, the allocation process (step A479) is performed, and the second half variation number obtained as a result of the allocation is acquired and saved in the second half variation number area (step A480). Through this processing, the second half variation pattern is set.

Next, a first half fluctuation group table is set (step A481), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (step A482). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (step A483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of reservations 1), and prepared. (step A484). After that, sorting processing (step A485) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of sorting is acquired, and saved in the first half variation number area (step A486), and the variation pattern setting processing ends. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from among a plurality of variations.

[Distribution process]
FIG. 67 shows the sorting process (steps A476, A479, A485) in the fluctuation pattern setting process described above. In the distribution process, based on the variation pattern random number 1, the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game is selected from the second half variation group table, and based on the variation pattern random number 2, the special figure variation display game is selected from the second half variation selection table. Select the second half variation pattern (second half variation number), or select the first half variation pattern (first half variation number) of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation selection table based on the variation pattern random number 3. be.

In this sorting process, first, the head data of the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table prepared in step A472, second half fluctuation selection table prepared in step A477, or first half fluctuation selection table prepared in step A483) is a code for no sorting (that is, "0") (step A2201). Here, the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, and the first half variation selection table are predetermined in association with at least one second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number), or first half variation pattern (first half variation number). However, in the case of a selection table that does not require sorting, the sorting value "0", that is, a code indicating no sorting is specified at the head.

Then, if the top data of the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) is a code without sorting (step A2202; Y), the data corresponding to the sorting result The address is updated (step A2207), and the sorting process ends.
On the other hand, if the top data of the target selection table (second half variation group table, second half variation selection table, first half variation selection table) is not a code without sorting (step A2202; N), the target selection table (second half variation group table , second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) is obtained (step A2203).

Subsequently, the distribution value obtained in step A2203 is subtracted from the random values prepared in steps A473, A478, and A484 (variation pattern random number 1, variation pattern random number 2, and variation pattern random number 3) to obtain new random values. is calculated (step A2204), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205). Then, if the new random number is not smaller than "0" (step A2205; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2206), the process proceeds to step A2203, and the subsequent process.

That is, the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) acquires the distribution value specified next (step A2203), and then determines in the previous step A2205 A new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the random number value (step A2204), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205).
The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A2205 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205; Y). As a result, at least one second half fluctuation selection table, second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), or first half fluctuation pattern (first half Any one of the second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number), and first half variation pattern (first half variation number) is selected from among the variation numbers).
Then, if it is determined in step A2205 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step A2205; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result is updated (step A2207), and the sorting process ends. do.

[2-byte distribution processing]
FIG. 68 shows the 2-byte allocation process (step A475) in the variation pattern setting process described above. The 2-byte allocation process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

In this 2-byte allocation process, first, it is checked whether or not the head data of the selection table (second half fluctuation group table prepared in step A472) is a code without allocation (that is, "0") (step A2301). Here, the second half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation selection table, but the latter half defines only the second half fluctuation selection table in which the second half fluctuation pattern is "no reach" Since there is no need for sorting in the variation group table (for example, some variation group tables when the result is a loss), a sorting value of "0", that is, a code indicating no sorting, is defined at the top. .

Then, if the head data of the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is a code without sorting (step A2302; Y), update to the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result (step A2307), 2 bytes End the sorting process.
On the other hand, if the head data of the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is not a code without sorting (step A2302; N), one sorting value specified first in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is obtained. (Step A2303).

Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value obtained in step A2303 from the random value prepared in step A473 (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) (step A2304), and the calculated new random value It is determined whether the numerical value is smaller than "0" (step A2305). Then, if the new random number is not smaller than "0" (step A2305; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2306), the process proceeds to step A2303, and the subsequent process.
That is, the distribution value specified next in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is acquired (step A2303), and then a new distribution value is subtracted from the random value determined in the previous step A2305. A random number value is calculated (step A2304), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2305).

The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A2305 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2305; Y). As a result, any one of the second half fluctuation selection tables is selected from at least one second half fluctuation selection table defined in the selection tables (second half fluctuation group tables).
Then, when it is determined at step A2305 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step A2305; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result is updated (step A2307), and 2-byte sorting processing is performed. exit.
The configuration of the sorting process shown in FIG. 67 and the configuration of the 2-byte sorting process shown in FIG. 68 are basically the same. are different, so the program instructions for the calculations are different.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting process (steps A327, A347) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 69, in the fluctuation start information setting process, first, the random number storage area for the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step A491). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (step A494), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is acquired (step A495).

Then, the first half variable time value and the second half variable time value are added (step A496), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A497). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step A498), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step A499), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A500 ). Next, the special figure reservation number corresponding to the variable design discrimination flag is updated by -1 (step A501), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable design discrimination flag is set (step A502). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A503), and the free area after the shift is cleared (step A504). Further, the variable order flag storage area is shifted (step A505), the empty area after the shift is cleared (step A506), and the variable start information setting process is terminated.

Information about the start of the special figure variation display game is set by the above processing. That is, the game control device 100 serves as determination means for determining various random numbers stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Also, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information in the start memory.

Then, the information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games is later transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 receives the information on the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, and responds to the determined fluctuation pattern. Set the detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information on the stop pattern, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game A variation command containing information about a pattern and a stop information command containing information about extension of stop time are mentioned, and a command is transmitted to production control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command earlier than the variation command, the processing in the production control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 70, in the special figure fluctuation processing, first, a design stop command corresponding to the fluctuation design determination flag is prepared (step A601), and effect command setting processing (step A602) is performed. Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In this embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is a winning symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 milliseconds, and when the stop symbol pattern is the jackpot symbol pattern, the display time is set to 2000 milliseconds, and the stop symbol is set. When the pattern is a small winning symbol pattern, the display time is set to 2000 milliseconds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Then, set "2" for the processing during special figure display as the processing number (step A605), and save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step A606). Furthermore, the signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the signal during the special symbol 1 fluctuation is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), and the signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 during fluctuation signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A608), and the pattern determination number signal control timer area according to the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal Control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved (step A609). After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 indicator 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 indicator 51 is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area (step A610 ), as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 indicator 52, save the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 indicator 52 in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A611), end the processing during special figure fluctuation.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure displaying process (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, in the special figure displaying process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the RWM Processing (step A702) for clearing the small hit flag area is performed.
Then, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded. (Step A703), processing (step A704) of clearing the RWM jackpot flag 1 area and jackpot flag 2 area. Then, it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A705), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (step A705; Y), the jackpot (special figure 2 jackpot) of the second special figure variation display game is started. Related test signals (for example, condition device operating signal ON, character continuous operating device operating signal ON, special symbol 2 winning signal ON) are saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A708), A round number upper limit table is set (step A709).

On the other hand, in step A705, as a result of checking the big hit flag 2, if it is determined that it is not a big hit (step A705; N), it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A706), and it is a big hit (step A706). If determined as A706; Y), a test signal related to the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game jackpot (special figure 1 jackpot) (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the character continuous operation device operating signal is turned on, Special symbol 1 per signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A707), and the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A709) is performed.

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A709), the round number upper limit value ("16" or "4" in the case of this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the RWM is saved in the round number upper limit area (step A710). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

Next, the decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special figure command area of RWM, prepared (step A712), and effect command setting processing (step A713) is performed. After that, prepare a probability information command related to the information to set the probability of a hit result in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) (step A714), production command setting processing (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step A717).

Next, the big winning hole opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning results in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of this embodiment, in step A718, the big win 2 signal and the big win 3 signal are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. It should be noted that each ON/OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is ON when there is a jackpot with balls (the jackpot opening information is other than the jackpot opening information 1 (4R probability variation (quick accuracy))), and the jackpot with no balls (big prize jack When the opening information is the big winning opening opening information 1 (4R probability variation (rapid probability)), it is ON at the time of the big hit in the time saving state, and is OFF otherwise. In addition, the big win 3 signal is ON when the big win with the paid out balls is made, and is turned OFF when the big win is made without the paid out balls.

After that, the big winning opening opening information and the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms or 300 ms) corresponding to the state of the probability of winning results in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game Set (step A719), and save the set jackpot fanfare time in the special game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag save area (step A721). This stores the information of the probability state of the special figure and the time saving state when the special result occurs. Then, based on the information stored later, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined.

Then, the large winning slot fraudulent winning number area of the big winning slot (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the big winning slot opening information is cleared (step A722), and the big winning slot corresponding to the big winning slot opening information is cleared. A fraud monitoring period outside flag is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723). After that, fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing 1 (step A724) is performed, and processing during special figure display is completed. That is, the game control device 100 converts the special variable prize winning device 38 to the open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game. It constitutes special game state generating means for generating a state.

On the other hand, at step A706, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit or not (step A725).
At step A725, when it is determined that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A725; Y), the time reduction variation number update process (step A726), the production mode information check process regarding the setting of the production mode (step A727 ) to determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A728).

At step A728, when it is determined that the special figure is not in the high probability (step A728; N), the decoration special figure command is loaded from the decoration special figure command area, prepared (step A729), and the effect command setting Processing (step A730) is performed. Next, a small winning fanfare command is prepared (step A731), effect command setting processing (step A732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733.
Moreover, in step A728, when it determines with it being in the high probability of a special figure (step A728; Y), it transfers to the process of step A733. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state, the occurrence of the small win opens the big winning opening, but the occurrence of the small win is not allowed in the game. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed so as not to make the person aware of it.
Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag save area (step A733). After that, the process transition setting process 1 (step A734) during small hit fanfare is performed, and the process during special figure display is completed.

On the other hand, in step A725, when it is determined that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the time reduction fluctuation number update process (step A735), the production mode information check process regarding the setting of the production mode (step A736) is performed, the switching preparation remaining rotation speed corresponding to the production mode number is set (step A737), and it is determined whether the production remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed match (step A738). In addition, the switching preparation remaining number of rotations may be a different value (number of rotations) in all of the plurality of presentation modes, or may be the same value in any one of the plurality of presentation modes. (number of rotations), or may be the same value (number of rotations) in all of the plurality of presentation modes.
In step A738, if it is determined that the number of rotations remaining in production and the number of rotations remaining in switching preparation do not match (step A738; N), special figure normal processing transition setting processing 1 (step A741) is performed, and special figure display Terminate intermediate processing.
On the other hand, in step A738, if it is determined that the number of rotations remaining in the production and the number of rotations in preparation for switching match (step A738; Y), the production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A739), and the production command is set. After performing the processing (step A740), the special figure normal processing transition setting processing 1 (step A741) is performed, and the processing during special figure display is completed. The production mode switching preparation command is a command for not performing a look-ahead production from several rotations before the production mode switches, and by transmitting the production mode switching preparation command to the production control device 300, the production is performed across the modes. It is possible to prevent contradiction, etc. from occurring in

[Time reduction fluctuation frequency update process]
Next, the details of the time reduction variation count update process (steps A726, A735) in the above-described special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, in the time reduction variation number update process, first, it is determined whether it is in the special figure high probability (during the high probability state) (step A751). If it is in the special figure high probability (step A751; Y), it ends the time reduction variation number update process. Also, if it is not in the special figure high probability (step A751; N), it is determined whether it is in the time saving (step A752). And when it is not in time saving (step A752; N), the time shortening fluctuation|variation frequency|count update process is complete|finished. Also, if it is during the time reduction (step A752; Y), the number of time reduction fluctuations is updated by -1 (step A753), and it is determined whether the number of time reduction fluctuations has become "0" (step A754).

If the number of time reduction fluctuations is not "0" (step A754; N), the time reduction fluctuation number updating process is terminated. Also, when the number of time reduction fluctuations becomes "0" (step A754; Y), a signal relating to the end of time reduction (for example, turning off the 2 jackpot signals) is saved in the external information output data area. Then, a signal related to the end of the time saving state (for example, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF) to the test signal output data area Save.

Next, save the number without time saving in the game state display number area (step A757), save the general figure low probability flag in the general figure game mode flag area (step A758), special figure in the special figure game mode flag area Save the low probability & no time saving flag (step A759). Next, a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display section 57) is displayed. In order to turn off the light, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A761), and the time reduction variation count update process is terminated.

[Production mode information check process]
Next, details of the effect mode information check process (steps A727 and A736) in the above-described special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 74, in the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether or not the next mode transition information is the no-update code (step A771). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771; Y), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of times the special figure variation display game has been executed, for example, the effect mode that continues until the next big hit is selected in a high probability state. .

Also, if the next mode transition information is not an update no code (step A771; N), the effect remaining rotation number, which is the number of executable times of the special figure variation display game until the effect mode is changed, is updated by -1 (step A772). , determines whether or not the number of rotations remaining for effect has become "0" (step A773). If the number of rotations remaining for effect is not "0" (step A773; N), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In addition, when the number of rotations remaining in the effect becomes "0" (step A773; Y), that is, when changing the effect mode from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A774). , the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is obtained (step A775).

Then, the production mode number of the production mode to be shifted is acquired, and saved in the production mode number area in the RWM (step A776), the production remaining rotation number of the production mode to be transferred is acquired, and the production remaining rotation number in the RWM. Save it in the area (step A677), acquire the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transitioned, and save it in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A678). After that, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set production mode number is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A780). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A780; Y), that is, if the probability state has not changed, the presentation mode information check process is terminated.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area for restoration from power failure (step A780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area for restoration from power failure (step A782), Effect command setting processing (step A782) is performed.
Next, an effect rotation number command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation number is prepared (step A783), and an effect command setting process (step A784) is performed.
Next, a time reduction variation count command corresponding to the time reduction variation count is prepared (step A785), and effect command setting processing (step A786) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new effect mode is the left-handed mode (step A787), and if it is not the left-handed mode (step A787; N), the presentation mode information check process is terminated. Also, if the mode is left-handed (step A787; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A788), production command setting processing (step A789) is performed, and production mode information check processing is completed. do. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that gives notice of the switching from before the specified number of rotations before switching the effect mode. By managing the performance mode by the game control device 100 in this way, control such as generating a specific reach only in a specific performance mode, for example, can be performed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the process transition setting process 1 (step A724) during fanfare/interval in the process during special figure display described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 75, in the fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1, first, "3", which is the process number related to the fanfare/interval process, is set (step A791), and processed in the special game process number area. Save the number (step A792).

Next, a signal relating to the start of the big win (special game state) (for example, turn on the big win 1 signal (output with the big win + small win), turn on the big win 4 signal (output with the big win)) is saved in the external information output data area. (Step A793), a signal regarding the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal is OFF, special The pattern 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF and the normal pattern 1 high probability state signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A794). In addition, even in the special figure high probability, since only the probability state changes in the general figure, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always OFF. After that, the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A795), the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A796), and the normal game mode flag Save the normal pattern low probability flag in the area (step A797).

Then, to clear the variable symbol discrimination flag area (step A798), high probability notification flag area in order to turn off the game state display LED (third game state display unit) provided on the game board 30 associated with the display of the high probability state is cleared (step A799), and the special figure low probability & time saving no flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, save the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the production control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801), special figure fluctuation display that can be executed in the time saving state A time-reduction variation count area for managing the number of games is cleared (step A802). As a result, the high probability state and the time saving state end, and the normal probability state and normal state occur.

After that, the number of the effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A803), the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step A804), and the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A805). . Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the second game state display section) is lit. In order to make it possible, the number in the right-hand hitting state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A807), and the fanfare/in-interval process transition setting process 1 is terminated. As a result, the information of the effect mode is once cleared along with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the process transition setting process 1 (step A734) during small hit fanfare in the process during special figure display described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 76, in the small winning fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1, first, "7" for the small winning fanfare mid-process is set as the process number (step A811), and the process number is set to the special game process. Save in the number area (step A812).

Next, a small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A813), and a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, a big win 1 signal is turned ON (output with big hit + small win) )) is saved in the external information output data area (step A814), and a signal relating to the start of the small winning game (for example, a special symbol 1 small winning signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A815).

Next, the area for the number of fraudulent prize winnings is cleared (step A816), and the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the flag area for fraudulent monitoring period for major winning openings (step A817).
Next, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (turning on the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A818), and the right-handed display LED (eg, the first game state display section 57) is lit. Therefore, the number in the right-hand hitting state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A819), and the process transition setting process 1 during small win fanfare is completed.

[Fanfare/interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare/interval process (step A11) in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 77, in the fanfare/interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step A901), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state is prepared (step A902). , effect command setting processing (step A903) is performed.

After that, a large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A904), an open switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A905), and the number of rounds in the special game state is the acquired opening switching determination. It is determined whether it is larger than the value (step A906).
If the number of rounds is greater than the open switching determination value (step A906; Y), save the opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) of the big winning opening for short opening (second opening mode) in the special game processing timer area. Then (step A907), the process transition setting process during opening of the big winning opening (step A909) is performed, and the process during fanfare/interval is completed.
Also, if the number of rounds is not greater than the open switching determination value (step A906; N), the large winning opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) for long opening (first opening mode) is set in the special game processing timer area. Save (step A908), perform processing transition setting processing during large winning opening opening (step A909), and end processing during fanfare/interval.

Here, in this embodiment, as a jackpot pattern, 16R probability variable A (all long open), 16R probability variable B (1 to 4R long open, 5 to 16R short open), 16R normal A (all long open), 16R normal B (1 to 4R long open, 5 to 16R short open), 4R variable (all short open) are set. In addition, probability variation is a jackpot in which the probability state after the end of the special game state is a high probability state, and normal is a jackpot in which the probability state after the end of the special game state is a low probability state. Therefore, in the big winning opening operation determination table, 16R variable probability A data and open switching determination value "0", 16R variable probability B data and open switching determination value "4", 16R normal A data and open switching determination value "0", The 16R normal B data and the open switching determination value "4" and the 4R variable probability data and the open switching determination value "0" are stored in association with each other. When the number of rounds is equal to or less than the open switching determination value, long opening is performed, and when the number of rounds exceeds the open switching determination value, short opening is performed.

[Processing transition setting processing during opening of the big winning gate]
FIG. 78 shows the process transition setting process (step A909) during the opening of the big winning opening in the fanfare/interval process described above. In this process transition setting process during the opening of the large winning opening, first, the processing number is set to "4" for the processing during opening of the large winning opening (step A911), and the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area ( Step A912). After that, a signal related to the opening start of the large winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A913), and the number of winnings to the large winning opening is stored. Clear the information in the winning hole count area (step A914). Then, the ON data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A915), and the processing transition setting processing during the opening of the large winning opening ends.

[Processing during the opening of the big winning mouth]
Next, the details of the process during opening of the big winning opening (step A12) in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 79, in the process during the opening of the big winning opening, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit of the round number upper limit area of RWM, and the current round is It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1001). Then, if it is not the final round (step A1001; N), a large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1002), an open switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A1003), and a special It is determined whether the number of rounds in the gaming state is greater than the acquired open switching determination value (step A1004).
If the number of rounds is greater than the open switching determination value (step A1004; Y), the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1005), An interval command relating to the interval between rounds is prepared (step A1007), effect command setting processing (step A1010) is performed, large winning hole remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011) is performed, and the large winning hole is open. End the process.

Also, if the number of rounds is not greater than the open switching judgment value (step A1004; N), the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1006), prepares an interval command (step A1007), performs effect command setting processing (step A1010), performs large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011), and ends processing during opening of large winning opening. do.

On the other hand, if it is the final round (step A1001; Y), the final remaining ball processing time (eg 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1008), and the end of the special game state is saved. Prepare an ending command related to display control of the ending display screen at the time (step A1009), perform effect command setting processing (step A1010), perform large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011), The processing during the opening of the big winning opening is terminated.

[Large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 80 shows the transition setting processing for the large winning opening remaining ball processing (step A1011) in the above-described processing during the opening of the large winning opening. In this large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing, first, the processing number is set to "5" for the large winning opening remaining ball processing (step A1021), and the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area. (Step A1022). Then, in order to close the opening/closing member 990 of the special variable winning device 38, the OFF data for turning off the large winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1023), and the large winning opening remains. End the sphere process transition setting process.

[Large prize mouth residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the large winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) in the special game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 81, in the big winning hole remaining ball processing, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit of the round number upper limit area of RWM, and the current round is It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1101).

Then, when the current round in the special game state is not the final round (step A1101; N), a large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1102), and an open switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired. (step A1103), and sets a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 second) (step A1104).
Next, it is determined whether the number of rounds in the special game state is greater than the acquired open switching determination value (step A1105), and if the number of rounds is greater than the open switching determination value (step A1105; Y), step A1109. to process. Also, when the number of rounds is not greater than the open switching determination value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether the big winning opening open information is a value of the rank down effect system (step A1106).

Here, the rank-down effect corresponds to the effect of notifying that the subsequent rounds will be short release rounds. Specifically, as a jackpot pattern, 16R probability variation A (all long open), 16R probability variation B (1 to 4R long open, 5 to 16R short open), 16R normal A (all long open), 16R normal B ( 1R to 4R long open, 5R to 16R short open) is selected, a predetermined big hit round production is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 from 1R to 3R of the big hit round, and at the 4th round. A round continuation notification effect is executed. If the selected jackpot pattern is 16R probability variable A or 16R normal B (all long open), it is notified that the long opening continues in the round continuation notification effect, and the big winning opening is long open in the round after the 5th round. is released in In addition, if the selected jackpot pattern is 16R probability variable B or 16R normal B (1 to 4R is long open, 5 to 16R is short open), a rank down effect is performed in the round continuation notification effect, resulting in short open. This is notified, and the big prize opening will be opened for a short time in rounds after the 5th round.

When the big winning opening opening information is not a value of the rank-down effect system (step A1106; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. Also, when the big winning opening opening information is a value of the rank down effect system (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (for example, 4R) (step A1107).
If the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. Also, if the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A1107; Y), for example, if the number of rounds is 4R, set the interval time (for example, 3.6 seconds) for the rank down effect (step A1108), and the process proceeds to step A1109. Note that the number of special rounds is not limited to one type, and a plurality of types such as 4R and 8R, for example, may be provided.

Then, the interval time set in step A1104 or A1108 is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1109), fanfare/interval process transition setting processing 2 (step A1110) is performed, and large winning opening remaining ball processing exit.

On the other hand, if the current round in the special game state is the final round (step A1101; Y), the flag is loaded from the special game mode flag saving area that stores the production mode when the special result was derived (step A1111), set the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag, the big winning opening information and the stop symbol pattern (step A1112), set the ending time (for example 1.9 seconds) in the special game processing timer area Save (step A1113). After that, big hit end processing transition setting processing (step A1114) is performed, and the big winning opening remaining ball processing is ended.

[Fanfare/In-interval process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 82 shows fanfare/interval process transition setting process 2 (step A1110) in the above-described large winning hole remaining ball process. In this fanfare/interval process transition setting process 2, first, "3", which is the process number related to the fanfare/interval process, is set (step A1121), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A1122).
Next, save a signal (for example, turn off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1) related to the end of opening the big winning port (special variable winning device 38) in the test signal output data area (step A1123), fanfare/interval The intermediate process transition setting process 2 is ended.

[Jackpot end processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 83 shows the big hit ending process transition setting process (step A1114) in the above-described big winning hole remaining ball process. In this jackpot end processing transition setting processing, first, "6" is set as a processing number relating to the jackpot end processing (step A1131), and the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area (step A1132). After that, a signal (for example, turning off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1) regarding the end of opening of the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1133).

Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings to the big winning opening is cleared (step A1134), and the information in the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step A1135). ), the information in the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit of the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step A1136). Then, the information of the round number upper limit information area storing the flag for determining the upper limit of the number of rounds is cleared (step A1137), and the information of the large winning opening opening information area storing the flag for determining the opening information of the large winning opening is cleared. The information is cleared (step A1138), and the big hit end process transition setting process is terminated.

[Jackpot end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot ending process (step A14) in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 84, in this jackpot end processing, first, the probability fluctuation determination flag set based on the type of special result that triggered the execution of the special game state this time is set to a high probability after the end of the special game state. It is determined whether it is high-probability data that is set when a state is established (step A1201).

If it is not high probability data (step A1201; N), perform jackpot end setting processing 1 (step A1202), and if it is high probability data (step A1201; Y), perform jackpot end setting processing 2 (step A1203 ), prepare a probability information command corresponding to the special figure game mode flag (step A1204), and perform command setting processing (step A1205).

Next, as processing for saving information necessary for management of the performance mode in the game control device 100, first, a performance mode information setting table corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A1206). Then, referring to the set effect mode information setting table, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A1207). Furthermore, the production remaining rotation speed of the production mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the production remaining rotation speed area (step A1208), and the production mode set after the special game state is shifted to the next mode. Information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1209).

Thereafter, a command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step A1210), the command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A1211), and command setting processing (step A1212) is performed. Then, the special figure normal process shift setting process 2 is performed (step A1213), and the big hit end process is terminated.

[Jackpot end setting process 1]
FIG. 85 shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A1202) in the jackpot end process described above. In this jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal relating to the start of time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step A1221), and a signal relating to the start of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222).

Next, the general pattern high probability & general electric support flag is saved in the general pattern game mode flag area (step A1223), and the special pattern low probability & short time flag is saved in the special pattern game mode flag area (step A1224). After that, save the probability information command (time saving) in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A1225), save the initial value of the time reduction fluctuation number (eg 100) in the time reduction fluctuation number area (step A1226), and end the jackpot Setting processing 1 ends.

By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time saving state. In addition, by setting the initial value of the number of time-saving fluctuations (for example, 100) in the time-saving number-of-time area, the time-saving state is terminated by executing the special figure fluctuation display game a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

[Jackpot end setting process 2]
FIG. 86 shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A1203) in the jackpot end process described above. In this jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal relating to the start of the high probability is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231), and a signal relating to the start of the high probability is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232).

Next, the general pattern high probability & general electric support flag is saved in the general pattern game mode flag area (step A1233), and the special pattern high probability & short time flag is saved in the special pattern game mode flag area (step A1234). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A1235), the time reduction fluctuation frequency area is cleared (step A1236), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is finished. By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the high probability state and the time saving state until derivation of the next special result mode.

That is, the game control device 100, after the end of the special game state, over a predetermined period of time, normal variable winning device 37 to extend the period of the open state specific game state (time saving state) can be generated specific game It constitutes state generation control means.

[Special figure normal processing transition setting process 2]
FIG. 87 shows the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step A1219) in the jackpot end process described above. In this special figure normal processing transition setting process 2, first, "0" is set as the processing number related to the special figure normal processing (step A1241), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1242). .

After that, a signal related to the end of the big win (for example, turn off the signal for big win 1, turn off the signal for big win 3, turn off the signal for big win 4) in the external information output data area (step A1243), and save the signal related to the end of the big win (for example, , condition device operating signal OFF, character continuous operating device operating signal OFF, special symbol 1 win signal OFF, special symbol 2 win signal OFF) are saved in the test signal output data area (step A1244). Subsequently, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1245), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A1246), and the information in the presentation mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A1247). Then, clear the information in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1248), save the fraud monitoring period flag in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1249), special figure normal processing transition setting processing 2 exit.

[Processing during small win fanfare]
Next, the details of the minor winning fanfare process (step A15) in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 88(a), in the process during the small hit fanfare, a process shift setting process (step A1301) during the small hit is performed.

[Small hit middle process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the process shift setting process (step A1301) during the small hit in the process during the small hit fanfare described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 88(b), in the small hit middle process shift setting process, first, set "8" for the small hit middle process as the process number (step A1311), and set the process number to the special game process. Save in the number area (step A1312).

Next, save the opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) of the big winning opening in the small winning game in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1313), and signal regarding the start of the small winning operation (for example, special electric role 1 ON signal during operation) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314).
Next, in order to open the opening/closing member 990 of the special variable prize winning device 38, ON data for turning on the large prize winning solenoid 38b is saved in the large winning prize solenoid output data area (step A1315).
Next, clear the information in the large winning opening count area that stores the number of winnings to the big winning opening (step A1316), and save the small winning operation initial value (for example, "0") in the small winning medium control pointer area. (Step A1317), to end the process transition setting process in the small hit.

[Small hit middle processing]
Next, the details of the process (step A16) during the small hit in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 89, in the small hit middle process, first, the value of the small hit middle control pointer is loaded (step A1401), and the loaded value is the small hit operation end value (for example, "6") or more is determined (step A1402).
When the loaded value is not equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; N), the small hit medium control pointer is updated by +1 (step A1403), the small hit operation transition setting process (step A1404) is performed, and the small End the winning process.

On the other hand, when the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag evacuation area (step A1405), and the loaded flag is in the special figure high probability (step A1406). This determines whether it is a small hit in the special figure high probability. In addition, here, it does not matter whether it is in the time saving state.
When the loaded flag is a flag relating to the special figure high probability (step A1406; Y), small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1409) is performed, and the small hit middle processing is terminated. Also, if the loaded flag is not a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1406; N), prepare a command for the small hit end screen (step A1407), perform production command setting processing (step A1408), A small hit remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1409) is performed, and the process during a small hit ends.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small-hit operation transition setting process (step A1404) in the above-described small-hit middle process will be described. As shown in FIG. 90, in the small hit operation transition setting process, branch processing (step A1411) is performed according to the control pointer (control pointer during the small hit).

At step A1411, if the control pointer is "0", "2", "4", the wait time corresponding to the control pointer (for example, 1500 msec) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1412), The off data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1413), and the small hit operation transition setting process is terminated.
Also, in step A1411, if the control pointer is "1", "3", or "5", the opening time (for example, 200 milliseconds) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special game processing timer area. (Step A1414), ON data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (Step A1415), and the small hit operation transition setting process is terminated.

Here, in the case of the present embodiment, after the small win fanfare time of 300 ms, opening for 200 ms and closing for 1500 ms are alternately performed, and at the end of opening and closing, the control pointer during the small win is sequentially changed. Updated.
Specifically, at the end of the first 200 ms opening (that is, when switching from the first 200 ms opening to the first 1500 ms closing), the control pointer during the small hit is updated to "0" and 1 At the end of the second 1500msec closing (that is, when switching from the first 1500msec closing to the second 200msec opening), the control pointer during the small hit is updated to “1”, and the second 200msec opening The small hit medium control pointer is updated to "2" at the end, the small hit medium control pointer is updated to "3" at the end of the second 1500 msec closing, and the small hit medium control at the end of the third 200 msec opening. The pointer is updated to "4", and the small hit control pointer is updated to "5" at the end of the third 1500 ms closing. Then, at the end of the fourth opening of 200 ms, the small hit middle control pointer is updated to "6", and after the small hit remaining ball time of 1900 ms and the small winning ending time of 100 ms after that, the small hit is reached. State ends. Therefore, after being opened for 200 ms for the fourth time, it is closed for 2000 ms, so the apparent ending time is 2000 ms.

[Small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the small-hit remaining ball processing shift setting process (step A1409) in the above-described small-hit middle processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 91, in the small-hit remaining ball processing shift setting process, first, "9" for the small-hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step A1421), and the processing number is the special game processing number. Save in area (step A1422).
Next, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1423), the off data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1424), and the small The hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing is ended.

[Small hit remaining ball processing]
Next, details of the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) in the special game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 92(a), in the small-hit remaining ball processing, small-hit end processing transition setting processing (step A1501) is performed.

[Small hit end process transition setting process]
Next, details of the small-hit end processing transition setting processing (step A1501) in the above-described small-hit remaining ball processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 92(b), in the small hit end processing transition setting process, first, "10" for the small hit end process is set as the process number (step A1511), and the process number is set to the special game process. Save in the number area (step A1512).

Next, the small hit ending time (for example, 0.1 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1513), and a signal regarding the end of the small hit operation (for example, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 is turned OFF). is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1514).
Next, clear the information of the big winning opening count number area (step A1515), clear the information of the control pointer area during the small hit (for example, 0 clear) (step A1516), and end the small hit end processing transition setting process .

[Small hit end processing]
Next, details of the small hit end processing (step A18) in the special game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 93, in the small hit end process, first, the flag is loaded from the special game mode flag save area (step A1601), and it is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag related to the special high probability ( step A1602).
If the loaded flag is not a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1602; N), the production mode information address table is set (step A1603), and the production mode set at the time of start of fluctuation (at the time of setting the stop pattern) The address of the table corresponding to the migration information is obtained (step A1604).

Then, the production mode number of the production mode to be transferred is acquired, saved in the production mode number area in the RWM (step A776), the production remaining rotation number of the production mode to be transferred is acquired, and the production remaining rotation number in the RAM It saves in the area (step A1606), acquires the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transitioned, and saves it in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A1607). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the production mode number is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A1609). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area upon restoration from power failure (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area for restoration from power failure (step A1609; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area for restoration from power failure (step A1610), Effect command setting processing (step A1611) is performed.
Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A1612), and effect command setting processing (step A1613) is performed.
Next, prepare a time reduction variation count command corresponding to the time reduction variation count (step A1614), and effect command setting processing (step A1615).
Next, it is determined whether the new production mode is the left-handed mode (step A1616), and if it is not the left-handed mode (step A1616; N), the process proceeds to step A1619. Also, if the left-handed mode (step A1616; Y), prepare a left-handed instruction notification command (step A1617), after performing the effect command setting process (step A1618), to the process of step A1619 Transition.

Then, the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1619), and it is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag relating to the special figure time saving (during the time saving state) (step A1620).
If the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure time saving (step A1620; Y), the special figure normal processing transition setting process 3 (step A1623) is performed to end the small hit end process.
Also, if the loaded flag is not a flag related to the special figure time saving (step A1620; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1621), in order to turn off the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 57), save the number in the left-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (step A1622), Processing shift setting processing 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hit end processing is ended.

[Special figure normal process transition setting process 3]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process shift setting process 3 (step A1623) in the small hit end process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 94, in the special figure normal processing transition setting process, first, "0" for the special figure normal process is set as the processing number (step A1631), and the processing number is entered in the special figure game processing number area. Save (step A1632).

Next, a signal relating to the end of the small win (for example, turn off the 1 big win signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1633), and a signal related to the end of the small win (for example, turn off the 1 special pattern small win signal). is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1634).
Next, the information of the fluctuating pattern discrimination flag area is cleared (step A1635), the information of the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1636), and the information of the special figure game mode flag save area is cleared (step A1637).
Then, during the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1638), and the special figure normal processing transition setting process 3 is terminated.

[Production command setting process]
Next, the details of the effect command setting process in each process executed during the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 95, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2001), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002).
If the performance serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the performance serial transmission buffer (step A2001).
If the performance serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2002; N), the command data (MODE) is written in the performance serial transmission buffer (step A2003).

Next, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2004), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005).
If the performance serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the performance serial transmission buffer (step A2004).
If the performance serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2005; N), the command data (ACTION) is written in the performance serial transmission buffer (step A2006), and the performance command setting process ends.
Note that the effect command setting process may be simply referred to as "command setting process".

[Symbol variation control process]
FIG. 96 shows the symbol variation control processing (steps A20 and A22) in the above-described special figure game processing, and the symbol variation control processing (step B15) in the below-described normal figure game processing. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling variations in special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) and normal symbols (general symbol) and setting display data for the special symbols and normal symbols.

In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether the variation control flag applied to the symbol to be controlled (for example, any one of the first special figure, the second special figure, and the normal figure) is changing (step A2101). . In the case of this embodiment, on the variation control table prepared in steps A19, A21, and B14, the lower address of the variation control flag area, the initial value of the flashing control timer, the upper limit determination value of the variation pattern number, the display table 2 ( (for stop) and the address of display table 1 (for variation) are defined.

If the in-varying flag for the symbol to be controlled is fluctuating (step A2102; Y), the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step A2103). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the pattern display table (for variation) is defined on the variation control table prepared in steps A19, A21 and B14.
Next, the blinking control timer to be controlled is updated by -1 (step A2104), and it is determined whether the blinking control timer after updating is "0" (step A2105), and the blinking control timer after updating is "0". If not (step A2105; N), display data corresponding to the value of the variable pattern number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

Also, if the flashing control timer after updating is "0" (step A2105; Y), save the flashing control timer initial value corresponding to the target flashing timer area (step A2106), and control target variable pattern number is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (step A2107), and the display data corresponding to the value of the variable pattern number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the in-varying flag for the symbol to be controlled is not changing (step A2102; N), the symbol display table (for stoppage) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step A2109). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the pattern display table (for stop) is defined on the variation control table prepared in steps A19, A21 and B14.
Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2110), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

As the flashing control timer initial value saved in step A2106, the value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed is saved. Here, a value corresponding to 52 ms is defined as the flashing control timer initial value in the variation control table of the first special figure (first special figure variation display game), and the second special figure (second special figure variation display game ), a value equivalent to 104 ms is defined as the initial value of the blinking control timer in the variation control table, and a value equivalent to 52 ms is defined as the initial value of the blinking control timer in the variation control table of the normal figure (variable display game). It is This blinking control timer initial value is an interval for updating the lighting pattern in the collective display device 50 during the variable time.

Further, the corresponding range in step A2107 is defined by the variation symbol number upper limit judgment value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed. When the fluctuation pattern number reaches the upper limit value by updating the fluctuation pattern number by +1 in step A2107, the fluctuation pattern number is set to 0. ) are updated sequentially. In steps A2108 and A2111, the display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to this variable pattern number is acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) the number of times equal to the upper limit determination value of the variable pattern number. is performed, the display is repeated.

Here, 8 is defined as the fluctuation symbol number upper limit determination value in the fluctuation control table of the first special figure (first special figure fluctuation display game), and the fluctuation pattern number can be updated in the range of 0-7. Therefore, the display during the special figure 1 fluctuation, which is repeatedly displayed during the fluctuation display of the first special figure fluctuation display game, is completed by updating the lighting pattern eight times. In addition, 2 is defined as the fluctuation pattern number upper limit determination value in the fluctuation control table of the second special figure (second special figure fluctuation display game), and the fluctuation pattern number can be alternately updated to 0 and 1. Therefore, the display during the special figure 2 fluctuation, which is repeatedly displayed during the fluctuation display of the second special figure fluctuation display game, is completed by updating the lighting pattern twice. In addition, 4 is defined as the fluctuation symbol number upper limit determination value in the fluctuation control table of the normal pattern (normal pattern fluctuation display game), and the fluctuation pattern number can be updated in the range of 0-3. Therefore, the display during normal pattern fluctuation, which is repeatedly displayed during the variable display of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, is completed by updating the lighting pattern four times.

By defining the flashing control timer initial value and the variable pattern number upper limit value in the variable control table prepared according to the game to be processed in this way, the interval and display for updating the lighting pattern in the collective display device 50 are completed. You can set the number of updates for each game.

[General map game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (step S110) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the general-purpose game processing, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the overall processing related to the general-purpose variation display game is controlled, and the display of the general-purpose pattern is set.

As shown in FIG. 97, in the normal game process, first, the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a is performed. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the general pattern game processing timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step B3). In addition, the minimum value of the general-purpose game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the general-purpose game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

When the value of the normal game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has expired or has already timed up, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the normal game process number. A process of setting a general-purpose game sequence branch table in a register (step B5) is performed, and a process of acquiring a branch destination address of a process corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number using the table (step B6) is performed. Then, a subroutine call is made in accordance with the general-purpose game processing number (step B7).

In step B7, if the normal pattern game processing number is "0", the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, and the normal pattern fluctuation are performed. Normal figure normal processing (step B8) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
Further, in step B7, when the general pattern game processing number is "1", a general pattern variation process (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing the normal pattern display process is performed.

Further, in step B7, if the general pattern game processing number is "2", if the result of the general pattern variation display game is a win, the normal pattern opening time is set according to whether or not it is in the time saving state. Or, during the normal map display process (step B10) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal pattern per process.
Further, in step B7, if the normal game processing number is "3", the processing during the normal game is continued, or the information necessary for performing the normal electric remaining ball processing is set during the normal game. Processing (step B11) is performed.

Further, in step B7, if the general pattern game processing number is "4", general electric remaining ball processing (step B12) for setting information necessary for performing general pattern per end processing is performed.
Also, in step B7, if the general pattern game processing number is "5", general pattern per end processing (step B13) for setting information necessary for normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing the normal pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the normal pattern fluctuation by the normal pattern display (step B14), the pattern fluctuation control process (step B15 ) to end the general-purpose game process.
On the other hand, in step B4, when the value of the normal game processing timer is not "0" (step B4; N), that is, when it is determined that the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step B14, and the subsequent processes are executed. conduct.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 98, in the gate switch monitoring process, it is first determined whether there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether it is in a right-handed game state (for example, during a big hit, during a small hit, during a special figure time reduction (during normal electric support)). (Step B102).
If it is in the game state to hit right (step B102; Y), it is determined whether the number of normal pattern reservations is acquired and the number of normal pattern reservations is less than the upper limit value (for example, "4") (step B105). Also, if it is not a game state to hit right (step B102; N), prepare a left hitting instruction command (step B103), perform the production command setting process (step B104), and then acquire the number of normal figure reservations. It is determined whether the number of normal diagram reservations is less than the upper limit (for example, "4") (step B105).

If the number of reserved general patterns is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the number of reserved general patterns is updated by +1 (step B106), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved normal patterns after updating is calculated. (step B107). Then, the winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (step B108), the winning pattern random number is extracted and saved in the winning pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step B109), and the gate switch monitoring process is performed. exit.

Also, if it is determined that there is no input to the gate switch 34a at step B101 (step B101; N) or if it is determined that the number of normal pattern reservations is not less than the upper limit at step B105 (step B105; N), End the gate switch monitoring process.

[General electric winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the normal electric winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 99, in the general electrical winning switch monitoring process, first, the general pattern winning is in progress, that is, the general pattern variation display game is in a winning state and the normal variation winning device 37 is executing the opening operation for a predetermined number of times. It is determined whether there is (step B201). Then, when the game is in the middle of a regular game (step B201; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B202), and there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B202; Y). If so, the count number of the general electric counter is updated by +1 (step B203).

Next, it is determined whether the count number of the general electric counter after the update is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (for example, "6") (step B204), and it is determined that the count number is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step B204; Y). Then, the value (for example, "4") for the end of the hit operation is saved in the control pointer area during the normal hit (step B205), the normal game processing timer is cleared to 0 (step B206), and the normal electric winning prize switch monitoring process is started. finish. That is, if there is a normal electric winning prize of more than the upper limit value during the winning state of the general figure, the winning state of the general figure is terminated on the way at that time.

Also, if it is determined in step B201 that the normal game is not in progress (step B201; N), if it is determined in step B202 that there is no input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B202; N), or in step B204 When it is determined that the general electrical count number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step B204; N), the general electrical winning prize switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, details of the general-purpose normal processing (step B8) in the above-described general-purpose game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 100, in the general pattern normal processing, first, it is determined whether the general pattern reservation number is "0" (step B301), and if the general pattern reservation number is "0" (step B201; Y ) performs the general pattern normal processing transition setting processing 1 (step B321), and ends the general pattern normal processing. Also, if the normal pattern reservation number is not "0" (step B301; N), the random number is loaded from the RWM hit random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) and the hit pattern random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) ( Step B302), the winning random number storage area (for reserved number 1) and the winning pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) are cleared to 0 (step B303), and the probability of a winning result in the normal pattern fluctuation display game is normal. It is determined whether it is in the normal pattern high probability made higher than the probability (that is, the normal pattern low probability), that is, whether it is in the time saving state (step B304).

If it is not in the normal pattern high probability (step B304; N), set the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the normal pattern low probability (step B305), If it is in the normal pattern high probability (step B304 ; Y) sets the lower limit judgment value (high probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of normal pattern high probability (step B306).
After that, it is determined whether the value of the winning random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit judgment value (step B307). is less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B308.

If the value of the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value (step B307; Y), or if the value of the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; Y), the winning flag Save the lost pattern information in the area (step B309), set the lost stop pattern number (step B310), save the lost pattern information in the normal pattern stop pattern information region (step B311), set the stop pattern number to the normal pattern stop Save in the pattern area (step B315).
On the other hand, if the value of the winning random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; N), the winning information is saved in the winning flag area (step B312), and the winning information loaded in step B302 Set the winning stop pattern number corresponding to the design random number (step B313), save the stop pattern information corresponding to the stop pattern number in the general pattern stop pattern information area (step B314), and set the stop pattern number to the normal pattern stop pattern. Save in the area (step B315).

In the case of this embodiment, the probability of hitting at the time of normal pattern low probability is 0/251, the probability of hitting at the time of normal pattern high probability is 250/251, the upper limit judgment value is "251", and the low probability lower limit judgment value is "251", and the high probability lower limit judgment value is "1".
Therefore, when the normal pattern is low probability, the value of the hit random number is "0" to "250".
In addition, at the time of normal pattern high probability, the case where the value of the random number is any one of "1" to "250" is hit, and the case where the value of the random number is "0" is lost.

After saving the stop design number in the normal design stop design area (step B315), the stop design number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B316).
After that, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B317), the empty area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B318), and the normal figure reservation number is updated by -1 (step B319). That is, with the execution of the normal pattern fluctuation display game related to the oldest normal pattern reservation number 1, the process of advancing the order of the normal pattern reservation numbers 2 to 4 that are reserved after the normal pattern reservation number 1 by one I do. By this process, the values for the general pattern holding number 2 to the general pattern holding number 4 in the general pattern random number storage area are moved from the general pattern holding number 1 to the general pattern holding number 3 in the general pattern random number storage area. It will be done. Then, the value for the normal pattern reservation number 4 in the normal pattern random number storage area is cleared, and the normal pattern reservation number is decremented by 1.
Then, the process shift setting process (step B320) is performed during the normal pattern fluctuation, and the normal pattern normal process is terminated.

[General figure normal process transition setting process 1]
In FIG. 101, normal pattern normal processing transition setting processing 1 (step B321) in normal pattern normal processing described above, normal pattern normal processing transition setting processing 1 (step B508) in normal pattern display processing described later. . In this general pattern normal processing transition setting process 1, first, "0" is set as the processing number for transitioning to general pattern normal processing (step B331), and the processing number is saved in the general pattern game processing number area (step B331). B332). After that, the during fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the general/universal electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B333), and the general/universal diagram normal process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Normal figure fluctuation process transition setting process]
In FIG. 102, the process transition setting process (step B320) during the normal pattern fluctuation in the above-described normal pattern normal process is shown. In this normal pattern fluctuation process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the processing number for transitioning to the normal pattern fluctuation process (step B341), and the processing number is saved in the normal pattern game processing number area ( Step B342).
After that, the general pattern fluctuation time (for example, 500 ms. In the case of this embodiment, the general pattern fluctuation time is common in the general pattern low probability state and the general pattern high probability state.) to the normal pattern game processing timer area. Save (step B343), save a signal related to the start of the normal pattern 1 fluctuation display game (for example, turn on the signal during normal pattern 1 fluctuation) in the test signal output data area (step B344), and the normal pattern fluctuation display game is changed A flag during fluctuation indicating that it is in the middle is saved in the normal figure fluctuation control flag area (step B345).
Then, save the flashing control timer initial value (here 52 ms), which is the initial value of the timer of the flashing cycle of the normal pattern display, in the normal pattern flashing control timer area (step B346), and set processing transition during normal pattern fluctuation exit.

[Normal map fluctuation process]
Next, the details of the process during normal game fluctuation (step B9) in the normal game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 103(a), in the normal pattern fluctuation process, a normal pattern display process transition setting process (step B401) is performed.

[Processing setting process during normal map display]
Next, the details of the process transition setting process (step B401) during normal map display in the above-described normal map fluctuation process will be described. As shown in FIG. 103(b), in the process transition setting process during normal map display, first, the process number is set to "2" as a setting process for shifting to the process during normal map display (step B411), and the process is performed. The number is saved in the normal game processing number area (step B412). After that, the general pattern display time (for example, 600 milliseconds), which is the display time of the result of the general pattern display game on the general pattern display, is saved in the general pattern game processing timer area (step B413), and a signal regarding the end of the general pattern fluctuation is generated. (For example, the signal during normal pattern 1 fluctuation is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B414), and the stop flag indicating that the normal pattern fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the normal pattern fluctuation control flag area. Then (step B415), the process transition setting process during normal diagram display ends.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the general-purpose map displaying process (step B10) in the above-described general-purpose map game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 104, in the normal pattern display process, first, the hit flag (hit information or loss information) set in the normal pattern normal process is loaded (step B501), and the RWM hit flag area is cleared. (step B502), it is determined whether the loaded winning flag is winning information (step B503)

If the hit flag is not the winning information (step B503; N), the normal pattern normal processing transition setting process 1 (step B508) for shifting to the normal pattern normal processing is performed, and the normal pattern displaying process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the hit flag is the hit information (step B503; Y), set the process setting table during the hit (step B504), and the value of the hit start pointer corresponding to the normal pattern stop symbol information (for example, "0 , '2', or '4'), and saves it in the control pointer area during normal per figure (step B505). Then, the general electric open time (for example, 500 ms or 1700 ms) corresponding to the general pattern stop pattern information is acquired and saved in the general pattern game processing timer area (step B506). After that, per normal pattern middle processing shift setting processing (step B211) is done, processing during normal pattern display ends.

[Regular figure per middle process transition setting process]
In FIG. 105, the process shift setting process (step B507) during the normal pattern per normal pattern in the normal pattern display process described above is shown. In this general pattern per middle process transition setting process, first, "3" is set as a processing number for transitioning to the general pattern per middle process (step B511), and the processing number is saved in the general pattern game processing number area. (Step B512). After that, a signal related to the hit of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (for example, the signal during normal pattern 1 hit is turned on) and a signal related to the start of normal electric operation (for example, the signal during normal electric accessory 1 operation is turned on) are test signal output data In order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the common solenoid (step B513), ON data is saved in the common solenoid output data area (step B514).

Furthermore, the information in the electric power count area that stores the number of prizes won to the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 is cleared (step B515), The information in the fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step B516). Then, save the flag (fraud monitoring period outside flag) that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the general electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B517), and end the process transition setting process during normal per figure. do.

[Medium processing per normal pattern]
Next, the details of the processing (step B11) during the normal pattern hit in the normal pattern game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 106, in the normal per pattern process, first, the control pointer during the normal per pattern is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the loaded normal per pattern control pointer is greater than or equal to the upper limit value. (step B602).

Then, if the value of the control pointer during the normal pattern is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step B602; N), the control pointer during the normal pattern is updated by +1 (step B603), and the normal electric operation transition setting process (step B604) is performed. Go and end the processing during the normal pattern.
Also, if the value of the control pointer during the normal pattern is equal to or higher than the upper limit (step B602; Y), without performing the process of updating the processing control pointer area during the normal pattern by +1 in step B603, the normal electric operation transition The setting process (step B604) is performed, and the process during the normal pattern is terminated.

[General electric operation transition setting process]
FIG. 107 shows the general electric operation transition setting process (step B604) in the above-described general pattern per middle process. The normal electric operation transition setting process is a process for controlling the driving of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 37, and the process branches according to the value of the control pointer (normal control pointer during normal pattern). I'm trying In this general electric operation transition setting process, first, a branch process is performed according to the value of the control pointer (step B611).

If the value of the control pointer is "0" or "2", the process proceeds to step B612 to control the closing of the normal variable winning device 37. After closing the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer, save the wait time in the normal game processing timer area (step B612), save the OFF data in the normal electric solenoid output data area to turn off the normal electric solenoid 37c (step B613), and set the normal electric operation transition End the process.

Also, if the value of the control pointer is "1" or "3", the process proceeds to step B614, and in order to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer Save the general electric open time, which is the open time, in the general electric game processing timer area (step B614), save the ON data in the general electric solenoid output data area in order to turn on the general electric solenoid 37c (step B615), The normal electric operation transition setting process is terminated.

Further, if the value of the control pointer is "4", the process proceeds to step B616, where the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is terminated and the normal electric remaining ball process is performed, so the process number is "4". is set (step B616). Then, this process number is saved in the normal game process number area (step B617), and the normal electric remaining ball processing time is saved in the normal game process timer area (step B619). After that, in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B619), and the general electric operation shift setting process is terminated.

Here, in this embodiment, for example, 200 msec is saved as a wait time in step B612, 1700 msec is saved as a normal electric discharge time in step B614, and 600 msec is saved as a normal electric residual ball processing time in step B618. .
Furthermore, when the normal pattern stop symbol is "hit pattern 1", in step B505 of the normal pattern display process shown in FIG. At step B506, "500 msec" is obtained as the normal/universal power release time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 msec has passed, the general electric power (normal variable prize winning device 37) opens for 500 msec because the electric power opening time is "500 msec", and after that, the control pointer during the normal figure hits "4". Therefore, the normal electric remaining bulb processing time of 600 msec is set.
Further, when the normal pattern stop pattern is "hit pattern 2", in step B505 of the normal pattern display process shown in FIG. At step B506, "1700 msec" is obtained as the normal/universal power release time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 msec has passed, the normal power is opened for 1700 msec because the normal power open time is "1700 msec". The time is set, and then the general electric power is opened for 1700 msec because the control pointer during the normal pattern is updated to "3", and then the control pointer during the normal pattern is updated to "4", so it is 600 msec. Normal electric remaining bulb processing time is set.
Further, when the normal pattern stop symbol is "hit pattern 3", in step B505 of the normal pattern display process shown in FIG. At step B506, "1700 msec" is obtained as the normal/universal power release time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 msec has elapsed, the normal power is opened for 1700 msec because the normal power open time is "1700 msec", and after that the normal control pointer is "0", so there is a wait of 200 msec. The time is set, and then the general electric power is opened for 1700 msec because the control pointer during the normal pattern is updated to "1", and then the control pointer during the normal pattern is updated to "2" for 200 msec. The wait time is set, then the normal control pointer is updated to "3", so the power is opened for 1700 msec, and then the normal control pointer is updated to "4", so it is 600 msec. is set.

[Public electric residual bulb treatment]
Next, the details of the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B12) in the above-described normal game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 108(a), in the normal electric remaining ball process, a normal pattern per end process transition setting process (step B701) is performed.

[Regular figure per end process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the end processing transition setting processing (step B701) per normal pattern in the above-described normal electric remaining ball processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 108(b), in the general pattern per end processing transition setting process, first, the processing number "5" related to the general pattern per end process is set (step B711), and the processing number is set to the general pattern game. Save in the processing number area (step B712).

After that, the general pattern ending time (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the general pattern game processing timer area (step B713), and the signal regarding the end of the operation of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (for example, the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B714), and the general electric count area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variable prize winning device 37 is cleared (step B715). Then, the control pointer area in the per normal pattern is cleared (step B716), and the end processing transition setting process per normal pattern is terminated.

[End processing per normal pattern]
Next, the details of the end processing (step B13) per normal pattern in the normal pattern game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 109(a), in the normal pattern per end process, the normal pattern normal process transition setting process 2 (step B801) is performed.

[General figure normal process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the normal pattern normal process transition setting process 2 (step B801) in the normal pattern per end process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 109(b), in the normal game process transition setting process 2, first, the process number "0" relating to the normal game process is set (step B811), and the process number is changed to the normal game process. Save in the number area (step B812).

After that, a signal relating to the end of the winning of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (for example, the normal pattern 1 winning signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B813), and the irregularity monitoring period of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is defined. The flag (unauthorized monitoring period flag) is saved in the general electricity unauthorized monitoring period flag area (step B814), and the general pattern normal process transition setting process 2 is terminated.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (step S111) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 suspension display, the special figure 2 suspension display, the general figure suspension display, the first game state display section, the second game state display section, and the round display provided in the collective display device 50 Settings related to the driving of the segment LEDs that make up the unit are made.

As shown in FIG. 110, in the segment LED editing process, first, the flashing control timer is updated by +1 (step S501), and it is determined whether it is the output-on timing based on whether or not the specific bit of the flashing control timer is 1. (Step S502). In this embodiment, when bit 5 of the blinking control timer is 1, it is determined that it is time to turn on the output, thereby creating a blinking period of 128 milliseconds.
If it is the output on timing (step S502; Y), set the normal pattern reservation number display table 1 out of the normal pattern reservation number display tables 1 and 2 that specify the display mode on the general pattern reservation display. (Step S503), if it is not the output on timing (step S502; N), set the normal figure pending number display table 2 (step S504).
Then, the display data corresponding to the number of normal patterns reserved is acquired from the set number of normal patterns reserved display table and saved in the segment area of the normal pattern reserved display (step S505). In this embodiment, if the number of reserved normal patterns is any of "0" to "2", the display data will be the same regardless of which normal pattern reserved number display table is set.

Next, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S506), and if it is the output on timing (step S506; Y), the special figure 1 reservation number that the display mode in the special figure 1 reservation indicator is specified Of the display tables 1 and 2, set the special figure 1 reservation number display table 1 (step S507), and if it is not the output on timing (step S506; N), set the special figure 1 reservation number display table 2 ( step S508).
Then, the display data corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is acquired from the set special figure 1 reservation number display table and saved in the segment area of the special figure 1 reservation display (step S509).

After that, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S510), and if it is the output on timing (step S510; Y), the special figure 2 reservation number display in which the display mode in the special figure 2 reservation indicator is specified Of the tables 1 and 2, set the special figure 2 reservation number display table 1 (step S511), and if it is not the output on timing (step S510; N), set the special figure 2 reservation number display table 2 (step S512).
Then, the display data corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is acquired from the set special figure 2 reservation number display table and saved in the segment area of the special figure 2 reservation display (step S513).
Furthermore, a round display table that defines the display mode in the round display section is set (step S514), display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is acquired, and saved in the segment area of the round display section (step S515). ).

Next, the game state display table 1 is set (step S516), and the game state display number is set so as to define the display mode of the second game state display unit 58 that lights up to notify the occurrence of the time saving state when the time saving state occurs (step S516). and saves it in the segment area of the first game state display section (step S517). In the present embodiment, the first gaming state display unit consisting of one LED is configured to be turned off during normal operation and to be turned on during special time reduction (during normal electric support).
After that, the game state display table 2 is set, which defines the display mode in the second game state display section for notifying that the game state is more advantageous for right-handed players than left-handed players (step S518), and the game is played. The display data corresponding to the state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area of the second game state display section (step S519), and the segment LED editing process is terminated. In this embodiment, the second gaming state display unit consisting of one LED is turned off during normal hitting (left hitting) and turned off during right hitting (in the case of this embodiment, during big hits, during small wins, and during normal electric support). ) are configured to be illuminated.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and the start and end of fraud notification are set.

As shown in FIG. 111, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, based on the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on, that is, abnormal It is determined whether or not magnetism is detected (step S601). If the magnetic sensor 61 is ON (step S601; Y), that is, if an abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer for measuring the detection period of the abnormal magnetism is updated by +1 (step S602), and the timer is timed up (step S603). In the case of this embodiment, it is determined that the time has expired when the magnet fraud monitoring timer is 32 milliseconds or longer.

When the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step S603; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S604), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value ( For example, 60 seconds) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step S605). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step S606), a magnet fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S607), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area. (step S613). That is, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously on for a certain period of time (eight interrupts, for example).

On the other hand, if the magnetic sensor 61 is not on (step S601; N), that is, if no abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S608), and the magnet fraud that defines the notification time of the magnet fraud is detected. If the notification timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step S609). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is "0" (step S610). Note that even if the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed out (step S603; N), the process proceeds to step S609.

If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not "0" (step S610; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Also, if the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is "0" (step S610; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, and the fraud notification period has expired or the If the notification has not been made, a command to end the magnet irregularity notification is prepared (step S611). Furthermore, a magnet fraud cancellation flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S612), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S613).

If the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S613; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared magnet fraud flag does not match the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S613; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step S614), and effect command setting processing is performed. (step S615), and ends the magnet fraud monitoring process.
Here, "step S601; N"→"step S608"→"step S609"→"step S610; Y"→"step S611"→"step S612"→"step S613; Y" is the normal route.

[Processing for monitoring radio wave fraud]
Next, the details of the board radio wave unauthorized monitoring process (step S113) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the radio fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62, and the start and end of fraud notification are set.

As shown in FIG. 112, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the board radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I/F 121, It is determined whether or not the board radio wave sensor 62 is ON, ie, an abnormal radio wave is detected (step S701). If the radio wave sensor is on (step S701; Y), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value of the radio wave tampering alarm timer (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the radio wave tampering alarm area (step S702).

Then, a command for notifying the radio wave fraud is prepared (step S703), and a radio wave fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a radio wave fraud flag (step S704). It is determined whether they match (step S709). Specifically, in the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on a predetermined number of times. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred at the point in time.

On the other hand, if the board radio wave sensor 62 is not ON (step S701; N), that is, if no abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is not "0", -1. Update (step S705). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave tampering alarm timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave irregularity notification timer is "0" (step S706).

If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not "0" (step S706; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. Also, if the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is "0" (step S706; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, and the period of the fraud notification has expired or the If the notification has not been made, prepare a command to terminate the radio wave fraud notification (step S707), prepare a radio wave fraud cancellation flag as a radio wave fraud flag (step S708), and the prepared radio wave fraud flag is It is determined whether or not the value matches the value of the radio wave irregularity flag area (step S709).

If the prepared radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the radio wave fraud flag area (step S709; Y), the radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared radio wave fraud flag does not match the value of the radio wave fraud flag area (step S709; N), the prepared radio wave fraud flag is saved in the radio wave fraud flag area (step S710). Setting processing is performed (step S711), and the radio wave unauthorized monitoring processing ends.
Here, "step S701; N"→"step S705"→"step S706; Y"→"step S707"→"step S708"→"step S709; Y" is the normal route.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S114) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the external information editing process, payout command transmission process (step S105), winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S108), magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112), board radio fraud monitoring process (step S113) Based on this information, information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal, amusement arcade internal management device, or a test firing test device is created and processed to be set in an output buffer.

As shown in FIGS. 113 and 114, in the external information editing process, first, if neither a glass frame open error has occurred (step S801; N) nor a body frame open error has occurred (step S802; N), , the door/frame open signal OFF data is saved in the external information output data area (step S803), the security signal OFF data is saved in the external information output data area (step S804), and the process proceeds to step S807. .
On the other hand, if a glass frame open error is occurring (step S801; Y) or if a body frame open error is occurring (step S802; Y), the ON data of the door/frame open signal is sent to the external device. The data is saved in the information output data area (step S805), the ON data of the game machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S806), and the process proceeds to step S807.

Then, if the security signal control timer, which counts a predetermined time (for example, 256 milliseconds) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like, is not "0", it is updated by -1 ( step S807). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the RAM initial value is set when starting with RAM clear in the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808).
If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S808; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step S809), and step S810. to process. If the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the process proceeds to step S810 without performing the process of step S809. Transition.

Then, if magnet fraud is occurring (step S810; Y), if board radio fraud is occurring (step S811; Y), if frame radio fraud is occurring (step S812; Y), normal If an electronic fraud is occurring (step S813; Y), or if a big winning slot fraud is occurring (step S814; Y), the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area ( Step S816), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S817), and the process proceeds to step S818. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

On the other hand, no magnet fraud has occurred (step S810; N), no board radio fraud has occurred (step S811; N), no frame radio fraud has occurred (step S812; N), and no electricity fraud has occurred. (Step S813; N), if there is no fraudulent winning slot (Step S814; N), the OFF data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (Step S815), and in Step S818 Go to processing.

Then, main prize ball signal editing processing (step S818) for setting information about the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and starting signal editing processing (step S819) for editing the winning signal of the starting port is performed.
Next, if the pattern determination count control timer for controlling the output time of the information relating to the execution count of the special figure variation display game is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step S820). In addition, the minimum value of the pattern determination count control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the pattern determination count control timer is "0" (step S821).

When the value of the pattern confirmation count control timer is "0" (step S821; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the OFF data of the pattern confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area. (step S822) to end the external information editing process.
Also, if the value of the design determination count control timer is not "0" (step S821; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the ON data of the design determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S823), the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main prize ball signal editing processing]
Next, the details of the main prize signal editing process (step S818) in the external information editing process described above will be described. In the main prize ball signal editing process, the main prize ball signal generated each time the number of prize balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a prize in the prize opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) is This is the process of outputting to the device.

As shown in FIG. 115, in the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step S831). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step S832). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step S832; Y), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output count is "0" (step S833).

Then, if the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is not "0" (step S833; N), the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is updated by -1 (step S834), and the main prize ball is stored in the main prize ball signal output control timer area. The initial value of the signal output control timer is saved (step S835). This main prize ball signal output control timer initial value is the time (for example, 128 msec) in which the main prize ball signal is on (for example, high level) and the time (for example, 64 msec) for its off state (for example, low level). , the ON state time (for example, 128 ms). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S837), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.
Also, if the number of output of the main prize ball signal is "0" (step S833; Y), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0" (step S832; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step S836). It should be noted that the fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0". If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step S836; Y), the process proceeds to step S837. In addition, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output ON period (step S836; N), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the game control device 100 outputs a main prize ball signal every time the number of game balls to be paid out reaches 10, and the payout control device 200 outputs 10 game balls. A main prize ball signal is output every time.
Specifically, the game control device 100 updates the main prize number signal output count by +1 (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) every 10 scheduled payouts (each time a payout command is sent), and updates ( Output the main prize ball signal for the number of output times set).
Since a prize ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 balls are actually paid out in response to the main prize ball signal output for each schedule, the schedule and result can be matched, Ability to deal with fraudulent payouts. In addition, even if you win during the jackpot period, the payout is delayed due to running out of balls, etc., and even if the payout is made after the jackpot ends, the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning will ensure that the hall controller (hall computer) is accurate. Can collect (judge) information.

[Starting port signal editing process]
Next, the details of the starting point signal editing process (step S819) in the external information editing process described above will be described. The starting port signal editing process is a process commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

As shown in FIG. 116, in the starting point signal editing process, first, if the starting point signal output control timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step S841). Note that the minimum value of the starting signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the starting port signal output control timer is "0" (step S842). If the value of the starter signal output control timer is "0" (step S842; Y), it is determined whether the starter signal output count is "0" (step S843).

If the starting signal output count is not "0" (step S843; N), the starting signal output count is updated by -1 (step S844), and the starting signal output control timer is set to the starting signal output control timer area. The initial values are saved (step S845). The initial value of the starter signal output control timer is set to: The ON state time is (for example, 128 ms). After that, ON data for turning on the starter signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S847), and the starter signal editing process is terminated.
If the start signal output count is "0" (step S843; Y), the off data for turning off the start signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S843; Y). S848), the starting port signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the starting signal output control timer is not "0" (step S842; N), it is determined whether the starting signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step S846). It should be noted that the fact that the starting signal output control timer is in the output ON section means that the value of the starting signal output control timer is not "0". If the starting port signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step S846; Y), the process proceeds to step S847. If the starter signal output control timer is not in the output ON period (step S846; N), the off data for turning off the starter signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( Step S848), the starting port signal editing process is terminated.

Next, an effect in a game and control by the effect control device 300 for controlling this effect will be described. 117 and 118 show an example of the effect in the special game state. Here, a case where a 16R probability variable B jackpot including a short opening occurs is shown.

After the result mode of the big hit is derived in the special figure variation display game, as shown in FIG. 117(a), a fanfare effect corresponding to the kind of the big win is performed, and then the round game is started. As shown in FIG. 117(b), the display device 41 has a round number display 41a indicating the number of rounds, a pattern display 41b displaying the jackpot pattern derived from the decorative special figure variation display game, and a right-hand hitting instruction instructing a right-hand hitting. A display 41c and an obtained game ball number display 41d indicating the number of winning balls obtained by long opening are displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 117(c), when a game ball enters the special variable prize winning device 38 in a long open round to obtain a prize ball, the number of prize balls is displayed as the number of prize balls display 41e. , is added to the acquired game ball number display 41d. When the round ends and it becomes an interval, an interval performance is performed as shown in FIG. 117(d). Here, the next round is also long open, so the interval effect for long open is performed.

In addition, when the round game progresses and it becomes a mode transition selection round in which the notification mode at the end of the special game state and the effect mode after the special game state can be selected, the mode shifts as shown in FIG. 117 (e). A selection screen 41f is displayed. In this mode transition selection screen 41f, it is possible to select a normal mode as a first mode or a delé mode as a second mode, and the player operates the effect button effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 to move a finger-like cursor. Select by moving.

In addition, in the interval performance of the round that may be short open from the next time, that is, here, in the interval performance after the end of 4R, a round continuation performance 41g is performed to notify whether or not the long open will continue from the next time onward. . In this round continuation effect 41g, as shown in FIG. 118(a), the characters "short" and "long" flash alternately, and finally the lit characters indicate the result. It is reported that it will be short open because it is 16R variable B. Furthermore, when it is notified that the opening will be short, as shown in FIG. 118(b), an promotion effect 41h is performed to urge the player to aim at the special variable winning device 38 as an interval effect. For example, when the jackpot type is 16R probability variable A (all long open), in the round continuation effect 41g, the character "Long" lights up to notify that long open.

As shown in FIG. 118(c), the promotion effect 41h is continued even in the short opening round. Further, an emphasizing effect 41i emphasizing that the special variable winning device 38 is open is performed. This emphasizing effect 41i is a display as if light is emitted from the special variable winning device 38. - 特許庁The special variable prize winning device 38 is provided with decoration means for decorating with light emission, and the light emission timing, light emission intensity, light emission color, etc. are associated with the light emission mode of the decoration means and the display mode of the emphasis effect 41i. may be synchronized with or may not be synchronized.

Further, when the round with short opening is started, the obtained game ball number display 41d indicating the number of prize balls obtained with short opening is displayed separately from the obtained game ball number display 41d indicating the number of prize balls obtained with long opening. is displayed. In addition, the number of rounds display 41a displays the remaining number of openings. Here, there are 12 remaining rounds including the round currently being executed, and since each round is unlocked once, 12 more rounds are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 118(d), when the short open round ends and the interval time comes, the promotion effect 41h is continued, but the emphasis effect 41i emphasizing that the special variable winning device 38 is open is not performed. Once finished, when the next round starts as shown in FIG. 118(e), the emphasizing effect 41i is resumed.

Then, when the final round ends, an ending effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 118(f) and (g). In this ending effect, as shown in FIG. 118(f), an obtained game ball number display 41d indicating the number of prize balls obtained by long opening and a short opening obtained game ball number display 41j indicating the number of prize balls obtained by short opening are displayed. 118(g), a total number display 41k for displaying the total number of prize balls obtained in the special game state is performed.

In addition, in the ending effect, a state suggestion display 41m, which is a display suggesting the probability state after the end of the special game state, is performed. The content of this state suggestive display differs depending on the effect mode selected by the player in the mode transition selection round. As shown in FIG. 119, (1) to The character (4) is selected according to a predetermined selection rate. As shown in FIG. 119(a), when the normal mode, which is the first mode, is selected, only the character (1) is selected when the high probability state occurs, and the character (2) is selected when the low probability state occurs. ) are selected. Also, as shown in FIG. 119(b), when the delé mode, which is the second mode, is selected, the characters (1) to (4) are selected according to the probability state and the selection rate. It's becoming Note that the probability state may be suggested not only by the character image but also by character information such as words.

[Main processing]
In order to perform the effects as described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 120 and timer interrupt processing (not shown). As shown in FIG. 120, in the main process, first, the process at the start of the program is performed. In this process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), the random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After the program start processing from steps C1 to C7 is performed, loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, a performance button input process (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the performance button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. Inputs from the performance button 25 and the touch panel 29 are read in timer interrupt processing, and in this performance button input processing, when there is an input from the performance button 25 or the touch panel 29, processing for changing performance contents, etc. is performed.

Then, hall/player setting mode processing is performed for setting the changeable range of the brightness of the LEDs and liquid crystals, volume, etc., and receiving operations by the player to change the brightness of the LEDs and liquid crystals, volume, etc. (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) is performed to update the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decoration special figure variation display game.

Next, a reception command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to commands from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C13) is performed for editing settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect. ) to set the completion of drawing command preparation (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the content to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data for the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (approximately 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to switch frames (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to create a system period (1 frame 1/30 second), it is determined that it is time to switch frames when a V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is input twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be changed arbitrarily. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 second, or image updating (frame switching) may be performed at a timing later than 1/60 second. switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined at step C15 that it is time to switch frames (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C17).

After that, sound control processing (step C17) for controlling the output of sounds from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), decoration control processing (step C17) for controlling LEDs such as the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 C18), a movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check processing]
FIG. 121 shows received command check processing in the main processing described above. In this received command check processing, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts how many commands have been received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception count (step C201). It is determined whether or not the number is 0 (step C202). If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not the command copying for the number of commands received has been completed. (step C206). Thus, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer, but the content of the received command buffer is copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. is configured as follows. Thereby, in preparation for a case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during command analysis, commands (data) can be moved to make space. In addition, command analysis can be collectively performed for each round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that copying of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of commands for the number of commands received has been completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and received command analysis processing (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210). If it is determined that the analysis of commands corresponding to the number of commands received has not been completed (step C210; N), the process returns to step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 122 shows received command analysis processing in the received command check processing described above. In this received command analysis processing, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether or not MODE and ACT are within the normal range (steps C232 and C233). ). When it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether or not ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

If it is determined in steps C232 and C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or if it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step At C234; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). Variation system command is a command to command the variation pattern of special figure. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command process (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated.

Also, in step C235, when it is determined that MODE is not within the range of variation commands (step C235; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of jackpot commands (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) during the big win, or a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, end screen, etc.) during the small win. Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

If it is determined at step C237 that the MODE is not within the range of the jackpot commands (step C237; N), it is determined whether or not the MODE is within the range of the symbol commands (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special figure (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special figure). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbolic command (step C239; Y), symbolic command processing (step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

Also, in step C239, if it is determined that MODE is not within the range of symbol commands (step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of single-shot commands such as pending number commands and error commands. (Step C241). A single command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. The single-shot commands include a customer waiting demo command, a pending number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error/illegal command, and a model designation command. If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; Y), single-shot command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of look-ahead symbol commands (step C243). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; Y), the look-ahead symbol system command process (step C244) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends.

Also, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the look-ahead variation system command (step C245). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; Y), prefetch variation command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated. If it is determined in step C245 that the MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

In addition, the look-ahead variation system command and the look-ahead symbol system command are commands including information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect (also referred to as a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not the special figure variation display game will be a big hit when the special figure variation display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) is subsequently executed. (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be), in order to notify the player in advance with a predetermined reliability, display the decoration start memory display etc. displayed on the display device 41 in a manner different from usual, or perform an effect on the display device 41 It is a production such as displaying. The look-ahead system command (a look-ahead variation system command and a look-ahead pattern system command) is a command to inform in advance of the variation pattern and the stop design corresponding to the start memory to be the target of the look-ahead effect, and is sent from the game control device 100 at the time of start winning. It is transmitted to the production control device 300 . It should be noted that normal variation-based commands and symbol-based commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 123 shows single command processing in the received command analysis processing described above. In this one-shot system command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE corresponds to a model specifying command including information about the model set in the game control device 100 (step C261). When it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the model specifying command (step C261; Y), model setting processing is performed to rewrite the internal information with model information corresponding to the command (step C262), and single command processing is performed. exit.

If it is determined in step C261 that MODE does not correspond to the model designation command (step C261; N), it is determined whether the MODE corresponds to a RAM initialization command indicating that the RAM 111C has been initialized. Determine (step C263). If it is determined that MODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command (step C263; Y), RAM initialization processing is performed (step C264), and the one-shot command processing ends. In the RAM initialization process (step C264), the area that needs to be initialized is initialized, and the RAM initialization screen information is set. Furthermore, scenario data for RAM initialization is set in order to perform an effect when the RAM is initialized.

If it is determined at step C263 that MODE does not correspond to the RAM initialization command (step C263; N), MODE is set to a power failure recovery command indicating recovery from a power failure without initializing the RAM 111C. It is determined whether they correspond (step C265). If it is determined that MODE corresponds to a power failure recovery command (step C265; Y), power failure recovery processing is performed (step C266), and the one-shot command processing is terminated. In the power failure recovery process (step C266), the area that needs to be initialized is initialized, and recovery screen information for displaying the power failure recovery screen is set. In addition, scenario data for power failure recovery is set in order to produce an effect at the time of power failure recovery.

If it is determined in step C265 that MODE does not correspond to a power failure recovery command (step C265; N), it is determined whether MODE corresponds to a customer waiting demonstration command indicating the start of a customer waiting demonstration. (step C267). When it is determined that MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demonstration command (step C267; Y), customer waiting demonstration processing is performed (step C268), and the one-shot command processing is terminated. In the customer waiting demonstration process (step C268), the P machine (pachinko machine) state is set to the customer waiting demonstration, and customer waiting scenario data is set for the customer waiting effect.

Also, in step C267, when it is determined that MODE does not correspond to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; N), it is determined whether MODE is special figure 1 pending (step C269). Then, when the MODE is special figure 1 pending (step C269; Y), special figure 1 pending information setting processing is performed, such as processing for displaying on the display device 41 the decoration start memory display corresponding to the occurrence of the pending. (Step C270), the one-shot command processing is terminated. Also, in step C269, when it is determined that MODE does not correspond to special figure 1 suspension (step C269; N), it is determined whether MODE is special figure 2 suspension (step C271). Then, when the MODE is special figure 2 pending (step C271; Y), perform special figure 2 pending information setting processing such as processing to display on the display device 41 the decoration start memory display corresponding to the occurring hold (Step C272), the one-shot command processing is terminated. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes a starting memory display means for performing a starting memory notification display for displaying information about the starting memory by a starting memory display (decorative starting memory display) corresponding to each starting memory.

Also, in step C271, when MODE is not special figure 2 pending (step C271; N), it is determined whether MODE is probability information (step C273). If MODE is probability information (step C273; Y), probability information setting processing for setting the current probability state is performed (step C274), and the one-shot command processing ends.

Also, in step C273, if MODE is not probability information (step C273; N), it is determined whether MODE is error/illegal (step C275). If the MODE is error/illegal (step C275; Y), an error/illegal setting process is performed (step C276) to perform corresponding processing such as error notification, and the one-shot command processing is terminated.

Also, at step C275, if MODE is not error/illegal (step C275; N), it is determined whether MODE is effect mode switching (step C277). And when MODE is production mode switching (step C277; Y), production mode switching processing for switching the production mode is performed (step C278), and the one-shot system command processing is terminated.

Moreover, at step C277, when MODE is not production mode switching (step C277; N), it is determined whether MODE is symbol stop (step C279). Then, if the MODE is not symbol stop (step C279; N), the one-shot system command processing is terminated. If the MODE is symbol stop (step C279; Y), it is determined whether the command is normal (step C280). In the determination of whether it is a normal command, for example, it is determined whether the object of the decoration special figure stop command is intended for the special figure currently fluctuating.

If the command is not a normal command (step C280; N), the one-shot command processing is terminated. If the command is normal (step C280; Y), the corresponding special figure is set to stop (step C281), and if all symbols are stopped, the game state flag is set to the normal state (step C282). , terminates the single-shot command processing. As a result, the variable display of the corresponding decoration special figure variable display game is stopped. The game state flag is a flag indicating the current game state, and in addition to the normal state, there are flags indicating states such as during fluctuation, during big hit, during small hit, etc., and an appropriate flag is set according to the situation.

[Processing of look-ahead pattern commands]
FIG. 124 shows the look-ahead pattern-based command processing (step C244) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this look-ahead symbol type command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the latest pending information is special figure 1 pending (step C301). If the latest pending information is special figure 1 pending (step C301; Y), that is, if the received look-ahead pattern system command is related to special figure 1 pending, the command special corresponding to special figure 1 pending number 1 (step C302), sets a flag for waiting for reception of a read-ahead variation command (step C304), and ends the read-ahead design command process.

Also, if the latest pending information is not special figure 1 pending (step C301; N), that is, if the received look-ahead pattern system command is related to special figure 2 pending, the command corresponds to the special figure 2 pending number Save to the special figure 2 look-ahead symbol command area (step C303), set a look-ahead fluctuation command reception wait flag (step C304), and end the look-ahead symbol system command processing. The prefetching variation command reception wait flag is set in step C304 because the prefetching pattern command and the prefetching variation command (prefetching variation pattern command) are set (paired).

[Prefetching variation command processing]
FIG. 125 shows the prefetch variation command processing (step C246) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this look-ahead variation command processing, first, it is determined whether or not a look-ahead variation command is waiting for reception (step C311). Here, when there is a prefetch variation command reception wait flag set in the prefetch symbol system command processing described above, it is determined that the reception is waiting. If it is not waiting to receive a prefetch variation command (step C311; N), the prefetch variation command processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is waiting to receive a look-ahead variation command (step C311; Y), it clears the look-ahead variation command reception wait flag (step C312).

After that, in the processing of steps C313 to C316, the prefetching variation command (prefetching variation pattern command) received from the game control device 100 is converted so as to be convenient for the processing in the effect control device 300. First, the processing (step C313) for setting the look-ahead fluctuation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of holds of the pattern of the latest hold information is performed, and the information of the special figure type of the start memory corresponding to the look-ahead fluctuation system command received this time and the relevant Depending on the current pending number of special figure type, to set the MODE conversion table for converting the MODE.

Next, referring to the set MODE conversion table, the intra-sub prefetch variation command MODE corresponding to the prefetch variation command MODE is obtained (step C314). Further, a look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (step C315), and an intra-sub look-ahead conversion command ACT corresponding to the look-ahead variation command ACT is acquired (step C316).

MODE contains information on the first half fluctuation, but the contents and time of the first half fluctuation set based on this MODE will change depending on the number of reservations at the time of judgment, so judgment at the time of pre-judgment and special figure fluctuation display Game start Judgment results may differ depending on the timing. Therefore, in order to be able to easily and reliably process the pre-reading notice effect without being affected by the number of reservations at the time of judgment, MODE is converted in a conversion mode according to the current number of reservations, and at the time of judgment It is designed so that it can be handled in common regardless of the number of reservations. For example, if it is a change without reach and may have a short first half fluctuation time depending on the hold situation, or if it is a change without reach and has a long first half change time regardless of the hold situation, To make it possible to easily and surely perform processing of a prefetching advance notice performance by converting into MODEs classified by items to be considered in setting the prereading notice performance.

In addition, ACT includes information on changes in the second half, such as the presence or absence of reach and the type of reach. The content of the second half variation set based on this ACT does not change depending on the number of holdings at the time of determination. However, for example, even in normal reach, the final stop symbol is set to stop one frame before the reach symbol, stop one frame ahead, and the case of winning is set. , and the ACT corresponding to each of them is set, so the range of values is wide. Therefore, the number of ACTs corresponding to the reach of the same system is converted into the same ACT to reduce the number of ACTs, thereby reducing the processing load such as checking in the processing of the pre-reading advance notice effect.

Next, it is determined whether both MODE and ACT after conversion are other than 0 (step C317). If both MODE and ACT after conversion are other than 0 (step C317; N), the command value is abnormal, and the look-ahead variation command processing is terminated. On the other hand, if both MODE and ACT after conversion are other than 0 (step C317; Y), save the post-conversion command in the look-ahead variable command area corresponding to the latest pending information and number of pending (step C318), and press MODE. and ACT (command combination) is normal or not.

If the command combination is not normal (step C320; N) as a result of the look-ahead command consistency check processing (step C319), the look-ahead variation command processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the command combination is normal (step C320; Y), a pre-reading lottery process (step C321) for drawing lots for execution of the pre-reading notice effect is performed, and it is determined whether the pre-reading notice effect is to be generated (step C322).

Then, if the look-ahead advance notice effect is not generated (step C322; N), the look-ahead variation command processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the pre-reading notice effect is to be generated (step C322; Y), whether the pre-reading notice effect to be generated (that is, the pre-reading notice effect selected in the pre-reading lottery process (step C321)) is an effect that starts immediately. is determined (step C323). The effect that starts immediately is, for example, a pending change notice that changes the display mode of the decoration start memory display displayed on the display device 41 from the current time. In addition, the production that does not start immediately is a pre-reading notice production that is performed during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game. These include an effect in which a notice is given by a character appearing during display, and a pending change notice in which the display mode of the decorative start memory display is changed at a later timing than the current time. In addition, as the timing of starting execution of such an effect that does not start immediately, if the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed, the special figure fluctuation display game ends, and the execution of the next special figure fluctuation display game starts It corresponds to the timing at which the

If the effect does not start immediately (step C323; N), the look-ahead variation command processing is terminated. In this case, the notice is set at the start of the special figure variation display game for executing the look-ahead notice effect. On the other hand, if the effect is to be started immediately (step C323; Y), a display corresponding to the selected pre-reading preview effect is set (step C324), and the pre-reading variation command processing is terminated.

[Processing of pattern-based commands]
FIG. 126 shows the pattern-based command processing (step C240) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this symbol system command processing, first, the special figure type (either special figure 1 or special figure 2) corresponding to MODE is set (step C351), and the symbol type corresponding to the combination of MODE and ACT is set. Save (step C352) and end the pattern-based command processing.

The symbol type is a category of symbols such as a lost pattern, a 16R variable A jackpot pattern, a 16R variable B jackpot pattern, a 16R normal A jackpot pattern, a 16R normal B jackpot pattern, a 4R variable jackpot pattern, and a small hit pattern. associated with the data. Since the ratio of symbols changes between special figure 1 and special figure 2 (probability variation ratio is the same), this symbol type setting table is provided separately for each MODE, and the data of MODE is provided from a plurality of symbol type setting tables. is selected, and the symbol type corresponding to the ACT is set by referring to the table.

[Processing of variable commands]
FIG. 127 shows the variable command processing (step C236) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this variation system command processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure type is undecided (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set in step C251 of the symbol system command process described above.

If this special figure type is undecided (step C361; Y), the variation system command processing is terminated. Also, if the special figure type is not undetermined (step C361; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, the combination of the variation command and the design command is checked (step C362), and the variation command and the design type are It is determined whether it is inconsistent (step C363).

When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C363; Y), the variation system command processing is terminated. Further, when the variation command and the pattern type are not inconsistent (step C363; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, a lost pattern, a 16R probability variable A jackpot pattern, a 16R probability variable B jackpot pattern, a 16R normal A jackpot pattern, a 16R normal B jackpot pattern, a 4R probability variable jackpot pattern, and a small There are hit patterns and so on. When the variation command and the pattern type are inconsistent, an effect is performed like when the pattern command of the 16R probability variation A jackpot pattern is received although the variation command (variation pattern command) is received. It means that it is a combination that contradicts above (combination of variation command and symbol type).

In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, a variable effect setting process for setting information for performing an effect corresponding to the variable command is performed (step C365).

Next, the P machine state (pachinko machine state) is set during special figure fluctuation (step C366). Here, "during special figure fluctuation" means that the special figure is fluctuating (not during a demonstration waiting for customers, during a big hit, or during a fanfare). Furthermore, if the number of look-ahead effects (the number of times of look-ahead execution) is not zero, the number of look-ahead effects is updated by -1 (a process of reducing the number of look-ahead effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable command process ends.

[Variation effect setting process]
FIG. 128 shows the variable effect setting process (step C365) in the above-described variable command process. In this fluctuation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern type is reachless fluctuation (step C381). If the variation pattern type is reachless variation (step C381; Y), the model code and special figure type and the first half advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the production mode at that time are set (step C382). In addition, since there is no reach fluctuation, the symbol type is always a lost symbol, and the symbol type need not be particularly referred to here. Note that the production mode corresponds to the game mode managed by the production control device 300, and naturally differs depending on the model, but here there are a normal mode, a probability variable mode, a time saving mode, a latent mode, and the like. Furthermore, a plurality of modes are provided in each mode in which the allocation rate of the notice effect and the effect mode of the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41 are different.

Next, with reference to the first half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of reservations of MODE and special figure type is obtained (step C383). As a result, in the case of fluctuation without reach, it is possible to change the lottery contents of the announcement effect appearing during each fluctuation (specifically, the appearance rate of each announcement effect mode) according to the number of reservations. After that, a lottery for the advance notice that appears during the first half fluctuation is performed using the first half advance notice distribution group table (step C386).

On the other hand, if the variation pattern type is not a reachless variation (step C381; N), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode and the symbol type is set (step C384). Then, referring to the first half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the fluctuation pattern type is acquired (step C385), and the first half notice distribution group table is used to change the first half. A lottery for the advance notice that appears in .

Next, the advance notice effect of the second half fluctuation is drawn by lottery. In addition, the second half of the special figure fluctuation display game is a so-called reach action (for example, a special result mode (a combination of special patterns) in which the display area excluding the specific area among the display areas of multiple rows of special figures is a big hit. is stopped and the variable display is performed only in a specific area). On the other hand, the first half variation of the special figure variation display game is the variation display before the start of the reach action.

First, the late notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode and symbol type is set (step C387). The second half advance notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting the address of the second half advance notice distribution group table. Then, referring to the second half advance notice distribution group address table, the address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to ACT is acquired (step C388), and the second half notice distribution group table is used to change the second half (during reach). A lottery for the notice of appearance is performed (step C389).

After that, the content of the variable performance corresponding to MODE and ACT is determined (step C390), and the content of the performance corresponding to the preliminary lottery result is determined (step C391). As a result, the variation time of the decoration special figure variation display game and the production and notice such as the main reach content are determined. Further, a stop symbol setting process for determining a stop symbol with reference to the determined special figure variation display game variation pattern (ready effect, etc.) and the contents of the notice is performed (step C392).

Next, display setting of variable effect is performed (step C393), and display setting of notice effect is performed (step C394). By these processes, it is possible to execute the effect and notice in the decoration special figure variation display game set as described above. After that, the display setting of the pending decrease corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C395). In this process, setting is made to reduce the decoration starting memory display corresponding to the reduction of the corresponding starting memory when starting the special figure variation display game.

Then, set the sound number, which is the BGM number, the decoration number, which is the number indicating the type of effect by the decoration lamp, etc. (step C396), and the decoration special figure variation corresponding to the special figure type (variation display of identification information) Display settings are made (step C397). Furthermore, in the information display device 630, in order to set the variation display of the fourth symbol for displaying the decoration special symbol variation display game separately from the variation display of the identification information, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type is performed (step C398), and the variable effect setting process is terminated.

[Jackpot command processing]
FIG. 129 shows the jackpot command processing (step C238) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this jackpot command process, first, it is determined whether the MODE is fanfare (step C401). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern). Then, if the MODE is fanfare (step C401; Y), fanfare effect setting processing for setting a fanfare display image according to the type of big win or small win is performed (step C402), and the state of the P machine is set to fanfare. After setting (step C403), the big hit system command processing is terminated.

If MODE is not fanfare (step C401; N), it is determined whether MODE is round (step C404). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state. If the MODE is round (step C404; Y), a round effect setting process for updating the round number display information is performed (step C405), the P machine state is set to be in a round (step C406), End the jackpot command processing.

If MODE is not round (step C404; N), it is determined whether MODE is interval (step C407). That is, it determines whether the received command is an interval command relating to the interval between rounds. When the MODE is interval (step C407; Y), interval performance setting processing for setting the performance during the interval is performed (step C408), the state of the P machine is set during the interval (step C409), and the jackpot is won. End system command processing. If MODE is not interval (step C407; N), it is determined whether MODE is ending (step C410). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an ending command related to the ending after the end of the final round.

When the MODE is the ending (step C410; Y), for example, when the high probability state is reached after the end of the special game state, screen information is set to notify that the high probability state is reached, and the jackpot ends. An ending effect setting process for setting screen information corresponding to the subsequent game state is performed (step C411), the P machine state is set to the ending (step C412), and the jackpot command process is terminated. If MODE is not ending (step C410; N), it is determined whether MODE is count (step C413). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a large winning opening count command based on the winning to the special variable winning device 38 .

If the MODE is not count (step C413; N), the jackpot system command processing is terminated. If the MODE is count (step C413; Y), a count effect setting process (step C414) for setting an effect corresponding to the winning of the special variable prize winning device 38 is performed, and the big hit system command process is terminated.

[Count effect setting process]
FIG. 130 shows the count effect setting process (step C414) in the above-described jackpot command process. In this fanfare effect setting process, first, it is determined whether it is a short open round in which the openable time is equal to or shorter than a predetermined time (step C421). In this embodiment, the openable time for the short open round is 0.2 seconds, and the openable time for the long open round is 29 seconds.

Then, if it is not a short open round (step C421; N), that is, if it is a long open round, the acquired game ball number counter is updated based on the big winning opening count command (step C422), and the acquired game ball number counter is changed. Based on this, display setting for the obtained game ball number display 41d is performed (step C423), and the count effect setting process is terminated. The winning game ball number counter counts the number of prize balls to be paid out due to the winning of the special variable winning device 38 in the long open round, and in step C422, updating is performed to add the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning. , the updated value is displayed in step C423.

In addition, if it is a short opening round (step C421; Y), the short opening pattern counter is updated based on the big winning opening count command (step C424), and the short opening acquired game ball is based on the short opening pattern counter. The display setting of the number display 41j is performed (step C425), and the count effect setting process is terminated. The short opening pattern counter counts the number of prize balls to be paid out due to the winning of the special variable prize winning device 38 in the short opening round, and in step C424 the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning is updated to add. , the updated value is displayed in step C425.

As a result, the number of winning prizes to the special variable winning device 38 in long opening and the number of winning prizes to the special variable winning device 38 in short opening are separately counted and displayed. That is, the effect control device 300 includes a winning determination means for determining whether the winning to the special variable winning device 38 is in the first open mode (long open) or the second open mode (short open). Eggplant. In addition, the effect control device 300 determines the number of prize balls based on the winning to the special variable winning device 38 in the first open mode (long open) and the second open mode (short open) based on the determination of the winning by the winning determination means. The number of prize balls based on the prize winning to the special variable prize winning device 38 in , and counting means for counting separately.

[Fanfare effect setting process]
FIG. 131 shows the fanfare effect setting process (step C402) in the above-described jackpot command process. In this fanfare effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the ACT is a jackpot fanfare (step C431). That is, it is determined whether the fanfare command corresponds to any one of 16R probability variable A, 16R probability variable B, 16R normal A, or 16R normal B.

If the ACT is a big win fanfare (step C431; Y), the number of big wins is updated by +1 (step C432), and the display contents of the big win fanfare effect are determined based on the probability state and the number of big wins (step C433). Incidentally, the number of big hits is cleared to 0 based on the fact that the game is in a normal game state that is neither a high probability state nor a time saving state. That is, it counts the number of so-called consecutive wins. After that, the display setting of the fanfare effect corresponding to the determined contents is performed (step C434), and it is determined whether or not the big win includes a short opening (step C435). If short release is not included (step C434; N), that is, if all rounds are long release, hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is terminated. If short opening is included (step C434; Y), short opening jackpot information is set (step C436), hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is terminated. .

If the ACT is not a jackpot fanfare (step C431; N), it is determined whether the ACT is a certainty fanfare (step C437). That is, it is determined whether or not the fanfare command corresponds to 4R probability variation (sudden probability). If the ACT is a definite fanfare (step C437; Y), it is determined whether the hit is from a continuous effect, which is a effect that is continuously executed over a plurality of special figure variation display games (step C438).

If it is not a hit from a continuous effect (step C438; N), the display setting of the sudden probability exclusive effect corresponding to the probability state is performed (step C439), the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect is performed. End the setting process. The sudden probability exclusive performance corresponding to the probability state is a high probability state after the special game state when the 4R probability variation occurs in the low probability state, so a performance is performed to inform or suggest that effect. In addition, when the 4R probability variation occurs in the high probability state, the high probability state continues even after the special game state, so an effect is performed to inform or suggest that effect.

In addition, when the hit is from the continuous performance (step C438; Y), the sudden definite performance to be executed is selected from among the sudden definite performance patterns related to the current variable performance (continuous performance) (step C440) and determined. The display setting of the sudden probability effect is performed (step C441), the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is terminated. That is, in the case of the 4R probability variation from the continuous performance, the performance related to the continuous performance is performed even in the special game state. Incidentally, in the case of 4R probability variation, the number of big hits may be updated by +1.

If the ACT is not a definite fanfare (step C437; N), it is determined whether the ACT is a small hit fanfare (step C442). That is, it is determined whether the fanfare command corresponds to a small hit. If the ACT is not a small win fanfare (step C442; N), the fanfare effect setting process is terminated. Also, if the ACT is a small hit fanfare (step C442; Y), it is determined whether the hit is from a continuous effect, which is an effect that is continuously executed over a plurality of special figure variation display games (step C443). ).

If the winning is not from the continuous performance (step C443; N), the display setting of the small winning performance corresponding to the probability state is performed (step C444), the winning type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare is performed. End the effect setting process. In the case of a small win, since there is no change in the probability state before and after the small win, the special performance for the small win corresponding to the probability state provides a performance to notify or suggest that the probability state at the time of occurrence of the small win is maintained.

In addition, when the hit is from the continuous performance (step C442; Y), the small winning performance to be executed is selected from among the small winning performance patterns related to the current fluctuation performance (continuous performance) (step C445), The display setting of the determined small winning effect is performed (step C446), the winning type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is terminated. That is, in the case of a small hit from the continuous performance, the performance related to the continuous performance is performed even in the special game state.

In the case of a 4R probability change or a small hit from a continuous production, when the 4R probability change or a small hit is derived (at the end of the special figure fluctuation display game that becomes a sudden probability or a small hit), 4R without clearly showing the result mode During the special game state based on odds and small hits, an effect is made to indicate which one. For example, an effect in which an enemy character fights with an ally character is performed as a continuous effect, and when the result mode is derived, the battle is not yet settled. Then, in the special game state, in the case of 4R probability variation, an effect that the ally character wins (hitting probability effect) is performed, and in the case of a small win, an effect that the enemy character wins (small win effect) is performed.

[Round effect setting process]
FIG. 132 shows the round effect setting process (step C405) in the above-described jackpot command process. In this round effect setting process, first, display setting of right hitting instruction is performed (step C461), and it is determined whether it is a special game state based on a small hit or a sudden probability (4R probability variation) (step C462).

In the case of a special game state based on a small hit or a certainty (step C462; Y), display setting of a small hit/a certainty round effect is performed (step C474), and the process proceeds to step C475. In addition, if it is not a special game state based on a small hit or a sudden hit (step C462; N), the number of rounds is derived from the round command (step C463), and short open big hit information set in the case of a big hit including a short open round. is determined (step C464).

If there is no short open jackpot information (step C464; N), that is, if the special game state is for only long open rounds, the number of rounds is set to be displayed (step C465), and the display setting for the long open pattern round effect is set. (step C466). Next, the sound number, which is the BGM number based on the long open pattern, and the decoration number, which is the number indicating the type of effect by decoration lamps, etc., are set (step C467).

After that, it is determined whether it is a mode transition selection round in which a notification mode at the end of the special game state or an effect mode after the end of the special game state can be selected (step C468). If it is not the mode transition selection round (step C468; N), the round effect setting process is terminated. If it is the mode transition selection round (step C468; Y), display setting of the mode transition selection screen is performed (step C469), and the round effect setting processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if there is short opening big hit information (step C464; Y), that is, if it is a special game state including short opening rounds, it is determined whether the number of rounds is a predetermined value for short opening rounds (step C470). ). If the number of rounds is not a predetermined value for short open rounds (step C470; N), that is, if the rounds are long open rounds, the process proceeds to step C465.

If the number of rounds is a predetermined value for a short open round (step C470; Y), that is, if the round is a short open round, a display setting for a short open pattern round effect is set (step C471), and the round is performed. The number of remaining open times is calculated from the number upper limit information and the number of rounds (step C472). Then, the display setting of the number of remaining opening times, which is the number of short opening times, is performed (step C473), and the display setting of an emphatic effect prompting the player to aim for a prize in the special variable prize winning device 38 is performed (step C475). After that, the sound number, which is the BGM number based on the emphasized effect, and the decoration number, which is the number indicating the type of effect by decoration lamps, etc., are set (step C476), and the round effect setting process ends.

That is, in a short opening round, a short opening small hit, or a 4R probability variable round, an effect different from that of a long opening round is performed. As described above, the special variable prize winning device 38 makes it easier for the game ball to stay in the opening/closing member 990, and it is possible to aim for winning even if it is opened for a short time. A production 41i is performed.

[Interval effect setting process]
FIG. 133 shows interval effect setting processing (step C408) in the above-described jackpot command processing. In this interval effect setting process, first, a sound number, which is the BGM number for the long opening interval, and a decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect by decoration lamps, etc., are set (step C481), and a jackpot including a short opening round is set. It is determined whether or not there is short open jackpot information set in the case of (step C482).

If there is no short open jackpot information (step C482; N), that is, if the special game state is for only long open rounds, the interval effect setting process is terminated. In this case, the long open interval is set as shown in FIG. 117(d). Also, if there is short opening big hit information (step C482; Y), that is, if it is a special game state including short opening rounds, it is determined whether the number of rounds is a predetermined value (step C483). The predetermined value here is the number of final rounds for long opening, which is 4 in this embodiment.

When the number of rounds is a predetermined value (step C483; Y), that is, when the next round is a short open round, the display setting of the round continuation notification effect is performed (step C484), and the BGM based on the round continuation notification effect is set. A sound number, which is the number of , and a decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp or the like, are set (step C485), and the interval effect setting process is terminated. Thereby, the round continuation notification effect as shown in FIGS. 118(a) and 118(b) is set.

On the other hand, if the number of rounds is not the predetermined value (step C483; N), it is determined whether the number of rounds is greater than the predetermined value (step C486). If the number of rounds is not greater than the predetermined value (step C486; N), the interval effect setting process is terminated. In this case, the next round will also be a long opening, and the long opening interval will remain set.

If the number of rounds is greater than the predetermined value (step C486; Y), the display setting for the short opening interval is performed (step C487). A decoration number indicating the type of effect is set (step C488), and the interval effect setting process is terminated. In this case, a short release interval as shown in FIG. 118(d) is set. In the short opening interval, the promotion effect 41h is performed, but the emphasis effect 41i is not performed. However, the emphasizing effect 41i may also be performed in the same manner as during the round, or the emphasizing effect exclusively for intervals may be performed.

[Ending effect setting process]
FIG. 134 shows the ending effect setting process (step C411) in the above-described jackpot command process. In this ending effect setting process, first, the jackpot type information that is the information on the jackpot type that triggered the occurrence of the special game state this time is loaded (step C491), and the jackpot type information and the selection rate in the first mode ( (See FIG. 119(a)) to set the state suggestive display (step C492).

Next, it is determined whether there is a mode transition flag (step C493). There are a first mode and a second mode in the performance mode after the end of the special game state, which can be selected by the player. The first mode and the second mode are effect modes in which the contents of the state suggesting display 41m, which is a display suggesting the probability state, the effect of the special figure variation display game, and the like are different. The selection of the effect mode can be performed on the mode transition selection screen 41f displayed in the mode transition selection round, and the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 to make the selection. When the player selects the first mode, the mode transition flag is not set, and when the player selects the second mode, the mode transition flag is set.

If there is no mode transition flag (step C493; N), that is, if the first mode is set, the process proceeds to step C495. In this case, the state suggestive display set in step C492 is displayed. If there is a mode transition flag (step C493; Y), i.e., if the second mode is set, then the state suggestion display based on the selection rate in the second mode (see FIG. 119(b)) is set ( Step C494), and shift to step C495.

After that, the total number of acquired game balls is calculated from the acquired game ball number counter and the short open pattern counter (step C495), and the addition effect display setting is performed based on the total acquired game ball number (step C496). Then, the acquired game ball number counter and the short opening pattern counter are reset (step C497), the short opening jackpot information is reset (step C498), and the ending effect setting process is terminated. By the above processing, the state suggestion display 41m corresponding to the effect mode selected by the player is performed at the end of the special game state, and the number of game balls obtained in the special game state is displayed as the total number display 41k. .

FIG. 135 shows a modification of the effect in the special game state. As shown in FIGS. 135(a) to 135(c), a right-handed hitting instruction display 41c for instructing right-handed hitting may be displayed so as to flow from left to right on the display screen. In this case, the right-handed instruction display 41c is displayed so as to flow at a position that does not overlap with the pattern display 41b that displays the jackpot pattern derived in the decoration special-figure display game. Also, the right-handed instruction display 41c may be displayed in a flowing manner at a position overlapping the pattern display 41b, but the right-handed instruction display 41c is displayed so as to flow behind the pattern display 41b, and the pattern display 41b is always visible. state. In addition to the symbol display 41b, the round number display 41a indicating the number of rounds, the highlight effect 41i, and the like may or may not be hidden by the right-handed instruction display 41c.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 135(d) to (f), the promotion effect 41h prompting the player to aim at the special variable winning device 38 may be displayed so as to flow toward the special variable winning device 38. FIG. In this case, when overlapping with the symbol display 41b displaying the big win symbols derived in the decoration special symbol variation display game, as shown in FIG. The pattern display 41b is always visible. Also, the promotion effect 41h may be displayed in a flowing manner at a position not overlapping the pattern display 41b. In addition to the symbol display 41b, the round number display 41a indicating the number of rounds, the emphasized effect 41i, the short open acquisition game ball number display 41j, etc. may be hidden by the promotion effect 41h, or may be hidden. Also good. Also, as shown in FIGS. 135(a) to (c), the display for operating the right-handed instruction display 41c and the display for operating the promotion effect 41h, as shown in FIGS. 135(d) to (f), are displayed simultaneously. can be

FIG. 136 also shows a modification of the effect in the special game state. As shown in FIG. 136(a), the operation unit 24 and the special variable winning device are used as a promotion effect 41h to encourage the player to aim at the special variable winning device 38 and an emphasizing effect 41i to emphasize that the special variable winning device 38 is open. The image of the device 38 may be used to instruct the player to turn the operation unit 24 to the right or to aim at the special variable winning device 38 . By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to understand. In particular, when a plurality of special variable winning devices 38 are provided, it is possible to clearly indicate which special variable winning device 38 should be targeted. In addition, the light emitting mode of the actual special variable winning device 38 located on the lower right side of the display device 41 and the light emitting mode of the image of the special variable winning device 38 displayed on the display device 41 are synchronized. The special variable winning device 38 to be aimed at can be known. Of course, the lighting modes of the operation unit 24 may also be synchronized in the same manner.

The image may be a schematic animation or a moving image of the actual special variable winning device 38 . In addition, in the images of the operating unit 24 and the special variable winning device 38 displayed on the display device 41, the display is performed in synchronization with the light emitting effect of the actual operating unit 24 and the special variable winning device 38. good. Further, the images of the operation unit 24 and the special variable winning device 38 displayed on the display device 41 may be still images.

Further, the character information and the arrow image included in the right-handed instruction display 41c and the promotion effect 41h may be displayed in a flowing manner as described above. In this case, the front side of the image of the operation unit 24 or the special variable winning device 38 may be moved, or the rear side may be moved. Further, when the collective display device 50 is displayed in the image of the operation unit 24 or the special variable winning device 38, the display may be synchronized with the actual display mode of the collective display device 50, or may be displayed without synchronization. Also good. In the case of a non-synchronized display mode, any display mode may be used. A specific number is lit, and in the case of an aggregate of LEDs, a particular lighting mode is associated with a big win, etc.).

Further, when the right-handed game state is started, an image may be displayed to instruct the player to turn the operation unit 24 to the right by a large amount or to aim at the normal variable winning device 37. . Further, when the left-handed game state is started, an image may be displayed to instruct the player to slightly turn the operation unit 24 to the right or to aim at the winning device 90 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 136(b), a remaining time display 41n for displaying the remaining time until the end of the final round may be performed. The end condition of the round that is established in the case of short opening is that the opening possible time elapses rather than the predetermined number of game balls winning the special variable prize winning device 38, and the round ends in a fixed time. do. Therefore, when subsequent rounds are short-open, the remaining time until the end of the final round can be calculated by adding up the time of the round until the end of the final round and the time of the interval. By displaying the remaining time in this way, it is possible to give a different impression than in the case of notifying the number of remaining rounds, and to improve the amusement of the game. That is, the remaining time calculation means (game control device 100 or effect control device 300) for calculating the remaining time until the end of the special game state is provided, and the remaining time calculated by the remaining time calculation means can be notified. Become.

In the above-described embodiment, the first open state is continuously opened for a predetermined time or longer, i.e., the long open state, and the second open state is continued for a predetermined time or less. Although the short opening has been described, it is not limited to this, and any opening mode may be used as long as the first opening mode and the second opening mode are different. Also, as the game machine, the game machine that executes the variable display game based on the winning in the starting area is mentioned, but other game machines may be used. For example, it is possible to win a prize in the auxiliary game device based on the prize in the starting area, and the game ball that has won the auxiliary game device flows into a specific area. (former type 2 type) gaming machines may also be used.

From the above, the game board 30 having the game area 32 in which the game ball can flow down is provided, and the start area provided in the game area 32 (the first start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the second starting winning opening 97) is a game that executes a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of identification information based on the winning of a game ball in 97), and generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. In the machine 10, a special variable prize winning device 38 which can be converted to a closed state in which game balls cannot win a prize and an open state in which game balls can win prizes, and which is converted to the open state in a special game state, and a game-related performance are controlled. Effect control means (effect control device 300), and the operation mode of the special variable winning device 38 in the special game state includes a first open mode (long open) and a second open mode different from the first open mode. There is a mode (short opening), and the effect control means can execute the promotion effect 41h that prompts the shooting of game balls toward the special variable winning device 38 when the second opening mode is executed. Become. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the number of game balls during the special game state and enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, a shooting operation unit (operation unit 24) operated by the player to adjust the shooting momentum of the game ball, a display device 41 capable of displaying game information, and a special variable winning device 38 are decorated with light emission. and a decoration means, and the effect control means displays, as the promotion effect 41h, the operation method of the shooting operation section necessary to set the shooting force for shooting the game ball toward the special variable prize winning device 38; The display device 41 displays the decoration mode of the special variable winning device 38 by the decoration means. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to understand the contents of the promotion effect 41h.

In addition, a game board 30 having a game area 32 in which game balls can flow down is provided, and a start area (first start winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening 97) provided in the game area 32 A game machine 10 that executes a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information based on the winning of a game ball, and generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. , a special variable winning device 38 which can be converted to a closed state in which game balls cannot win a prize and an open state in which game balls can win a prize, and which is converted to the open state in a special game state, and a special variable prize winning device in the special game state. The operation mode of 38 includes a first opening mode (long opening) and a second opening mode (short opening) different from the first opening mode. A winning determination means (effect control device 300) for determining whether the winning is in the open mode or the second open mode is provided. Therefore, it is possible to control the presentation and progress of the game based on the information from the prize determination means, and to improve the interest in the game.

Also, it is configured to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on winning to the special variable winning device 38, and based on winning to the special variable winning device 38 in the first open mode based on determination of winning by the winning determination means. A counting means (effect control device 300) for separately counting the number of prize balls and the number of prize balls based on the winning to the special variable prize winning device 38 in the second open mode is provided. Therefore, the performance and progress of the game can be controlled based on the information from the counting means, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling a game-related effect is provided, and the effect control means, based on the result of counting by the counting means, receives a prize ball based on the winning of the special variable winning device 38 in the first open mode. The number of balls and the number of prize balls based on the winning to the special variable prize winning device 38 in the second open mode can be notified separately. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the performance control means (performance control device 300) can report the counting result that has not yet been reported at a predetermined timing after reporting only a part of the counting result by the counting means. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[First modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted. I will explain the part. The gaming machine of this modified example differs in the mode of execution of the addition effect.

As shown in FIG. 137, in this modified example, it is possible not to immediately display the number of prize balls obtained by short opening in the short opening obtained game ball number display 41j. In the example shown in FIG. 137, as shown in FIGS. 137(a) and 137(b), the round is performed with short opening, and as shown in FIG. A value equal to the number is displayed in the short-open acquisition game ball number display 41j. After this, 15 prize balls were newly obtained by short opening, but as shown in FIG. 136(c), these 15 are not added to the short opening obtained game ball number display 41j.

Then, in the ending effect after the final round is finished, as shown in FIG. 137(d), the winning game ball number display 41d indicating the number of winning balls acquired by long opening shows the number of winning balls acquired by short opening. An effect is performed in which the value is added in the short-open acquired game ball number display 41j, and a total number display 41k for displaying the total number of prize balls acquired in the special game state is performed as shown in FIG. At this point, the total number of 15 prize balls not added in FIG. 137(c) is not included in the total number display 41k. After that, in the second half of the ending effect, as shown in FIGS. 137(f) and 137(g), an additional effect is performed in which 15 prize balls that have not been added are added to the total number display 41k.

As for the short opening round, the player is interested in how much game value (prize balls) can be obtained, and in addition to the value displayed in the short opening obtained game ball number display 41j, By performing an additional effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of gain and increase the interest in the game.

[Count effect setting process]
In order to perform such control, the effect control device 300 performs a count effect setting process shown in FIG. 138 instead of the count effect setting process shown in FIG. In this count effect setting process, when it is a short open round (step C421), a count display lottery is performed to determine whether the number of won prize balls should be immediately displayed on the short open winning game ball number display 41j (step C601). ).

As a result of the count display lottery, when it is determined to be displayed (step C602; Y), the processing of steps C424 and C425 is performed, and the number of won prize balls is immediately displayed on the short open winning game ball number display 41j. Also, if the result of the count display lottery is not to display (step C602; N), the non-display counter is updated based on the big winning opening count command (step C603), and the count effect setting process ends. In this case, the number of prize balls won is counted by the non-display counter, but it is not displayed at this time.

[Ending effect setting process]
Also, instead of the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 134, the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 139 is performed. In this ending effect setting process, the re-total number is calculated from the total acquired game ball number and the non-display counter (step C611), and an additional effect is set based on the re-total number (step C612). Then, the non-display counter is reset (step C612). As a result of this processing, the addition effects shown in FIGS. 137(f) and (g) are performed after the addition effects shown in FIGS. 137(d) and (e).

It should be noted that it is also possible to carry out an additional effect of notifying the number of prize balls that have not yet been notified only when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the special game state. For example, in a long open round, an additional effect may be performed only when a predetermined number of wins (for example, 9) or more that can be won in one round occur.

[Second modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted. I will explain the part. The gaming machine of this modified example differs in processing regarding the display of the state suggestion display 41m.

FIG. 140 shows an example of the effect in the special game state in this modified example. As shown in FIG. 140(a), when a predetermined round is reached in the short open round, the effect button operation effect in which the player operates the effect button 25 is started. This effect button operation effect changes the display mode of the state suggestion display 41m according to the operation result of the effect button 25. FIG.

In this effect button operation effect, a meter display 41p for prompting the operation of the effect button 25 and displaying the operation status is displayed. This meter display 41p is a display in which a plurality of areas are vertically overlapped, and the display color is sequentially changed from the lower area according to the time the player has long pressed the effect button 25 and the number of times the effect button 25 has been pressed. By doing so, the operation status is notified.

When the player has long pressed the effect button 25 for a predetermined time or longer or pressed the effect button 25 for a predetermined number of times or more within the effective period, and the final condition is achieved, all of the meter display 41p is displayed as shown in FIG. 140(b). The display color of the area changes. Then, as shown in FIG. 140(c), in the ending effect, a state suggestion display 41m corresponding to the effect mode selected by the player in the mode transition selection round is displayed.

Also, if the player does not achieve the final condition by long-pressing the effect button 25 or pressing the effect button 25 within the effective period, a part of the meter display 41p is displayed as shown in FIG. 140(d). The display color of the area changes. Here, the final condition has not been achieved, but the predetermined intermediate condition has been achieved. As shown in FIG. be.

Also, if the player does not operate the effect button 25 within the effective period, the display colors of all areas of the meter display 41p do not change as shown in FIG. 140(f). Then, as shown in FIG. 140(g), the state suggestion display 41m is not displayed in the ending effect. It should be noted that the state suggestive display 41m is similarly not displayed when the player has long pressed the effect button 25 or pressed the effect button 25 within the valid period but the intermediate condition has not been achieved.

The partially hidden state suggestive display 41m shown in FIG. 140(e) is selected at a selection rate shown in FIG. 141 according to the probability state after the special game state ends. These state suggesting displays 41m are partially hidden, but since the display modes are different from each other, it is possible for an experienced player to distinguish them. However, since it is possible to select either the high probability state or the low probability state for each state indication display 41m, it is difficult to clearly grasp the probability state after the end of the special game state.

[Production button operation production processing]
In order to perform such control, the effect control device 300 performs the effect button operation effect process shown in FIG. 142 in the effect button input process in the main process shown in FIG. In this effect button operation effect processing, first, it is determined whether the effect button operation effect is being executed (step C621), and if the effect button operation effect is not being executed (step C621; N), effect button operation effect processing exit. Also, if the effect button operation effect is being executed (step C621; Y), it is determined whether the effect button is operated (step C622), and if there is no operation (step C622; N), the effect button operation Terminate the production process.

If there is an operation of the effect button (step C622; Y), the operation input counter is updated corresponding to the operation mode of the effect button (step C623), and the meter display is set based on the operation input counter (step C624). ), the effect button operation effect processing is terminated. That is, each time the effect button 25 is pressed for a long period of time or the effect button 25 is pressed for a short time, the value of the operation input counter is updated, and the meter display changes according to this value. done.

[Ending effect setting process]
Also, instead of the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 134, the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 143 is performed. In this ending effect setting process, it is determined whether the operation input counter is at the upper limit (step C631), and if it is at the upper limit (step C631; Y), that is, if the final condition is achieved, the operation input counter is reset. Then (step C635), the ending effect setting process is terminated. In this case, the state suggestion display 41m set in steps C491 to C494 is displayed.

If the operation input counter is not the upper limit value (step C631; N), it is determined whether the operation input counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (step C632). If the operation input counter is greater than or equal to the predetermined value (step C632; Y), that is, if the intermediate condition is achieved, the state suggestion display 41m based on the selection rate of the reset table (see FIG. 141) is set (step C633). , the operation input counter is reset (step C635), and the ending effect setting process is terminated. In this case, as shown in FIG. 140(e), the partially concealed status suggestion display 41m is displayed.

If the operation input counter is not equal to or greater than the predetermined value (step C632; N), that is, if the intermediate condition has not been met, the state suggestion display is set to non-display (step C634), and the operation input counter is reset. (Step C635), the ending effect setting process is terminated. In this case, the state suggestion display 41m is not displayed as shown in FIG. 140(g). That is, the effect control means (effect control device 300), based on the operation mode of the operation unit (effect button 25, touch panel 29) by the player during the special game state, notifies information about the game after the end of the special game state. It means that the mode is made different.

It should be noted that the state suggestion display 41m may gradually change from the completely hidden state to the completely visible state according to the operation of the effect button 25 (according to the value of the operation input counter).

[Third modification]
Next, a description will be given of a third modification of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted. I will explain the part. The gaming machine of this modification gives points according to the game result in the special game state.

FIG. 144 shows an example of the effect in the special game state in this modified example. As shown in FIG. 144(a), a short-open round is performed, and in this short-open round, as shown in FIG. You can get one character in . When a character is acquired, an acquisition display 41q for notifying the type of character acquired is displayed, and the acquired character is displayed in a total acquisition display 41r for displaying the characters acquired in the special game state. In FIG. 144(b), the acquisition display 41q informs that a star character has been acquired, and the total acquisition display 41r shows that one star character has been acquired.

As shown in FIG. 144(c), when one game ball wins again in the special variable winning device 38, one character is obtained. Here, the acquisition display 41q informs that the peach character has been acquired, and the total acquisition display 41r shows that one star character and one peach character have been acquired. A character to be obtained is selected for each winning according to a selection rate as shown in FIG. 144(h).

As shown in FIG. 144(d), in the ending effect, the type of character acquired is displayed in the total acquisition display 41r. Here, it is shown that seven star characters, one peach character, one musical note character, and one treasure box character are obtained. Since one character corresponds to one winning to the special variable prize winning device 38, the short open acquired game ball number display 41j is displayed corresponding to the total winning display 41r, and is added to the acquired game ball number display 41d. Addition production is performed.

Further, a privilege corresponding to the acquired character is given, and a grant notification display 41s for notifying the grant of the privilege is performed accordingly. As shown in FIG. 144(e), points are awarded when the peach character is acquired. These points can be used by the player to customize the presentation of the game. In addition, as shown in FIG. 144(f), when a musical note character is obtained, a special BGM is set as the BGM after the special game state ends. Also, as shown in FIG. 144(g), when the treasure box character is acquired, a special background is set as the background after the special game state is over.

By giving a privilege in this way, it is possible to make the player aim to win a prize to the special variable prize winning device 38 even if the opening is short, thereby improving the amusement of the game. In particular, by giving a game value different from that of prize balls, the interest in the game can be further enhanced. That is, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can give a game value different from the prize ball based on the winning to the special variable winning device 38. FIG.

[Count effect setting process]
In order to perform such control, the effect control device 300 performs a count effect setting process shown in FIG. 145 instead of the count effect setting process shown in FIG. In this count effect setting process, if the short open round is selected (step C421), a character is selected based on the selection rate of the display icon table (see FIG. 144(h)) (step C651), and the character display setting is performed. (Step C652). As a result, the acquisition display 41q and the total acquisition display 41r are performed as shown in FIGS. 144(b) and 144(c).

[Ending effect setting process]
Also, instead of the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 134, the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 146 is performed. In this ending effect setting process, it is determined whether or not the point-giving character (here, the peach character) has been obtained (step C661). If no point awarding character has been obtained (step C661; N), the process proceeds to step C663. If a point-giving character has been acquired (step C661; Y), points are awarded based on the number of acquisitions (step C662), and the process proceeds to step C663.

Next, it is determined whether or not the BGM character (note character here) has been obtained (step C663). If the BGM character has not been acquired (step C663; N), the process proceeds to step C665. If the BGM character has been acquired (step C663; Y), the privilege BGM is set (step C664), and the process proceeds to step C665.

Next, it is determined whether or not the background character (here, the character of the treasure box) has been obtained (step C665). If the background character has not been obtained (step C665; N), the ending effect setting process is terminated. Also, if the background character has been acquired (step C665; Y), the privilege background is set (step C666), and the ending effect setting process is terminated.

[Main processing]
Also, instead of the main processing shown in FIG. 120, the main processing shown in FIG. 147 is performed. In this main process, an effect point control process (step C671) for performing a process relating to effect points is performed.

[Production point control processing]
FIG. 148 shows the effect point control process (step C671) in the main process described above. In this effect point setting process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a grant privilege selection operation flag set to indicate that the player is selecting a grant privilege based on the points (step C691). The selectable benefits here include special background music, special background music, the appearance of special characters, special reach, and other effects that cannot be seen normally. things are mentioned.

If there is an award privilege selection operation flag (step C691; Y), the process proceeds to step C702. Moreover, when there is no grant privilege selection operation flag (step C691; N), state information is acquired (step C692). The state information is information indicating the state of the gaming machine, such as during the execution of the special figure variation display game, during the special game state, during the customer waiting state, and the like.

Next, based on the acquired state information, it is determined whether the state triggers resetting of the accumulated point value (step C693). Here, it is assumed that the reset trigger is the state of waiting for a customer. If it is not in a state that triggers resetting of the accumulated point value (step C693; N), the process proceeds to step C694. If the point accumulation value is to be reset (step C693; Y), the point accumulation value is reset (step C694), and the process proceeds to step C695.

Next, based on the obtained state information, it is determined whether or not there is a state that triggers resetting of the granted privilege (step C695). Granted privileges are privilege BGM and privilege backgrounds. Also, here, it is assumed that the state of being in a state of waiting for a customer serves as a reset trigger. If it is not in a state that triggers resetting of the granted privilege (step C695; N), the process proceeds to step C697. Moreover, when it is in the state which becomes a reset opportunity of a provision privilege (step C695; Y), a provision privilege is reset (step C696), and it transfers to step C697.

Next, based on the acquired state information, it is determined whether or not points can be exchanged (step C697). Here, when the customer is not waiting for a customer, it is assumed that the point can be exchanged. If the point exchange is not possible (step C697; N), the effect point control process is terminated. If it is possible to exchange points (step C697; Y), it is determined whether the conditions for point exchange are satisfied (step C699). The point exchange condition is that the accumulated point value is equal to or greater than the minimum number of points required for exchange set for each given privilege. If this point exchange condition is not satisfied (step C699; N), the effect point control process is terminated. Also, if the point exchange condition is satisfied (step C699; Y), it is determined whether there is an operation to start point exchange (step C700).

The point exchange start operation is an operation of performing a predetermined operation on the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 to start exchanging points for a given privilege. If there is no point exchange start operation (step C700; N), the effect point control process is terminated. Also, if there is a point exchange start operation (step C700; Y), a grant privilege selection operation flag is set (step C701), and the effect point control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if there is a given privilege selection operation flag (step C691; Y), it is determined whether or not there has been an operation to determine a given privilege (step C702). If there is no determination operation for the given privilege (step C702; N), the effect point control process is terminated. Further, when there is a determination operation of the grant privilege (step C702; Y), the selected grant privilege is set (step C703), the grant privilege selection operation flag is reset (step C704), and the effect point control processing is performed. exit.

It should be noted that although the case where the point granting character is acquired as a trigger for acquiring points has been described, it is also possible to acquire points in other cases. For example, when executing a look-ahead effect, points may be obtained according to the look-ahead effect to be executed. Further, points may be obtained when the game is continued for a predetermined time, when a specific effect occurs, or when a prize is won in a prize-winning slot.

[Fourth modification]
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. I will explain the part. The game machine of this modified example is designed to reduce the flow speed of the game ball up to the opening/closing member 990 .

As shown in FIG. 149, on the upper surface 617 of the guiding portion 616, a projecting portion 481 and a recessed portion 482 similar to the projecting portion 992 and the recessed portion 993 provided in the flow path forming portion 991 of the opening/closing member 990 are formed. Due to such protrusions 481 and recesses 482, the game ball flowing down the upper surface 617 of the guide section 616 flows down to the left while meandering back and forth. slows down. As a result, the flow speed can be sufficiently reduced until reaching the opening/closing member 990 of the special variable winning device 38, and the time for which the game ball stays on the opening/closing member 990 can be lengthened.

In addition, in the configuration of FIG. 149(a), since the game ball approaches a position closer to the player than in the configuration of FIG. Interest can be improved. Further, in the configuration of FIG. 149(b), it is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding with the back surface of the cover glass of the glass frame 15, so that the cover glass can be protected and noise generated by colliding with the cover glass can be prevented. can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 150, a protruding portion 481 may be provided in a portion of the downstream path 38f upstream of the opening/closing member 990 to cause the flowing game ball to meander. By doing so, the speed of the game ball flowing into the opening/closing member 990 can be reduced, and the time for which the game ball stays on the opening/closing member 990 can be lengthened. Further, as shown in FIG. 151, a protruding portion 481 and a recessed portion 482 for meandering the flowing game ball may be provided in the upstream portion of the opening/closing member 990 in the downstream passage 38f. This can also reduce the speed of the game ball flowing into the opening/closing member 990, and the time for which the game ball stays on the opening/closing member 990 can be lengthened.

Vibration is generated by the meandering motion of the game ball, and a detection sensor for detecting this vibration may be provided. Alternatively, a detection sensor for detecting the existence of a game ball may be provided in a portion where the game ball meanders. Then, the effect control device 300 performs effects such as causing the LED to emit light based on the detection signal from the detection sensor. By doing so, it is possible to attract attention to the game ball that meanders and stays, and it is possible to show that the game ball can flow into the special variable winning device 38 in short opening.

[Fifth Modification]
Next, a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. I will explain the part. The gaming machine of this modified example differs in the configuration of the special variable winning device 38 .

As shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, the special variable winning device 38 of this modified example has a guide flow path 955 composed of a main body portion 970 and a rear wall member 960 extending downward and a V flow path 955a extending downward. It is branched into a discharge sphere flow path 955b extending in the direction. A V door 501 that is slidable in the front-rear direction is provided at a position serving as an inflow portion of the V flow path 955a. The V door 520 can be converted into a blocking state in which it protrudes forward and blocks inflow into the V flow path 955a, and a permitting state in which it retreats backward and allows inflow into the V flow path 955a.

A game ball that enters the big prize opening 38d and flows into the guide passage 955 is guided to the rear surface of the rear wall member 960 through the through portion 968 formed in the rear wall member 960, and formed in the main body portion 970. It is guided to the right by the rib 973 and reaches the branching portion of the V channel 955a and the discharge ball channel 955b. In the state in which the V door 520 is retreated backward, it is possible to flow into the lower V flow path 955a, and the game ball that has flowed into the V flow path 955a is a probability variable operation area switch that detects the game ball that has flowed into the V flow path 955a. After being detected at 460, the game ball is guided backward by the rib 969 formed on the rear wall member 960, passes through the through portion 974, is guided to the back side of the main body portion 970, and is discharged to the outside of the gaming machine. It is adapted to flow into the channel. As will be described later, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the probability state after the end of the special game state is not determined by the jackpot symbol, but the game ball flows into the V flow path 955a in the special game state and the probability variable operation region Based on the detection by the switch 460, the high-probability state is set.

On the other hand, when the V door 520 protrudes forward, the game ball reaching the branched portion is guided rightward through the upper surface of the V door 520 and flows into the discharge ball flow path 955b. The game ball that has flowed into the discharge ball flow path 955b is guided to the right, passes through the through hole 462 formed in the main body portion 970 and penetrates back and forth, reaches the back side of the main body portion 970, and is further guided downward and discharged. After being detected by the remaining ball discharge switch 461 for detecting the game ball flowing down the ball flow path 955b, the game ball flows into the discharge flow path for discharging the game ball to the outside of the gaming machine. A rib 463 is formed on the back surface of the rear wall member 960 at a position facing the through hole 462 to guide the game ball flowing down the discharge ball flow path 955b to the through hole 462 behind.

As shown in FIGS. 154 to 157, a V-door unit 500 for operating the V-door is provided on the back side of the body portion 970. As shown in FIGS. This V door unit 500 is provided with a V door 520 , a lever solenoid 502 for driving the V door 520 , and a link member 510 for operating the V door 520 according to the drive of the lever solenoid 502 .

The lever solenoid 502 is arranged such that the drive shaft 503 extends downward along the vertical direction. A first link member 511 of a link member 510 is connected to the tip of the drive shaft 503 . The first link member 511 is slidable in the vertical direction as the drive shaft 503 operates. The first link member 511 is provided with a bearing portion 512 for receiving a connection shaft 514 provided at one end of the second link member 513 so that the connection shaft 514 moves up and down as the drive shaft 503 moves. It's becoming

The second link member 513 has a V-shaped bent shape, and a connecting shaft 514 that connects with the first link member 511 is provided at the end of an arm portion 517 that extends in one direction from the bent portion. there is A connection shaft 515 that connects to the V door 520 is provided at the end of the arm 518 that extends from the bent portion to the other side. A rotation shaft 516 is provided at the bent portion. The pivot shaft 516 is perpendicular to the extending direction of the arms 517 and 518 extending from the bent portion, and the connection shafts 514 and 515 extend parallel to the pivot shaft. The rotating shaft 516 is axially supported along the left-right direction by a bearing portion 464 formed on the back surface of the main body portion 670 , and the second link member 513 is rotatable about the rotating shaft 516 .

The V door 520 includes a door portion 521 that can extend to the V flow path 955a. The upper surface of the door portion 521 is an inclined surface that is inclined to the right when viewed from the front side, and in a state in which it extends to the V flow path 955a, the game ball is made to flow down to the right discharge ball flow path 955b. ing. Further, the front end portion of the door portion 521 in the extending direction forms an inclined surface that is inclined such that the lower end is located on the rear side of the upper end. Since the inclined surface is formed in this way, when the door portion 521 is extended forward into the V channel 955a, game balls present in the inflow portion to the V channel 955a are released upward or downward. be able to.

An insertion portion 522 into which the connection shaft 515 of the second link member 513 is inserted is formed in the rear portion of the V door 520 . The front-to-rear width of the insertion portion 522 is slightly wider than the outer diameter of the connecting shaft 515, but the vertical width is sufficiently wider than the outer diameter of the connecting shaft 515, so that the connecting shaft 515 can move vertically within the insertion portion 522. It is possible.

A slit-shaped guided portion 523 extending in the front-rear direction is formed on the bottom surface of the V-door 520 . As shown in FIG. 154, a through portion 467 penetrating back and forth is formed in a portion of the main body portion 670 where the V door 520 is arranged, and the V door unit 500 provided on the back side of the main body portion 670 has a V door unit 500 that is provided on the back side of the main body portion 670. As shown in FIG. The door portion 521 of the door 520 extends through the through portion 467 to the inflow portion of the V flow path 955a on the front side of the main body portion. The through portion 467 is formed with a guide rib 465 extending along the front-rear direction for guiding the movement of the V-door 520 in the front-rear direction so as to be slidably fitted to the guided portion of the V-door 520 . It has become.

155(a), 156(a), and 157(b), the V door unit 500 configured as described above is in a state where the drive shaft 503 of the lever solenoid 502 is most extended in the operating range. In the (OFF state), the first link member 510 is positioned at the lower end of the range of motion, and the second link member 513 is rotated most counterclockwise when viewed from the right. The connecting shaft 515 is positioned at the frontmost end of the movement range. As a result, the V door 520 is pushed out to the front end of the movement range, extends upward from the V flow path 955a, and blocks the inflow of game balls into the V flow path 955a.

When the lever solenoid 502 is actuated from this state to retract the drive shaft 503 (to the ON state), the first link member 510 moves upward, and the second link member 513 rotates backward clockwise when viewed from the right side. Rotate. Accordingly, the connecting shaft 515 of the second link member 513 moves rearward, and the V door 520 moves rearward. As shown in FIGS. 155(b), 156(b), and 157(c), when the drive shaft 503 of the lever solenoid 502 is in the most retracted state within the range of motion, the V door 520 is at the rear end of the range of motion. , the door portion 521 is completely retracted from the V flow path 955a, and the game ball is permitted to flow into the V flow path 955a. When the door portion 521 is extended upward from the V channel 955a to block the inflow of the game ball into the V channel 955a, the reverse operation is performed.

FIG. 158 shows a block diagram of the game control device 100 in the game machine of this modified example. Game ball detection signals from the probability variable operating region switch 460 and the remaining ball ejection switch 461 provided in the special variable winning device 38 are input to the game control device 100 . Also, the lever solenoid is controlled by the game control device 100 .

16R probability variable A, 16R probability variable B, 16R normal A, 16R normal B, and 4R probability variable are set for the jackpot types in the gaming machine of this modification. Then, the first round of each jackpot type is set as a probability variable determination round. This variable probability determination round is a round for determining whether or not the game ball flows into the V flow path 955a to determine whether the high probability state is reached after the special game state ends. The probability variable in the name of each jackpot type indicates that the possibility that the game ball flows into the V flow path 955a is high and it is likely to be in a high probability state (probability variable state) after the special game state ends, and the normal means the V flow path 955a. It shows that the possibility of game balls flowing into is low and it is difficult to become a high probability state (probability variable state) after the special game state ends. In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the high probability state is reached depending on whether or not the game ball flows into the V flow path 955a. If the game ball does not flow into the V channel 955a, the high probability state does not occur.

FIG. 159 shows the operation of the special variable winning device 38 that can be executed in each round of the special game state. As shown in FIG. 159(a), V opening opens the special variable winning device 38 with the start of the round (t31). Furthermore, with the start of the round, the lever solenoid 502 is turned ON (retracted state), and the variable probability operating region switch 460 is enabled. In a state in which the lever solenoid 502 is OFF (extended state), the door portion 521 covers the V flow path 955a and game balls cannot flow in. In a state in which the lever solenoid 502 is ON, the door portion 521 is in a V flow It is in a state in which game balls can flow in after retreating from the path 955a. Also, the state in which the variable probability operating region switch 460 is effective is a state in which the detection of the game ball in the variable probability operating region switch 460 is treated as effective. On the other hand, the state in which the probability variable operating region switch 460 is invalid is a state treated as invalid even if there is a game ball detected by the probability variable operating region switch 460.

The lever solenoid 502 is turned off after 64 ms have passed since the start of the round (t32). Then, when 100 ms elapses after the lever solenoid 502 is turned off, the variable probability operating region switch 460 becomes invalid (t33). That is, there is a possibility that the winning game balls flow into the V flow path 955a immediately after the special variable winning device 38 is opened.

After 200 ms have elapsed from the start of the round, the special variable winning device 38 is closed (t34). Then, when 2700ms elapses, the special variable prize winning device 38 is opened again (t35), and when either the condition that the openable time of 25000ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins is established. The special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends (t39). After that, the interval time and the processing time for the balls remaining in the big winning hole are started (t39), and when the interval time ends, the next round is started (t41).

In addition, after the special variable winning device 38 is opened for the second time (t35), the lever solenoid 502 is also turned ON for a predetermined period of time (t36-t37, t38-t39). In addition, the variable probability operating region switch 460 is also enabled (t36). The second opening of the special variable winning device 38 is a sufficiently long opening, and the ON state of the lever solenoid 502 continues for a long time, so that the game balls almost certainly flow into the V flow path 955a. Become. Therefore, if the type of jackpot is variable, it will almost certainly be in a high-probability state.

In addition, the lever solenoid 502 can be kept ON for a predetermined period of time even after the special variable winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43). can also flow into the V channel 955a. In addition, the special variable winning device 38 is closed when the openable time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls win, and the game balls that have won the special variable winning device 38 are all discharged within the processing time of the remaining balls in the big winning opening. When the remaining ball processing time ends (t42), the lever solenoid 502 turns OFF and ends the operation, and the variable probability operating region switch 460 becomes invalid.

In addition, when the special variable prize winning device 38 is closed due to the elapse of the openable time or the predetermined number of game balls winning, and all the game balls winning the special variable prize winning device 38 are not discharged within the remaining ball processing time. And, when the lever solenoid 502 is completely discharged by the end of the period in which it is ON (t43), when the discharge is completed, the lever solenoid 502 turns OFF and ends the operation, and the probability variable operation region Switch 460 is disabled.

In addition, when the openable time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls win, the special variable winning device 38 is closed, and all the game balls that have won the special variable winning device 38 are discharged within the remaining ball processing time of the big winning opening. In the case where the lever solenoid 502 is not completely discharged by the end (t43) of the period in which the lever solenoid 502 is in the ON state, the lever solenoid 502 is turned off at the end (t43) of the period in which the lever solenoid 502 is in the ON state. It turns OFF and terminates the operation. In this case, after the lever solenoid 502 is turned off (t43), when 100 ms elapses, the variable probability operating region switch 460 becomes invalid (t44).

As shown in FIG. 159(b), in short opening, the same opening as the first opening of the special variable winning device 38 in V opening is performed (t51 to t54), and the round is ended based on the end of the opening. (t54). Since the opening of the special variable winning device 38 is very short and the ON state of the lever solenoid 502 is also short, the possibility of game balls flowing into the V flow path 955a is low. Therefore, when the jackpot type is normal, it is rare to be in a high probability state.

In addition, the operation of the lever solenoid 502 and the valid/invalid switching of the variable probability operation area switch 460 are performed in the same manner as in the case of V opening as long as the game ball remains in the special variable winning device 38 (t56 to t63 ). Therefore, if game balls remain in the special variable winning device 38 even after the processing time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening has passed, the lever solenoid 502 is turned off when the discharge of the remaining balls is completed. As the operation ends, the variable probability operating region switch 460 becomes invalid. Also, if all the game balls are not discharged by the end of the period when the lever solenoid 502 is ON (t62), the lever solenoid 502 is turned OFF at the end of the period when the lever solenoid 502 is ON (t62). After 100 ms have passed after the lever solenoid 502 is turned off (t62), the probability variable operation region switch 460 becomes invalid (t63).

However, it is only when short opening is performed in the first round that the lever solenoid 502 and probability variable operating region switch 460 are controlled as shown in FIG. 159 (b) in short opening. When short opening is performed in a round other than this, the lever solenoid 502 is not operated, and the variable probability operating region switch 460 remains disabled. In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

As shown in FIG. 159(c), in the long opening, the special variable prize winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t61), and a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls are released after the openable time of 25000 ms has passed. If any of the conditions for winning a prize are established, the special variable prize winning device 38 is closed and the round ends (t62). After that, the interval time and the processing time for the balls remaining in the big winning hole are started (t62), and when the interval time ends, the next round is started (t63). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set. In this long opening, the lever solenoid 502 remains in the OFF state, and the variable probability operating region switch 460 remains disabled.

In each of the types of jackpots described above, V is opened in the first round in the case of variable probability jackpots. Also, in the case of a normal jackpot, the short circuit is opened in the first round. Then, from the second round onwards, 16R variable variable A and 16R variable variable A are all long open, 16R variable variable B and 16R normal B are long open for 2 to 4R and short open for 5 to 16R. Also, in the 4R probability variation, all shorts are open. However, in short-circuit opening after 2R, the lever solenoid 502 remains in the OFF state, and the variable probability operating region switch 460 remains invalid. Although the special variable winning device 38 is opened even in the case of a small hit, the lever solenoid 502 remains in the OFF state, and the probability variable operating region switch 460 also remains disabled.

During the first opening period (t31 to t32) of the door portion 521 in V opening and the opening period (t51 to t52) of the door portion 521 in short opening, the door portion 521 stays on the opening/closing member 990 when the opening/closing member 990 is opened. It is a period in which it is difficult for the game ball that has been playing to reach the V flow path 955a.

As shown in FIG. 31( a ), when the opening/closing member 990 is opened, the game ball staying on the opening/closing member 990 comes into contact with the projecting portion 992 formed on the opening/closing member 990 . As shown in (b), it bounces and is guided in a direction away from the big winning opening 38d. That is, it is guided away from the V flow path 955a forming the specific area. In addition, the bounced game ball contacts the front wall protrusion 954 of the flow path front wall 952, the rear wall protrusion 964 of the flow path rear wall 962, etc., so that the time to reach the V flow path 955a becomes longer. It's becoming For this reason, it is difficult for the game ball staying on the opening/closing member 990 to reach the V flow path 955a when the opening/closing member 990 is opened. However, since the protruding portions 992 formed on the opening/closing member 990 are arranged at intervals through which the game balls can pass, the game balls falling through the intervals without contacting the protruding portions 992 pass through the V flow path. There is a small chance that it will flow into 955a. Of course, the projecting portion 992 may be arranged without leaving an interval through which the game ball can pass, or may be continuously provided in a rib shape along the front end of the upper surface, so that the game ball on the opening and closing member 990 is opened. You may also make sure that the spheres touch.

In addition, the first opening period (t31 to t34) of the special variable winning device 38 in V opening and the opening period (t51 to t54) of the special variable winning device 38 in short opening are the protrusions 992 etc. Even a game ball that bounces in contact can flow into the big winning opening 38d. As a result, it is possible to flow into the big winning opening 38d even if the opening is short. The opening period of the door part 521 and the opening period of the special variable prize winning device 38 are set at the design stage of the gaming machine so that the design value that generates the high probability state or the design value of the winning rate in the short opening is set. , the opening/closing member 990 and the like are set according to the structure of the special variable prize winning device 38 .

[Probability variable operation area switch monitoring process]
Moreover, in the game control device 100, the variable probability operating region switch monitoring process shown in FIG. 160 is performed. In this probability variation operating region switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the probability variation operating region switch 460 is in effect (step A2401). The variable probability operating region switch 460 is valid, and the detection of the gaming ball in the variable probability operating region switch 460 is treated as valid. If the probability variation operating region switch 460 is not valid (step A2401; N), the probability variation operating region switch monitoring process is terminated. Also, if the probability variable operating region switch 460 is in effect (step A2401; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the probability variable operating region switch 460 (step A2402).

And, when there is no input to the probability variation operating region switch 460 (step A2402; N), the probability variation operating region switch monitoring process is terminated. Also, if there is an input to the variable probability operating region switch 460 (step A2402; Y), prepare a variable probability operating region passing command (step A2403), and perform production command setting processing (step A2404). As a result, the effect control device 300 can execute the effect corresponding to the fact that the game ball has flowed into the V flow path 955a.

Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit symbol is a V easy symbol (step A2405). V easy symbols are symbols corresponding to 16R variable probability A, 16R variable probability B, and 4R variable probability. Since the V opening is performed in the case of a big hit by these symbols, the game ball almost certainly flows into the V flow path 955a. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit by 16R normal A or 16R normal B, which is not a V easy symbol, the game ball rarely flows into the V flow path 955a because the short is opened.

Then, if the jackpot design is V easy design (step A2405; Y), set the variable probability operating area normal passage information (step A2406), save the set information in the variable probability operating area passing information area (step A2408 ), ending the variable probability operating region switch monitoring process. Also, if the jackpot pattern is not a V easy pattern (step A2405; N), set the probability variation operating area irregular passage information (step A2407), and save the set information in the probability variation operating area passage information area (step A2408 ), ending the variable probability operating region switch monitoring process.

[Jackpot end processing]
Then, instead of the big-hit end processing shown in FIG. 84, the big-hit end processing shown in FIG. 161 is performed. In this jackpot end processing, it is determined whether there is probability operation area passage information (probability variation operation area normal passage information or probability variation operation area irregular passage information) set when the game ball flows into the V flow path 955a (step A2411). And when there is no probability operation area passing information (step A2411; N), big hit end setting processing 1 is performed (step A1202). In this case, the high-probability state does not occur. Moreover, when there is probability operation area passing information (step A2411; Y), big hit end setting processing 2 is performed (step A1203). This case is a case of a high probability state. That is, regardless of the big hit pattern, when the game ball flows into the V flow path 955a, the probability becomes high.

[Lever solenoid control process]
Also, in the game control device 100, a lever solenoid control process for controlling the lever solenoid 502 is performed. As shown in FIG. 162, in this lever solenoid control process, first, it is determined whether or not the lever solenoid control pointer is the no-update code (-1 in this case) (step A2501). If the lever solenoid control pointer is the no-update code (step A2501; Y), the lever solenoid control processing is terminated. If the lever solenoid control pointer is not the code without update (step A2501; N), the lever solenoid control timer is updated by -1 (step A2502), and it is determined whether the lever solenoid control timer has reached 0 (step A2503). .

If the lever solenoid control timer has not reached 0 (step A2503; N), the lever solenoid control process is terminated. When the lever solenoid control timer reaches 0 (step A2503; Y), the lever solenoid control table is set (step A2504), and the table address corresponding to the lever solenoid control pointer is calculated (step A2505). Then, the control pointer for the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid control point area (step A2507), and the output data for the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid output data area (step A2508). After that, the probability variable operating region validity determination flag is acquired and saved in the probability variable operating region validity determination flag region (step A2509), and the lever solenoid control processing ends.

By the above processing, the lever solenoid control pointer is sequentially updated each time the predetermined time elapses, and the lever solenoid 502 is set to ON or OFF as shown in FIG. set. It should be noted that, when the operation of the lever solenoid 502 is terminated by satisfying a predetermined condition, by setting 0 as the lever solenoid control pointer, the lever solenoid 502 is turned OFF and the probability variable operation region switch 460 is disabled. . After setting 0 as the lever solenoid control pointer, -1 is set as the lever solenoid control pointer so that the state in which the operation is stopped continues.

In addition, by delaying the arrival of the game ball to the V flow path 955a, the first opening period of the door portion 521 in V opening (t31 to t32) and the opening period of the door portion 521 in short opening (t51 to t52), In order to make it difficult for the game ball staying on the opening and closing member 990 to reach the V flow path 955a when the opening and closing member 990 is opened, a concave portion 471 is formed in the guide flow path 955 leading to the V flow path 955a. It may be provided to slow down the flow speed of the game ball.

For example, as shown in FIG. 163(a), it is located behind the through portion 968 formed in the rear wall member 960, and guides the game ball guided to the back side of the rear wall member 960 to the V flow path 955a side. A bent portion 470 is provided with a plurality of concave portions 471 as shown in FIGS. 163(b) and 163(c). It is preferable that the corners of the concave portion 471 be curved so as not to excessively hinder the flow of the game ball.

163(c) has a wall surface on the downstream side of the game ball that is more inclined than the recess in FIG. 163(b). can be prevented. It should be noted that the portion where such unevenness is provided is not limited to the bent portion 470, and may be any portion of the guide flow path up to the V flow path 955a. In addition, the curved portion may be increased before reaching the V flow path 955a to slow down the flow-down speed of the game ball. In other words, a flow-down speed reduction mechanism such as a concave portion 471 or a bent portion is provided in the flow path up to the V flow path 955a to reduce the flow-down speed and power of the game ball as compared to the case without the flow-down speed-down mechanism. , V channel 955a. Also, a protrusion may be provided on the bottom surface of the flow path leading to the V flow path 955a so that the game ball bounces, thereby delaying the arrival timing to the V flow path 955a.

From the above, the game board 30 having the game area 32 in which the game ball can flow down is provided, and the start area provided in the game area 32 (the first start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the second starting winning opening 97) is a game that executes a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of identification information based on the winning of a game ball in 97), and generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. The machine 10 is equipped with a special variable prize winning device 38 which can be converted into a closed state in which game balls cannot win prizes and an open state in which game balls can win prizes, and which is converted to the open state in a special game state, and the special variable prize winning device 38. In the closed state, game balls can enter through an opening facing upward, and in the closed state, the opening is protruded forward to close the opening, making it impossible for the game ball to win a prize. An opening/closing member 990 is provided that slides in the front-rear direction so as to allow the game ball to win a prize. A protruding portion 992 protruding upward is provided on the upper surface that can flow down. Therefore, the protruding portion 992 changes the rolling mode of the game ball, thereby enhancing the interest in the game. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing into the specific area at an unintended timing, and prevent the transition to a probability state different from the designed value.

Moreover, the projecting portion 992 is provided at least at the front end portion of the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 in the sliding direction. When the opening/closing member 990 is changed to the open state, the protruding portion 992 changes the rolling mode of the game ball, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In addition, a game control means (game control device 100) for controlling a game is provided, the special variable winning device 38 is provided with a specific area (V flow path 955a) into which game balls can flow, and the game control means is a special Based on the fact that the game ball that has won the variable winning device 38 flows into the specific area, a game state that is more advantageous to the player than when the game ball does not flow into the specific area can be generated after the special game state ends. The projecting portion 992 is formed so that the game ball in contact with the projecting portion 992 is guided away from the specific area when the opening/closing member 990 is converted to the open state. Therefore, since the player is guided away from the specific area, it is possible to arouse the player's sense of unease and increase the amusement of the game.

In addition, the opening/closing member 990 has a plurality of projections 992 at intervals on the upper surface. The protruding part 992 is arranged so that it can pass between and flow down from the front end in the sliding direction. Therefore, when the opening/closing member 990 is changed to the open state, the game ball rolls in a variety of ways, which enhances the amusement of the game.

In addition, the projecting portion 992 is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990 can contact in the closed state, and the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990 more than when the projecting portion 992 is not present. It means that the time is set to be longer. Therefore, since the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 for a long time, the possibility of winning the special variable winning device 38 increases, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

[Sixth modification]
Next, a sixth modification of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted. I will explain the part. The configuration of the game area 32 is different in the gaming machine of this modification.

As shown in FIG. 164, the game board 30 of this modified example is provided with a plate-like partition wall 531 between the center case 40 and the outer peripheral wall 31 from the upper side to the right side of the center case 40 . The partition wall 531 is arranged along the outer peripheral wall 31 at a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball from the outer peripheral wall 31 . In addition, the partition wall 531 is the front-rear width of the game area 32 from the front surface of the game board main body (the width from the front surface of the game board main body 80 to the rear surface of the cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front of the game board 30). It extends forward.

In addition, the space between the partition wall 531 and the regulation wall 613 formed on the outer periphery of the center case 40 is also a space equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, and both sides of the partition wall 531 are provided with the game balls that can flow down. A first flow-down area 541 sandwiched between the partition wall 531 and the outer peripheral wall 31 and a second flow-down area 542 sandwiched between the partition wall 531 and the regulation wall 613 are formed.

A lower end of the partition wall 531 is connected to an upper end of the guide portion 616 . In the gaming machine of this modification, the game ball can also flow down on the right side of the guide portion 616, and the first flow-down region 541 sandwiched between the partition wall 531 and the outer peripheral wall 31 is the region on the right side of the guide portion 616. , and is formed to guide the game ball to the out port 30a. A game ball flowing down this first flow-down area 541 does not enter any of the normal figure starting gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, the special variable winning device 38, the general winning port 35, and the winning device 90, and the out port 30a. guided to. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the second flow area 542 sandwiched between the partition wall 531 and the regulation wall 613 is the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, the special variable winning device 38, the general winning port 35 , there is a possibility of winning the winning device 90 . In this modified example, there is a possibility that the winning device 90 wins even when hitting right, but the winning device 90 may be prevented from winning when hitting right.

Which of the first flow-down area 541 and the second flow-down area 542 the game ball is allowed to flow into can be selected by adjusting the shooting momentum. The inlets of the first flow area 541 and the second flow area 542 are positioned above the center case 40, and the inlet of the first flow area 541 is positioned above the inlet of the second flow area 542. is doing. Therefore, in order to aim at the inflow of the game ball into the second flow-down region 542, it is necessary to make the launch force weaker than in the case of flowing the game ball into the first flow-down region 541. - 特許庁

In the conventional game machine, when hitting to the left, the game is played by adjusting the shooting force, but when hitting to the right, the operation part 24 is only rotated to the maximum. On the other hand, in the game board 30 of this modified example, it is necessary to adjust the firing force even when hitting to the right so that it does not flow into the first flow-down area 541. Interest can be improved. Further, when the player stops playing the game while the game ball is left on the upper tray 21 in the game shop, the clerk rotates the operation part 24 to the maximum to shoot the game ball and play the game to the first flow-down region 541.例文帳に追加By allowing the balls to flow in, it is possible to process the game balls without entering the winning opening.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 165, a part of the partition wall 531 is interrupted to provide a communicating portion 532 in which the first flow-down region 541 and the second flow-down region 542 communicate with each other, thereby changing the flow-down region of the game ball. It is good to make it possible. By doing so, it is possible to make the game more interesting.

By adjusting the distance between the end portions of the partition wall 531 divided by the communicating portion 532, it is possible to adjust the possibility of changing the area where the game ball flows down. For example, the width is slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball so that the area where the game ball flows rarely changes, or the space is sufficiently wide so that the area where the game ball flows frequently changes. can do. Further, by providing the guiding portion 533 for guiding the game ball toward the communication portion 532, the possibility of changing the area where the game ball flows down can be increased. In the example of FIG. 165, the control wall 613 of the center case 40 forms a guide portion 533 that guides the game ball flowing down the second flow-down region 542 to the communication portion 532, and the first flow-down from the second flow-down region 542 is formed. The possibility of the game ball moving to the area 541 is increased. Also, an obstacle such as a windmill may be provided in the communicating portion 532 .

In addition, the partition walls 531 separated by the communicating portions 532 are all formed on the front surface of one base member 534 . The base member 534 is arranged along the front surface of the game board main body 80 and fixed to the game board main body 80 by screws. can be performed, and the efficiency of the manufacturing work of the game board 30 can be improved.

FIG. 166 shows another example of the game board 30 in which the partition wall 531 is provided. As shown in FIG. 166, it is also possible to have the possibility of winning a prize in the winning opening in the first flow-down area 541 and the second flow-down area 542 as well. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the game ball rolling in a variety of manners in the right-handed game state, and to improve the amusement of the game. The game board 30 includes a first special variable winning device 38 and a second special variable winning device 39 as special variable winning devices, which can be opened alternately. In addition, instead of the winning device 90, only the first starting winning port 36 is provided. The game method and the like are the same as those of the game board 30 of the first embodiment, and left-handed or right-handed players are selected according to the game situation.

When the size of the center case 40 is reduced like this game board 30, a wide space is formed between the outer peripheral wall 31 and the regulation wall 613. - 特許庁In this case, it is common to place obstacles such as game nails and windmills in this space. variation occurs. As a result, it becomes difficult for the game ball to stably reach the game area on the right side, and the stable winning of the special variable winning device 38 and the normal variable winning device 37 is hindered, and the profit of the player decreases. There is a risk.

Therefore, by dividing this space into a first flow-down area 541 and a second flow-down area 542 by a partition wall 531, the first flow-down area 541 is stably free of obstacles and the game ball reaches the game area on the right side. The second flow-down area 542 can be an area for enjoying changes in the rolling mode of the game ball due to the obstacle member. As a result, it is possible to appropriately secure the player's profit while increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 166, by providing the first flow-down area 541 without an obstruction member on the upper side, when the operation part 24 is turned to the maximum and the game ball is shot with the strongest shooting force, the first flow-down area It will flow into 541. By setting the width of the first flow-down region 541 so that the game balls flow down in a line, it is possible to always receive the game balls heading leftward by the buffer portion 545 provided on the outer peripheral wall 31 . As a result, it is possible to prevent a game ball with a strong projectile force from colliding with a portion other than the buffer portion 545, thereby preventing damage to the game board 30. - 特許庁

In addition, when the special variable winning device 38 like the gaming machine of the first embodiment is provided, in order for the game ball to enter the special variable winning device 38 even if the opening is short, the game ball must always be above the opening/closing member 990. should stay. In order to do this, it is necessary to stably reach the special variable winning device 38 at a fixed timing, but it is possible by providing the partition wall 531 as described above, and the player's profit can be appropriately distributed. can be secured to

Also, as shown in FIG. 167, a communicating portion 532 may be provided in a range where the game ball moves rightward. By doing so, a game ball that reaches the starting end of the first flow-down region 541 but has a weak projectile force falls from the communicating portion 532 to the second flow-down region 542 . As a result, the launch force that allows the first flow-down area 541 to flow down to the end is limited to a narrower range, and the timing of the game ball reaching the special variable winning device 38 can be made more stable. can. In this case, the game balls flowing down the second flow-down area 542 have a lower winning rate to the special variable winning device 38 than the game balls flowing down the first flow-down area 541. It is preferable to make it disadvantageous.

Furthermore, at a position below the communicating portion 532 in the second flow-down region 542, a prize-winning opening through which game balls falling from above can win or a gate through which the game ball can pass may be provided. By doing so, only when the game ball is shot with a momentum that reaches the beginning of the first flow-down region 541 and falls at a predetermined position of the communicating portion 532, it flows into the winning opening or gate. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

164 to 167, the plate-shaped partition wall 531 is arranged between the outer peripheral wall 31 and the regulation wall 613 to form the first flow-down region 541 and the second flow-down region 542. The first flow-down region 541 and the second flow-down region 542 may be formed by a U-shaped channel forming member. In this case, the groove-shaped flow path forming member may be arranged so as to open to the front side so as to constitute the side wall and the back wall of the flow-down region, or the groove-shaped flow path forming member may be arranged to the rear side. It may be arranged so as to open so as to constitute the side wall and the front wall of the flow-down area. Alternatively, the first flow-down region 541 and the second flow-down region 542 may be formed by a cylindrical flow path forming member.

By doing so, it is possible to form the first flow-down region 541 and the second flow-down region 542 with a single flow path forming member without using the regulation wall 613 and the outer peripheral wall 31 of the center case 40 . As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency of game balls colliding with the regulating wall 613 of the center case 40, etc., and reduce the number of discarded members when the constituent members of the game board are reused. Moreover, when the flow path forming member is damaged, only the flow path forming member needs to be replaced, and the repair cost can be reduced.

In addition, character information such as description of the game content, information instructing not to stare at the same light from a short distance for a long time, information to the effect that a fraud prevention sensor is installed, etc. Alternatively, a flow path forming member on which necessary character information is written may be used. By doing so, it is possible to change the character information more easily than printing it on the surface of the game board.

In addition, a plurality of partition walls 531 are provided between the outer peripheral wall 31 and the regulation wall 613 to provide three or more parallel flow-down areas so that the player can select the flow-down area by adjusting the firing force. can be In this case, a sensor may be provided to detect the game ball flowing down in each flow-down area, and different effects may be given to the player according to the flow-down area where the game ball flows down.

Moreover, although the starting end of the partition wall 531 is provided above the center case 40 where the game ball faces rightward, it may be provided on the right side of the center case 40 where the game ball faces downward. . Moreover, although the partition wall 531 is provided above and to the right of the center case 40, it may be provided at a location other than this.

In addition, as the game machine provided with the partition wall 531, the game machine that executes the variable display game based on the winning in the starting area as described above was mentioned, but it is also possible to provide it to other game machines. . For example, it is possible to win a prize in the auxiliary game device based on the prize in the starting area, and the game ball that has won the auxiliary game device flows into a specific area. (former type 2 type) gaming machines may also be used. In this case, the probability of winning a prize in the auxiliary game device and the probability of winning a prize in a specific region in the auxiliary game device may differ according to the flowing area where the game ball flows.

From the above, the game board 30 having the game area 32 in which the game ball can flow down is provided, and the start area provided in the game area 32 (the first start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the second starting winning opening 97), and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the game results in a special result. 32, a guide wall 491 that forms a guide path 490 that is provided along the outer peripheral wall 31 and guides the launched game ball to a predetermined position in the game area 32, and the game area 32. A center case 40 provided substantially in the center is provided, a plate-like partition wall 531 is provided between the center case 40 and the outer peripheral wall 31, and game balls can flow down on both sides of the partition wall 531. Regions (first flow region 541, second flow region 542) are formed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the manner in which the game balls flow down and improve the interest.

In addition, the guide path 490 is provided on one left and right side of the game area 32, and the partition wall 531 is provided on the other left and right side of the game area 32. However, it is possible to select which of the flow-down regions formed on both sides the game ball should flow into. Therefore, it is possible for the player to select the flowing area to be flowed down, so that the interest can be improved.

In addition, the partition wall 531 has an upstream end portion located above the center case 40 in the rolling direction of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to select a flow-down region above the center case 40 that is easily visible to the player.

[Seventh Modification]
Next, a seventh modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. I will explain the part. The gaming machine of this modified example includes a reflecting surface 550 .

As shown in FIG. 168, the gaming machine of this modification includes a reflective surface 550 above the center case 40 in the game area 32, and part of a character string 551 for presenting information to the player is displayed on the reflective surface 550. are labeled as overlapping. As the character string 551 for presenting information to the player, a display prompting the player not to stare at the same light from a short distance for a long time, a warning character such as information to the effect that an anti-fraud sensor is installed, and game contents. and explanation of operation method.

Since the character string 551 is written so as to overlap the reflective surface 550, the player's attention is attracted to the reflective surface 550 that gives a different impression from the surroundings, and the player looks at the reflective surface 550. The character string 551 is naturally seen, and information can be effectively transmitted to the player. In particular, since several characters at the beginning of the character string 551 overlap the reflective surface 550, it is easy to start reading, and information can be effectively transmitted to the player. Of course, only characters other than the first character of the character string 551 may overlap the reflecting surface 550 . The entire character string 551 may overlap the reflecting surface 550 .

In addition, the position where the reflecting surface 550 is provided and the position where the character string 551 is written are positions through which the game ball passes, and the reflecting surface 550 and the character string 551 are naturally visible in the process of chasing the game ball. Therefore, information can be effectively transmitted to the player. Here, the character string 551 is arranged in the portion where the game ball moves to the right, and the direction in which the character string 511 is read matches the movement direction of the game ball. This also makes it possible to read the character string 551 naturally. Of course, the moving direction of the game ball and the reading direction of the character string 551 may be different.

The reflective surface 550 is formed in a cell attached to the front surface of the game board main body 80, and a character string 551 is also printed on the cell. For example, it can be formed by processing the cell to give it a metallic luster. Furthermore, sheet-like lenses may be stacked. Also, a reflecting member such as a mirror may be arranged on the front surface of the game board main body 80, and the front surface may be covered with a transparent cell.

As for the area reflected by the reflective surface 550, it is preferable that the whole face of the player 552 can be reflected while the player is playing a game while sitting in front of the gaming machine 10, as shown in FIG. 169(a). The reflection of the player's own face attracts the player's interest, and the opportunity to see the reflective surface 550 can be increased to increase the opportunity to see the character string 551 . Also, the upper body of the player 552 may be displayed. Also, if the left and right rear regions of the player can be displayed, it is possible to confirm that a clerk has come, for example, when exchanging ball boxes.

Further, as shown in FIG. 169(b), the reflective surface 550 may be configured to reflect the left and right rear areas of the player. In this case, it is preferable that the state of the lamp on the front frame provided in the game machine 553 of the island facility located behind the player can be visually recognized. By doing so, the state of the gaming machine 553 positioned behind the player can be confirmed without turning around. In addition, by reflecting the light from the gaming machine 553 behind the reflective surface 550, the reflective surface 550 is indirectly decorated and the character string 551 can be more focused. Further, if the reflecting surface 550 has a function as a convex mirror, a wide area can be reflected with a small reflecting surface. Of course, it may be used as a concave mirror.

Further, it is preferable that light from the light emitting member of the game machine 10 and light from the lighting of the game arcade are not directly reflected by the reflecting surface 550 toward the player. As for the light from the light emitting member of the gaming machine 10, the arrangement of the light emitting member and the direction of light emission are adjusted so that the light is reflected by the reflecting surface 550 and is not emitted to the front of the gaming machine 10. - 特許庁In addition, for light from the outside of the gaming machine 10 such as the lighting of amusement arcades, the light can enter the reflecting surface 550 by directing the reflecting surface 550 slightly downward or projecting the front periphery of the front frame 12 forward. can be addressed by preventing

Also, the position where the reflective surface 550 is provided is not limited to the illustrated position. For example, the reflective surface 550 may be provided near the guide wall 491 and the character string 551 may be arranged along the guide wall 491 . For example, the reflecting surface 550 may be provided near the outer peripheral wall 31 and the character string 551 may be arranged along the outer peripheral wall 31 . Alternatively, the reflecting surface 550 may be provided on the guide portion 490 and the character string 551 may be arranged along the outer peripheral wall 31 and the guide wall 491 . Also, a reflective surface 550 may be provided on the character that moves, and character information may be superimposed on this reflective surface 550 . In this case, the character string 551 may be a character string related to game effects (such as "Gekiatsu").

Also, the reflecting surface 550 may be a half mirror. In this case, a space is provided on the back side of the reflecting surface 550, and the structure is such that this space can be illuminated by the light emitting member. In this way, when the light-emitting member is turned off to darken the space, the player can see the reflecting surface 550 as a mirror. It will be in a state where you can see the space through.

Also, the reflective surface 550 and the character string 551 may be provided outside the game area 32 of the game board 30 or may be provided on the front frame 12 . In addition, as the game machine provided with the reflective surface 550 and the character string 551, the game machine that executes the variable display game based on the winning in the start area as described above has been mentioned, but it can be provided for other game machines as well. is possible. For example, it is possible to win a prize in the auxiliary game device based on the prize in the starting area, and the game ball that has won the auxiliary game device flows into a specific area. (former type 2 type) gaming machines may also be used. Also, the reflective surface 550 and the character string 551 may be arranged in a portion of the slot machine that is visible to the player.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10 that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, the player can visually recognize the A reflective surface 550 that reflects light is provided on the front surface, and a part of a character string 551 that presents information to the player is written so as to overlap the reflective surface 550 . Therefore, by attracting the player's attention with the reflective surface 550, the player can be made aware of the existence of the character string 551, and information can be effectively provided to the player.

Moreover, the reflecting surface 550 has a function as a convex mirror. Therefore, the player's attention can be more attracted to the reflecting surface 550, and information can be effectively provided to the player. Also, it is possible to project a wide range.

Moreover, the reflecting surface 550 can reflect at least the entire face of the player who is playing the game. Therefore, the player's attention can be more attracted to the reflecting surface 550, and information can be effectively provided to the player.

In addition, the reflecting surface 550 can reflect the left and right rear areas of the player. Therefore, the player's attention can be more attracted to the reflecting surface 550, and information can be effectively provided to the player. Also, it is possible to check the state behind the player.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with the game area 32 in which the game ball can flow down, and the game area 32 is provided with the reflecting surface 550, and the game ball can flow down in front of the reflecting surface 550. . Therefore, the player's attention can be more attracted to the reflecting surface 550, and information can be effectively provided to the player.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be explained.
In the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the change participation effect (specifically, the unconsumed pending display (decorative special figure start memory display) M1 and the digested pending display M2 displayed on the display device 41 are changed to characters. The game machine 10 of the first embodiment is different from the game machine 10 in that the character participates in the effect of the special figure variation display game being executed). Therefore, hereinafter, portions having the same configurations as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, descriptions thereof are omitted, and mainly different portions are described.
Here, the unspent pending display M1 is a display corresponding to the special figure start memory stored in the game control device 100, that is, the special figure variation executed after the variation (the special figure variation display game being executed). It is a display corresponding to the special-figure starting memory that serves as a trigger for executing the display game. In addition, the in-digestion pending display M2 is a display corresponding to the special figure start memory that triggered the execution of the variation.
In the present embodiment, the change-participation effect is performed during the ready-to-win effect, but it is also possible to configure the change-participation effect to be performed during the effect other than the ready-to-win effect. The change participation effect of the present embodiment includes a launch promotion effect and a ready-to-reach participation effect.

FIG. 170 shows an example of a ready-to-win effect, which is characterized by the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, that is, an example of a ready-to-win effect involving a change participation effect.
When a reach occurs as shown in FIG. 170(a), the change involvement production is started, and first, as shown in FIG. is started. At the start of the launch promotion effect, the digestion pending display M2 changes to the face of a tiger that is a helper character. In addition, when the undigested pending display M1 generated before the start of the launch promotion effect is displayed on the display device 41, the undigested pending display M1 also changes to the face of a tiger that is a helper character. That is, at the start of the launch promoting effect, the display mode of the in-digestion pending display M2 and the display mode of the undigested pending display M1 generated before the start of the firing promoting effect are changed from the normal display mode (for example, circle). It changes to a specific display mode (for example, a tiger's face).
Then, when the new special figure start memory is stored, as shown in FIG. displayed at a preset fixed position.

Next, when the firing promotion effect ends, the ready-to-win effect in which the reserved displays M1 and M2 (helping characters) in the specific display mode participate in the ready-to-win effect is started, and as shown in FIG. The display device 41 displays the images of the main character and the enemy characters, which are the effect images of . At the end of the launch promoting effect, the facial expression of the ingestion pending display M2 (helping character) changes, and if the undigested pending display M1 generated before the start of the launch promoting effect is displayed on the display device 41. , the facial expression of the undigested reservation display M1 (helper character) also changes. Further, the undigested pending display M1 generated during the launch promotion presentation changes to the face of a tiger that is a helper character. That is, when a new special figure start memory is stored during the launch promotion effect, at the end of the launch promotion effect, the display mode of the digesting pending display M2 and the unexplained that occurred before the start of the launch promotion effect The display mode of the digestion suspension display M1 changes from one specific display mode (for example, tiger A's face) to another specific display mode (for example, tiger B's face), and an unexplained event that occurs during the launch promotion presentation The display mode of the digestion suspension display M1 changes from the normal display mode (for example, circle) to the specific display mode (for example, tiger's face).

Next, the holding displays M1 and M2 (helping characters) in the specific display mode participate in the ready-to-win effect. In this example, after the help character answers the call from the main character as shown in FIG. 170(e), it moves away from its home position and attacks the enemy character together with the main character as shown in FIG. 170(f). I'm doing a performance called. In this embodiment, even if the undigested pending display M1 (helping character) in the specific display mode moves away from the fixed position, the current pending number (the number of special figure start memories) can be grasped, FIG. 170 (f ), while the undigested pending display M1 (helping character) in the specific display mode is away from the fixed position, the undigested pending display M1 in the normal display mode is displayed at the fixed position. ing.
Next, as shown in FIG. 170(g), the ready-to-win participation performance ends and the change participation performance ends, and when the variation is a hit variation, as shown in FIG. A fanfare performance is performed. Each character (main character, enemy character, helper character) disappears with a fanfare effect. On the other hand, if the change is a loss change, each character (main character, enemy character, and helper character) disappears when the change stops (symbol stop).

The timing at which each character (main character, enemy character, and helper character) disappears can be changed as appropriate. good.
In addition, all the help characters do not have to participate in the ready-to-win production. For example, the greater the number of help characters participating in the ready-to-reach production (that is, the more helping characters move away from the fixed position), the higher the level of expectation. It is also possible to configure to notify.
It is also possible to configure the player to select whether or not the helper character participates in the ready-to-win effect, for example, the helper character participates in the ready-to-win effect when a button is operated.

Further, in the present embodiment, while the undigested pending display M1 (helping character) in the specific display mode is away from the fixed position, the undigested pending display M1 in the normal display mode is displayed at the fixed position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a display as shown in FIG. 171, for example, may be performed as long as the current pending number can be grasped.
Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 171(a), while the undigested reservation display M1 (helper character) in the specific display mode is away from the fixed position, the undigested display in the normal display mode is placed at the fixed position. A silhouette of the pending display M1 is displayed.
In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 171(b), while the reserved displays M1 and M2 (helping characters) in the specific display mode are away from the fixed position, the fixed positions M1 and M2 in the normal display mode are placed at the fixed positions. silhouette is displayed.
Note that the silhouettes of the reserved displays M1 and M2 in the normal display mode may be lighter in color than the reserved displays M1 and M2 in the normal display mode, and the outlines of the reserved displays M1 and M2 in the normal display mode may be used. can be It is also possible to display the silhouettes of the help characters (holding displays M1 and M2 in the specific display mode) instead of the silhouettes of the holding displays M1 and M2 in the normal display mode.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 171(c), while the specific display modes of the reserved displays M1 and M2 (helping characters) are away from the fixed positions, the number representing the number of the undigested reserved displays M1 and the digested reserved display A number representing the number of M2 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display area of the display device 41 .
In addition, the number representing the number of undigested pending indications M1 and the number representing the number of ingested pending indications M2 are always displayed regardless of whether the pending indications M1 and M2 are displayed at fixed positions. good. In the example shown in FIG. 171(d), the pending indications M1 and M2 are displayed at fixed positions, and the number representing the number of undigested pending indications M1 and the number representing the number of ingested pending indications M2 are displayed on the display device 41. is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area.
Note that the display positions of the number representing the number of undigested pending indications M1 and the number representing the number of ingested pending indications M2 are not limited to the lower left corner or upper right corner of the display area of the display device 41, and can be changed as appropriate. be. Further, it is also possible to display only the number representing the number of undigested pending indications M1 without displaying the number representing the number of ingested pending indications M2.

Here, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment changes the color, etc., of the unspent pending display M1 in the normal display mode, and provides the player with result-related information (jackpot) before the start timing of the corresponding special figure variation display game. (whether or not, the type of fluctuation pattern, etc.) can be notified. When the result-related information has been reported by the pending displays M1 and M2 before the start of the change participation effect, it is preferable to continue to report even if the pending displays M1 and M2 change to characters or silhouettes. . A specific example thereof is shown in FIG.
The undigested pending display M1 in FIG. 172 (a) corresponds to the special figure start memory stored before the start of the variation, and its color is a normal color (white in this example) They come in different special colors. That is, the undigested pending display M1 in FIG. 172(a) is displayed in a special normal display mode different from the normal normal display mode, thereby notifying result-related information.

Reach occurs and the change-involvement effect is started, and as shown in FIG. The display mode of the undigested pending display M1 changes from the normal display mode to the specific display mode. Specifically, the in-digestion pending display M2 and the undigested pending display M1 generated before the start of the launch promotion presentation change to the help character. At that time, if the display modes of the pending displays M1 and M2 before changing to the help characters are normal display modes, they are changed to normal help characters, and if they are special normal display modes, turns into a special help character. In this example, the in-digestion pending display M2 is a normal display mode, so it changes to a tiger's face that is a normal helping character, and the undigested pending display M1 is a special normal display mode. It has changed to a pig's face, which is a special help character. In this way, when changing the pending displays M1 and M2 to characters, by changing the state (display mode) of the pending displays M1 and M2 before the start of the change participation effect to a recognizable character, the pending displays M1 and M2 , the information notified before changing into the character can be continued to be notified after changing into the character.
Then, when a new special figure start memory is stored, as shown in FIG. displayed at a preset fixed position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 172(d), when the launch promotion effect ends, the display mode of the in-digestion pending display M2 and the display mode of the undigested pending display M1 that occurred before the start of the launch promotion effect are the same. is changed from the specific display mode to another specific display mode, and the display mode of the undigested pending display M1 generated during the launch promotion effect changes from the normal display mode to the specific display mode.
Note that the pig's face is also the undigested pending display M1 generated before the start of the launch promotion presentation, but in this example, the pig's face is not changed. That is, in the present embodiment, the holding displays M1 and M2, which were displayed in a special normal display mode before the start of the change participation effect, change in display mode (change into characters) at the start of the launch promotion effect. The display mode does not change at the end of the launch promotion effect. The display mode may also be changed at the end of the launch promotion presentation by changing the expression of the pig's face or by changing the pig's face to that of a tiger or an animal other than the pig.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 172(e) and 172(f), holding displays M1 and M2 (helping characters) in specific display modes participate in the ready-to-win effect. While the reserved displays M1 and M2 (helping characters) in the specific display mode are away from the fixed positions, for example, the reserved displays M1 and M2 in the normal display mode and their silhouettes are displayed at the fixed positions. When the silhouettes are displayed, the display modes of the silhouettes are differentiated between the suspension displays M1 and M2 displayed in a special normal display mode before the start of the change participation performance and the other suspension displays M1 and M2. .
In this example, the undigested pending display M1 is displayed as a silhouette. The undigested pending display M1 corresponding to the special figure start memory with the first (first) digestion order is special (that is, the undigested pending display that was displayed in a special normal display mode before the start of the change participation effect M1), a special silhouette (for example, a blinking silhouette) is displayed at the corresponding fixed position, and the undigested pending display M1 corresponding to the special figure start memory whose digestion order is the second is normal (i.e. , is an undigested pending display M1 other than the undigested pending display M1 that was displayed in a special normal display mode before the start of the change participation effect), a normal silhouette (for example, a non-blinking silhouette) is displayed at the corresponding fixed position. ) is displayed. In this way, when the suspension displays M1 and M2 are changed to silhouettes, by changing the state (display mode) of the suspension displays M1 and M2 before the start of the change participation effect to distinguishable silhouettes, the suspension displays M1 and M2 , the information that has been reported before the character leaves the fixed position can be continuously reported while the character is away from the fixed position.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a new special figure start memory is stored during the reach participation effect, the undigested pending display M1 corresponding to the special figure start memory is displayed as a help character (in a specific display mode It is configured to be displayed as an undigested pending display M1). In other words, the unspent pending display M1 that occurs within a predetermined period (fire promotion presentation period) and the unspent pending display M1 that occurs outside the predetermined period are both configured to be able to overlap and change. A specific example thereof is shown in FIG.

When reach occurs as shown in FIG. 173(a), the change involvement effect is started, and first, the launch promotion effect is started as shown in FIG. 173(b). At the start of the firing promoting presentation, the display mode of the digested pending display M2 and the display mode of the undigested pending display M1 occurring before the start of the firing promoting presentation are changed from the normal display mode to the specific display mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 173(c), when the launch promotion effect ends, the ready-to-win effect starts. In this example, since a new special figure start memory is not stored during the launch promoting effect, the display mode of the in-digestion pending display M2 and the display mode of the undigested pending display M1 generated before the start of the launch promoting effect means that there is no change from one specific display mode to another specific display mode.

Then, when a new special figure start memory is stored, as shown in FIG. 173 (d), a help character (unspent reservation in a specific display mode) is displayed as an undigested suspension display M1 corresponding to the new special figure start memory. The display M1) is displayed at a preset fixed position in the display area of the display device 41 .
The undigested pending display M1 (helper character) generated after the end of the launch promotion effect does not participate in the ready-to-win effect, as shown in FIGS. 173(e), (f) and (g). In addition, the display mode of the undigested pending display M1 generated after the end of the launch promotion effect is a specific display mode, triggered by the fanfare effect, as shown in FIG. to the normal display mode. On the other hand, if the variation is a loss variation, the display mode of the undigested pending display M1 generated after the end of the launch promotion effect is changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode when the variation stops (symbol stop). change to

It should be noted that the timing at which the display mode of the undigested pending display M1 generated after the end of the firing promotion effect changes from the specific display mode to the normal display mode can be changed as appropriate. Regardless of whether or not, it may change with the symbol stop as an opportunity. Further, the display mode of the undigested pending display M1 that occurs after the end of the launch promotion effect does not have to change from the specific display mode to the normal display mode.
In addition, the undigested pending display M1 that occurs after the end of the launch promotion effect is not displayed in the specific display mode during the ready-to-win effect, but is displayed in the normal display mode at first, for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed. You may change to a specific display mode.

In addition, the undigested pending display M1 generated during the ready-to-win effect may participate in the ready-to-win effect. A specific example thereof is shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 174(a), when the launch promotion effect ends, the ready-to-win effect starts. Then, when a new special figure start memory is stored, as shown in FIG. 174(b), a help character (unspent reservation in a specific display mode) is displayed as an undigested suspension display M1 corresponding to the new special figure start memory. The display M1) is displayed at a preset fixed position in the display area of the display device 41 .
The undigested pending display M1 (helping character) generated after the end of the launch promoting effect does not initially participate in the ready-to-win effect as shown in FIGS. 174(c) and 174(d). 174(e), when the main character loses, he/she participates in the ready-to-win effect as shown in FIG. I do.
When the undigested pending display M1 (helping character) wins over the enemy character, the ready-to-win participation effect is completed as shown in FIG. A fanfare production is performed according to the type.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, not only the undigested pending display M1 generated before the start of the launch promoting effect or during the execution of the firing promoting effect, but also the undigested pending display M1 generated after the end of the launch promoting effect. is also displayed in a specific display mode, but only the undigested pending display M1 that occurred before the start of the launch promotion presentation or during the execution of the launch promotion presentation is displayed in the specific display mode, and is displayed after the completion of the launch promotion presentation. It is also possible to configure such that the undigested pending display M1 is displayed in the normal display mode and not displayed in the specific display mode.

In the present embodiment, the normal display mode is a symbol, and the specific display mode is a part of a character (or the whole character). , and the specific display mode may be the entire character. A specific example thereof is shown in FIG.
When a new special figure start memory is stored, a part of the help character, which is a normal display mode, is displayed at a preset fixed position as an undigested reservation display M1 corresponding to the new special figure start memory, When the special figure variation display game based on the new special figure start memory is started, the display positions of the pending indications M1 and M2 are shifted and the undigested pending indication M1 becomes the ingested pending indication M2. When reach occurs as shown in FIG. 175(a) during the execution of the special figure variation display game, the change involvement effect is started, and first, as shown in FIG. 175(b), the launch promotion effect is started. be. Then, when a new special figure starting memory is stored during the execution of the launch promotion effect, as shown in FIG. is displayed at a predetermined fixed position.

Next, when the launch promotion effect ends, the ready-to-win effect is started, and as shown in FIG. 175(d), the effect image for the change participation effect is displayed and the facial expression of the helper character changes. After that, all the helper characters in the special display mode are displayed, and the helper characters participate in the ready-to-win effect as shown in FIGS. 175(e) and (f).
Next, as shown in FIG. 175(g), the ready-to-win participation performance ends and the change participation performance ends, and when the variation is a hit variation, as shown in FIG. A fanfare performance is performed.
As shown in FIGS. 175(f) and 175(g), while the helper character is away from the fixed position, the fixed positions of the symbol holding displays M1 and M2 (or the silhouettes of the holding symbol displays M1 and M2) are placed at the fixed position. etc.) is displayed.
In addition, the normal display mode is a symbol, and the specific display mode is a helper character. All of the help characters may be displayed.

[Single-shot command processing]
In order to perform such control, the effect control device 300 performs single-shot command processing shown in FIG. 176 in place of the single-shot command processing shown in FIG.
In this single-shot system command processing, if the MODE is special figure 1 pending (step C269; Y), special figure 1 pending information setting process is performed (step C270), and then specific production (change participation production) It is determined whether there is (step D11).
If it is determined that the specific effect (variation involvement effect) is not being performed (step D11; N), the single-shot command processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the specific effect (variation involvement effect) is in progress (step D11; Y), it is determined whether or not the firing promotion effect has ended (step D12).
When it is determined that the firing promotion effect has not ended (step D12; N), the single-shot command processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the firing promotion effect has ended (step D12; Y), the suspension display mode (display mode of suspension displays M1 and M2) set in step D270 is changed to a predetermined display mode. (Step D13), the one-shot command processing is terminated.

In addition, when MODE is special figure 2 reservation (step C271; Y), special figure 2 reservation information setting process is performed (step C272), and then it is determined whether it is during specific production (variation participation production) (Step D14).
If it is determined that the specific effect (variation involvement effect) is not being performed (step D14; N), the single-shot command processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific effect (variation involvement effect) is in progress (step D14; Y), it is determined whether or not the firing promotion effect has ended (step D15).
When it is determined that the firing promotion effect has not ended (step D15; N), the single-shot command processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the firing promotion effect has ended (step D15; Y), the suspension display mode (display mode of suspension displays M1 and M2) set in step D272 is changed to a predetermined display mode. (Step D16), the one-shot command processing is terminated.

The "predetermined display mode" in steps D13 and D16 is one of a plurality of specific display modes. Then, the undigested pending display M1 that occurred at 10:00 a.m. is suddenly displayed with a help character (undigested pending display M1 in a specific display mode).
The "predetermined display mode" in steps D13 and D16 may be determined in advance, or may be selected from a plurality of specific display modes according to a predetermined selection rate.

[Variation effect setting process]
Also, instead of the variable effect setting process shown in FIG. 128, the variable effect setting process shown in FIG. 177 is performed.
In this variable performance setting process, the content of the performance corresponding to the preliminary lottery result is determined (step C391), the content of the variable performance corresponding to MODE and ACT is determined (step C390), and then the performance content determination processing is performed. (step D21), stop symbol setting processing is performed (step C392).

[Production content determination process]
FIG. 178 shows the effect content determination process (step D21) in the variable effect setting process described above.
In this effect content determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the content of the variable effect determined in step C390 is the specific effect (change-related effect) (step D31), and the content of the variable effect is not the specific effect (change-related effect). If so (step D31; N), the effect content determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the content of the variable effect is the specific effect (variation-related effect) (step D31; Y), it is determined whether or not the launch promotion effect has been started (step D32).
When it is determined that the launch promotion effect has already started (step D32; Y), the process proceeds to step D43. On the other hand, when it is determined that the launch promotion effect has not started (step D32; N), the current pending number (the number of special figure start memories stored) and pending information are loaded (step D33), and the pending display table is displayed. is referred to (step D34).

180(a) and 180(b), the type of effect, the enemy character, etc. are selected based on the MODE and ACT, and the selection rate is held according to the MODE and ACT. Either display table 1 or special table 1 is selected. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 180(a), when MODE is "5CH" and ACT is "01H", "VS Reach A" is selected as the effect type, and No. 1 is selected as the enemy character. 1 enemy character, that is, the enemy character with the lowest degree of expectation (see FIG. 180(c)) is selected, the reserved display table is selected with a probability of 200/250, and the special table is selected with a probability of 50/250. .

In step D34, if it is determined to refer to the pending display table (step D34; Y), that is, if the pending display table is selected, the pending display table 1 is displayed based on the pending number and pending information loaded in step D33. Reference is made (step D35), the pending display mode (display mode of the pending displays M1 and M2) is set based on the pending display table 1 (step D36), and the process proceeds to step D40.

181(a) to 181(d), as shown in FIGS. 181(a) to 181(d), in the change participation effect of the present embodiment, the suspension display table 1: A, the suspension display table 1:B, and the suspension display table 1:C and hold display table 1:D are prepared. Then, as shown in FIGS. 180(a) and 180(b), which of these four types of tables is to be referred to is selected based on MODE and ACT. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 180(a), when MODE is "5CH" and ACT is "01H", hold display table 1:A is selected.
Further, as shown in FIG. 181 (a), as a pending display table 1: A, a table corresponding to a pending number of 0, a table corresponding to a pending number of 1 to 4, and a table corresponding to a pending number of 5 to 8 There are 3 types of tables available. Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 181(b), (c), and (d), there are three types of tables as pending display table 1:B, pending display table 1:C, and pending display table 1:D. prepared.

For example, if the MODE is "5CH", the ACT is "01H", and the number of holds is 3, then in step D35, the hold display table 1:A corresponding to the number of holds 1 to 4 is referred to. , in step D36, the pending display mode is set based on the pending display table 1:A. Specifically, for example, as shown in the middle table of the three tables in FIG. , with a probability of 125/250. 1 reserved display mode, that is, the specific display mode with the lowest degree of expectation (see FIG. 181(e)) is set, and No. 1 is selected with a probability of 75/250. 2 reserved display mode, that is, the specific display mode with the second lowest degree of expectation (see FIG. 181(e)) is set, and No. 2 is selected with a probability of 50/250. No. 3 reserved display mode, ie, the specific display mode with the third lowest degree of expectation (see FIG. 181(e)) is set, and No. 3 has a probability of 0/250. 4 reserved display mode, that is, the specific display mode with the fourth lowest degree of expectation (see FIG. 181(e)) is set.

In the present embodiment, when the display mode of the pending displays M1 and M2 before changing to the help character is the special normal display mode, the face changes to the special help character pig's face (FIG. 172). (b)), and as shown in FIG. 4 is also set, the face changes to that of a pig, which is a special helping character. However, as shown in FIGS. 181(a) to (e), only when the pending display table 1:D corresponding to the pending numbers 5 to 8 is referred to in step D35, No. 4 pending display modes can be set.

In step D34, if it is determined not to refer to the pending display table (step D34; N), that is, if a special table is selected, it is confirmed whether the variation is a hit variation or a loss variation based on MODE and ACT. (step D37). In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 180(a), when MODE is "5CH" and ACT is "01H", "02H", "03H", or "04H", it is an outlier variation. , as shown in FIG. 180(b), when MODE is "5CH" and ACT is "11H", "12H", "13H" or "14H", it is a winning variation.
Next, the special table 1 is referred to based on the confirmation result at step D37 (step D38), the pending display mode is set based on the special table 1 (step D39), and the process proceeds to step D40.

As shown in FIG. 184, n kinds of tables with table numbers 1 to n are prepared as the special table 1 in the change involvement effect of the present embodiment. Then, as shown in FIGS. 183(a) and 183(b), which of these n types of tables is to be referred to is selected at a predetermined allocation rate. Here, in Figure 184 and Figure 185, the reservation number "0" is the special figure start memory that triggered the execution of the variation, and the reservation number "1" is the special figure start memory that is the first digestion order. That is, the reservation number "8" is the special figure start memory whose digestion order is the eighth.

If the confirmation result in step D37 is an outlier variation, the allocation rate for table numbers 1 to 20 is 0%, and the allocation rate for table numbers 21 to n is constant. Therefore, in this case, in step D38, the special table 1 of the table numbers 1 to 20, which is the combination pattern of the pending display mode of winning determination, is not referred to, and the table numbers 21 to n, which are the combination pattern of the pending display mode of losing, are not referred to. any of the special tables 1 of .
On the other hand, if the result of confirmation in step D37 is hit variation, the distribution rate for table numbers 21 to n is 0%, and the distribution rate for table numbers 1 to 20 is 0%, as shown in FIG. 183(b). Each rate is different. Therefore, in this case, in step D38, the special table 1 of the table numbers 21 to n, which is the combination pattern of the pending display mode of winning, is not referred to, and the table numbers 1 to 20, which are the combination pattern of the pending display mode of winning determination, are not referred to. any of the special tables 1 of .
For example, when special table 1 with table number 21 is referred to in step D38, as shown in FIG. No. as a display mode. 2, that is, the specific display mode with the second lowest degree of expectation (see FIG. 181(e)) is set, and the other display modes of the pending displays M1 and M2 are No. 1 and No. 2. 1 reserved display mode, that is, the specific display mode with the lowest degree of expectation (see FIG. 181(e)) is set.

By the processing of steps D36 and D39, for example, as shown in FIG. The display mode of M1 changes from the normal display mode to the specific display mode.
When the hold display table 1 is referred to, the hold displays M1 and M2 displayed at the start of the launch promotion effect change to the same specific display mode, but when the special table 1 is referred to, the launch promotion is changed. The pending displays M1 and M2 displayed at the start of the production may change to the same specific display mode or may change to different specific display modes.
Further, when the hold display table 1 is referred to, as shown in FIGS. 181(a) to 181(d), no. 5 (see FIG. 181(e)) is not set.
Also, when the special table 1 is referred to, as shown in FIG. 5 (see FIG. 181(e)) is not set.

However, at the start of the launch promoting effect, the display mode of the in-digestion pending display M2 and the display mode of the undigested pending display M1 generated before the start of the launch promoting effect do not change from the normal display mode to the specific display mode. In some cases.
For example, in this embodiment, when the special table 1 with the table number n is referred to, as shown in FIG. As an aspect, No. A 0 pending display mode, that is, a normal display mode is set. Therefore, when the special table 1 with the table number n is referred to in step D38, the undigested pending display M1 corresponding to the special figure start memory with the eighth firing order is displayed normally at the start of the launch promotion effect. The mode remains unchanged and does not change to the specific display mode.

Also, in this embodiment, when the result of confirmation in step D37 is hit fluctuation, as shown in FIG. ing. This is because, as shown in FIG. 184, when special table 1 with table number 4 is referred to in step D38, all pending displays M1 and M2 are No. 4, that is, the specific display mode with the highest degree of expectation, and special table 1 with table number 5 is selected in step D38, the respective pending displays M1 and M2 have different degrees of expectation. This is because it changes to a specific display mode. This is because the combination pattern of the pending display mode is the most comprehensible when the current pending number is eight.

At step D40, the number of reservations loaded at step D33 is stored as the number of already reserved items (step D40). Next, in order to start the firing promotion presentation, the display setting of the firing promotion presentation is performed (step D41), the presentation timer based on the firing promotion presentation period is set (step D42), and the process proceeds to step D43.
At step D43, it is determined whether or not the performance timer set at step D42 has reached 0 (step D43). When it is determined that the effect timer has reached 0 (step D43; Y), the process proceeds to step D46. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect timer has not reached 0 (step D43; N), the effect timer is updated by -1 (step D44), and it is determined whether the effect timer has reached 0 (step D45). . If it is determined that the production timer has not reached 0 (step D45; N), the production content determination process is terminated, and if it is determined that the production timer has reached 0 (step D45; Y), step D46. to process. Since the effect timer becomes 0 at the end of the firing promotion effect, the process proceeds to step D46 at the end of the firing promotion effect.

In step D46, the current number of reservations is loaded, and the current number of reservations is compared with the number of reservations already saved in step D40 (step D46). Next, based on the comparison result in step D46, it is determined whether or not the number of reservations has increased (step D47).
If it is determined that the current number of reservations and the number of reservations already made are the same and the number of reservations has not increased (step D47; N), that is, when a new special figure start memory is not stored during the launch promotion production moves to the processing of step D57. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current number of reservations is greater than the number of reservations and the number of reservations has increased (step D47; Y), that is, when a new special figure start memory is stored during the launch promotion production determines whether the previously referenced table is a pending display table (step D48).
If it is determined that the previously referenced table is not a pending display table (step D48; N), that is, if the previously referenced table is a special table, whether the variation is a winning variation or a losing variation based on MODE and ACT. is confirmed (step D49).
Next, the special table 2 is referred to based on the confirmation result in step D49 (step D50), the pending display mode is set based on the special table 2 (step D51), and the process proceeds to step D57.

As shown in FIG. 185, n types of tables with table numbers 1 to n are prepared as the special table 2 in the change involvement effect of the present embodiment. Then, as shown in FIGS. 183(a) and 183(c), which of these n types of tables is to be referred to is selected at a predetermined distribution rate.
If the confirmation result in step D49 is an outlier variation, as shown in FIG. constant. Therefore, in this case, in step D50, the special table 2 of the table numbers 1 to 20, which is the combination pattern of the pending display mode of winning determination, is not referred to, and the table numbers 21 to n, which are the combination pattern of the pending display mode of losing, are not referred to. Any of the special tables 2 of .
On the other hand, if the result of confirmation in step D49 is hit variation, the distribution rate for table numbers 21 to n is 0%, and the distribution rate for table numbers 1 to 20 is 0%, as shown in FIG. 183(c). Each rate is different. Therefore, in this case, in step D50, the special table 2 of the table numbers 21 to n, which is the combination pattern of the pending display mode of winning, is not referred to, and the table numbers 1 to 20, which are the combination pattern of the pending display mode of winning determination, are not referred to. Any of the special tables 2 of .

If it is determined in step D48 that the table referred to last time is the pending display table (step D48; Y), it is determined whether or not the variation is a hit variation based on MODE and ACT (step D52).
When it is determined that the variation is a winning variation (step D52; Y), the pending display table 2 is referred to based on the current pending number and pending information (step D53), and pending based on the pending display table 2 The display mode is set (step D54), and the process proceeds to step D57. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation is not a winning variation (step D52; N), that is, if the variation is a losing variation, the suspension display table 3 is referred to based on the current number of suspensions and suspension information (step D55), sets the pending display mode based on the pending display table 3 (step D56), and proceeds to the processing of step D57.

182(a) to 182(d), as shown in FIGS. 182(a) to 182(d), the suspension display table 2: A, the suspension display table 2: B, and the suspension display table 2: C and hold display table 2:D are prepared.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 182 (a), as a pending display table 2: A, a table corresponding to a pending number of 0, a table corresponding to a pending number of 1 to 4, and a table corresponding to a pending number of 5 to 8 There are 3 types of tables available. Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 182(b), (c), and (d), there are three types of tables as pending display table 2:B, pending display table 2:C, and pending display table 2:D. prepared.
In addition, in the change participation effect of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. Three types of tables are prepared for 5 to 8 pieces.

By the processing of steps D51, D54, and D56, for example, as shown in FIG. The display mode of the pending display M2 and the display mode of the undigested pending display M1 generated before the start of the launch promoting effect are changed from one specific display mode to another specific display mode, and during the launch promoting effect. The display mode of the generated undigested pending display M1 changes from the normal display mode to the specific display mode.
When the holding display tables 2 and 3 are referred to, the holding displays M1 and M2 displayed at the end of the firing promotion presentation are in the same specific display mode, but when the special table 2 is referred to, the firing is performed. The pending displays M1 and M2 displayed at the end of the promotion effect may have the same specific display mode or may have different specific display modes.
Further, when the reservation display table 1 is referred to, No. 1, which is a specific display mode suggesting a win determination, is displayed. 5 pending display mode is not set, but when the pending display table 2 is referred to, as shown in FIGS. There is no. 5 pending indications may be set.
Further, when the special table 1 is referred to, No. 1, which is a specific display mode suggesting a hit determination, is displayed. Although the pending display mode of No. 5 is not set, when the special table 2 is referred to, as shown in FIG. 5 pending display modes may be selected.
In this way, it is possible to increase the effect of the launch promotion presentation by enabling the setting of the specific display mode suggesting that the win is confirmed only when the hold is accumulated during the launch promotion presentation.

However, at the end of the launch promotion presentation, the display mode of the undigested pending display M1 generated during the launch promotion presentation may not change from the normal display mode to the specific display mode.
For example, in the present embodiment, similar to the case where special table 1 with table number n is referred to, also when special table 2 with table number n is referred to, as shown in FIG. As a display mode of the undigested reservation display M1 corresponding to the special figure start memory of No. A 0 pending display mode, that is, a normal display mode is set.
Further, there is a case where the holding display mode set at the start of the launch promoting effect and the holding display mode set at the end of the firing promoting effect are the same. The mode and the display mode of the undigested pending display M1 generated before the start of the launch promoting effect do not change from one specific display mode to another specific display mode.

At step D57, the pending display mode after the re-change is set (step D57). Here, the "suspended display mode after re-change" is the display mode of the suspended displays M1 and M2 displayed at the fixed positions while the suspended displays M1 and M2 are away from the fixed positions. In the case of this embodiment, in step D57, the normal display mode or the silhouette of the normal display mode is set.
Next, the content of the presentation based on the reserved display mode is set (step D58). In the case of this embodiment, in step D58, the content of the ready-to-win effect (see FIGS. 170(d) to (g)) is set.
Next, the effect timer set in step D42 is reset (step D59), and the effect content determination process is terminated.

[Fanfare effect setting process]
Further, instead of the fanfare effect setting process shown in FIG. 131, fanfare effect setting process shown in FIG. 179 is performed.
In this fanfare effect setting process, when the ACT is a big hit fanfare (step C431; Y), the process of steps C432 to C434 is performed, then the process of step D61 is performed, and the fanfare effect setting process ends.
Also, if the ACT is a sudden fanfare (step C437; Y), and if it is not a hit from a continuous effect (step C438; N), the process of step C439 is performed, then the process of step D61 is performed, The fanfare effect setting process is ended.
Also, if the ACT is a sudden fanfare (step C437; Y) and if it is a hit from a continuous effect (step C438; Y), the processing of steps C440 to C441 is performed, and then the processing of step D61. to end the fanfare effect setting process.

If the ACT is a small win fanfare (step C442; Y) and the win is not from a continuous effect (step C443; N), the process of step C444 is performed, and then the process of step D61 is performed. , ends the fanfare effect setting process.
Also, if the ACT is a small win fanfare (step C442; Y), and if it is a hit from a continuous effect (step C443; Y), the processing of steps C445 to C446 is performed, and then step D61. Processing is performed, and the fanfare effect setting processing ends.
At step D61, the pending display mode (display mode of the pending displays M1 and M2) is set to the normal display mode (step D61). By the processing of step D61, for example, as shown in FIG. 173(h), the help character disappears with the fanfare effect as a trigger, and the normal display modes of the hold displays M1 and M2 are displayed at the fixed positions.

According to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, a variable display game is executed in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed based on the winning of game balls into the starting winning areas (starting winning ports 36, 97, normal variable winning device 37). and, in a gaming machine which generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, start memory means for storing the right to execute the variable display game up to a predetermined upper limit number as a start memory. (game control device 100); and a starting memory display control means (effect control device 300) for displaying on the display device 41 a starting memory display (undigested pending display M1) corresponding to the starting memory stored in the starting memory means. , an effect execution means (effect control device 300) for executing a predetermined effect (in the case of the present embodiment, a ready-to-win effect). 170(c) to (d), for example, the starting memory display control means changes the display mode of the starting memory display from the normal display mode (for example, a circle) to a specific display related to a predetermined effect. It can be configured to change to a display mode (for example, a helper character).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform a novel effect that the start memory display participates in a predetermined effect (in the case of this embodiment, participates in the ready-to-win effect), so that the interest in the game can be enhanced. .
In the present embodiment, the starting memory display in a specific display mode (for example, a helper character) is involved in the ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be involved in effects other than the ready-to-win effect. is also possible.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the starting memory display control means displays the starting memory display in the normal display mode at a predetermined position (preset position) in the display area of the display device 41. It is also possible to display the start-up memory display in a specific display mode in a portion other than a predetermined portion of the display area of the display device 41 . 171(a), (b), and (d), for example, when the starting memory display in the specific display mode is displayed in a place other than the predetermined It is possible to configure to display the starting memory display in a display mode (for example, a circle silhouette) different from the normal display mode and the specific display mode at the location.
With this configuration, even if the starting memory display in the specific display mode is not displayed at a predetermined location, it is possible to let the user know the number of starting memories.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the launch promotion effect executing means (performance controller 300).
By constructing in this way, the player plays a game to increase the number of starting memories during the launch promoting effect, so that the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to perform a novel effect of improving the operation rate of the gaming machine, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the starting memory display control means can change the display mode of the starting memory display at the start of the launch promotion effect, and during the execution of the launch promotion effect. When the number of starting memories increases, it is possible to change the display mode of the starting memory display again.
Specifically, in this embodiment, for example, as shown in steps D32 to D39 of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 178), the display mode of the undigested pending display M1 is changed from the normal display mode at the start of the firing promotion effect. When the specific display mode is changed and, for example, as shown in steps D47 to D56 of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 178), the number of starting memories increases during the launch promotion effect, the undigested pending display is displayed. The display mode of M1 is changed from one specific display mode to another specific display mode.
With this configuration, the player plays a game to increase the number of starting memories during the launch promotion effect in order to change the display mode of the starting memory display again. It becomes possible to increase the effect of

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the starting memory display control means again changes the display mode of the starting memory display, the result of the variable display game is a display mode with a higher degree of expectation that the result of the variable display game will be a special result. It can be configured to change to
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, in the suspension display table 1 and the special table 1 referred to when the launch promotion effect is started, the No. 5 pending display mode is not set, but in the pending display table 2 and the special table 2 referred to at the start of the ready-to-win effect, No. 5, which is a specific display mode suggesting winning determination, is displayed. 5 pending indications may be set. In other words, it is possible to set a specific display mode suggesting that the hit is confirmed only when the number of starting memories increases during the launch promotion presentation.
With such a configuration, the player plays a game to increase the number of starting memories during the launch promotion performance in order to change the display mode of the starting memory display to a display mode with a higher degree of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to increase the effect of the launch promotion presentation.

[First modification]
Next, a first modified example of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described second embodiment. I will explain the part. The game machine of this modification includes the sub-display device 42 in front of the first upper movable member 848 (see FIG. 2), and the reach effect is executed not only on the display device 41 but also on the sub-display device 42, and the display device The difference is that help characters (holding displays M1 and M2 in a specific display mode) are displayed not only on 41 but also on the sub display device 42 . Similar to the display device 41 , the sub-display device 42 displays an image generated by the effect control device 300 .

186 to 188 show an example of a ready-to-win effect, which is a characteristic feature of the gaming machine 10 of this modified example, that is, an example of a ready-to-win effect accompanied by a change participation effect. Here, FIGS. 187(b), 187(d), 187(f), 188(b), and 188(d) correspond to FIGS. 187(a), 187(c), and 187, respectively. 188(e), FIG. 188(a), and FIG. 188(c) are enlarged views of the first upper movable member 848. FIG.

When reach occurs as shown in FIG. 186(a), the change participation effect is started, and first, the launch promotion effect is started. At the start of the launch promotion effect, the digestion pending display M2 changes to the face of a tiger that is a helper character. Further, at the start of the firing promotion effect, the movable member unit 820 moves downward from the initial state at the upper end of the operating range to enter the operating state at the lower end of the operating range, and is displayed on the display device 41. Decoration special figure variation display game (that is, identification information displayed in the left variation display area of the display device 41 (left symbol), identification information displayed in the right variation display area of the display device 41 (right symbol) , the identification information (middle pattern) displayed in the middle variable display area of the display device 41 moves to the sub-display device 42 provided on the first upper movable member 848 of the movable member unit 820 .
Then, when a new special figure start memory is stored, as shown in FIG. displayed at a preset fixed position.

Next, when the launch promotion effect ends, the ready-to-win effect is started, and the images of the main character and the enemy character, which are effect images for the change participation effect, are displayed on the display device 41, and the ready-to-win effect is displayed on the sub-display device 42. is started. When a new special figure start memory is stored during the launch promotion production, at the end of the launch promotion production, the expression of the ingestion hold display M2 (help character) changes, and it occurs during the launch promotion production. The undigested reservation display M1 changes to the face of a tiger that is a helping character.
Next, the helper characters (holding displays M1 and M2 in the specific display mode) participate in the ready-to-win effect. In this example, after the helper character answers the call from the main character as shown in FIG. , displayed on the sub-display device 42 to challenge the destruction of the wall as shown in FIGS. Successfully opens the box on the other side of the wall, acquires the weapon (in this example, a sword) in the box, and hands over the weapon to the main character. As shown, it is directed to support the main character. In addition, in the change participation effect of this modification, the timing of starting the ready-to-win effect on the sub display device 42 is not limited to the start of the ready-to-win effect, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the timing of starting the ready-to-win effect on the display device 41 It may be at the same timing, that is, when reach occurs.
Next, as shown in FIGS. 188(c) and 188(d), the ready-to-win performance ends and the change involvement performance ends, and when the variation is a winning variation, a big hit as shown in FIG. 188(e). A fanfare production is performed according to the type.

In some cases, the helper character cannot acquire a weapon. In such cases, it is possible to perform an effect that the wall has been successfully destroyed but the box is empty, or that the wall has failed to be destroyed. you can go If the wall is successfully destroyed but the box is empty, there is a risk that the game will become less interesting.
A specific example of the effect of failing to destroy the wall is shown in FIGS. 189(a) to (c). FIG. 189(a) is displayed instead of, for example, FIG. 187(f), FIG. 189(b) is displayed, for example, instead of FIG. 188(b), and FIG. 189(c) is displayed, for example, FIG. ) is displayed instead.
In this example, as shown in FIG. 189(a), the helper character could not acquire the weapon because the wall could not be destroyed, and as shown in FIG. After apologizing, as shown in FIG. 189(c), the hero character defeated the enemy character without using a weapon, so the victory of the hero character is praised.

It is also possible to perform an effect in which the middle pattern destroys the wall together with the helper character. Specific examples thereof are shown in FIGS. 189(d) to (e). FIG. 189(d) is displayed instead of, for example, FIG. 187(d), and FIG. 189(e) is displayed, for example, instead of FIG. 187(f).
In this example, as shown in FIG. 189(d), the helper character and the middle pattern challenged to destroy the wall, and as shown in FIG. A presentation is performed in which a box is opened, a weapon in the box is obtained, and the weapon is handed over to the main character. In this case, since the upper part of the wall is also broken by the middle pattern, as shown in FIG. pattern, and medium pattern) can be displayed larger than before the wall is destroyed.

It is also possible to display pending displays M1 and M2 on the sub display device 42 . A specific example thereof is shown in FIG. Here, FIGS. 190(b), 190(d), 190(f), and 191(h) correspond to FIGS. 190(a), 190(c), 190(e), and FIG. 190(e), respectively. 190(g) is an enlarged view of the first upper movable member 848. FIG.
In this example, as shown in FIGS. 190 (a) and (b), the in-digestion pending display M2 corresponding to the special figure start memory that triggered the execution of the variation is displayed in the display area of the sub display device 42. It is displayed at a preset fixed position. In addition, when the special figure start memory that triggers the execution of the special figure variation display game that is executed after the change is generated, the unexpired reservation display M1 corresponding to the special figure start memory is displayed as a sub display. It is displayed at a preset fixed position in the display area of the device 42 .

As shown in FIGS. 190(c) and 190(d), when the ready-to-win is generated, the change involvement effect is started, and first, the launch promotion effect is started. At the start of the launch promotion presentation, the digestion pending display M2 changes to the face of a tiger that is a helper character.
Then, when a new special figure start memory is stored, as shown in FIGS. 190(e) and (f), the undigested pending display M1 in the normal display mode corresponding to the new special figure start memory is displayed as a sub display. It is displayed at a preset fixed position in the display area of the device 42 .
Next, when the launch promotion effect ends, the ready-to-win effect starts, and the images of the main character and the enemy character, which are the effect images for the change participation effect, are displayed on the display device 41 . When a new special figure start memory is stored during the launch promotion production, at the end of the launch promotion production, the expression of the ingestion hold display M2 (help character) changes, and it occurs during the launch promotion production. The undigested reservation display M1 changes to the face of a tiger that is a helping character.
Next, as shown in FIGS. 190(g) and (h), help characters (holding displays M1 and M2 in the specific display mode) participate in the ready-to-win effect.
Next, when the ready-to-win participation performance ends and the change-participation performance ends, and the variation is hit variation, a fanfare performance corresponding to the kind of big win is performed.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present modification allows the player to select a menu screen and enter a password while the customer waiting screen (customer waiting demo screen) is being displayed, for example, so that the effect content linked with the function of the server can be displayed. It is configured to be able to provide services such as changes, and in order to support it, we accept passwords at the start of the game and issue an identification code (two-dimensional code in the case of this modification) at the end of the game. Processing is configured to be performed by the effect control device 300 . Specific examples thereof are shown in FIGS. 191(a) to (f).
Selection of the menu screen and input of the password can be performed by the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 on the front surface of the gaming machine. For example, the touch panel 29 functions as a shift key, and the effect button 25 functions as an enter key. Further, instead of the input operation means consisting of the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29, a seesaw-type operation button or the like that can be tilted back and forth and left and right may be provided.

Next, a procedure for an action (login) to be performed when starting the gaming machine 10 and an action (logout) to be performed when ending the gaming machine 10 in order for the player to receive the interlocking service will be described.
When logging into the gaming machine 10, when the player operates the effect button 25 while the customer waiting screen is displayed on the display device 41, the interlocking service setting menu is displayed as shown in FIG. 191(a). It is displayed on the display device 41 . Here, when the touch panel 29 is operated to match the cursor (arrow) to "password input" and the effect button 25 is operated, a password input screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 191(b). Then, when a password is entered on the password entry screen, a password entry completion screen is displayed as shown in FIG. is stored in the input information storage area in the RAM. Then, a game using the game information is started.

The password can be obtained by accessing the web server using a mobile device. Specific examples thereof are shown in FIGS. 191(g) to (j). When the player accesses the web server based on the captured two-dimensional code using the camera function of the mobile terminal, a customization screen is displayed on the mobile terminal as shown in FIG. 191(g). When items (weapons in the case of this modified example) that appear during the transformation involvement effect are customized on the customization screen, a setting completion screen is displayed as shown in FIG. The password issuance confirmation screen is displayed. When "Yes" is selected on the password issuance confirmation screen, the password is displayed as shown in FIG. 191(h).
The password obtained in this manner is entered on the password entry screen displayed on the display device 41 .

On the other hand, when logging out from the gaming machine 10, when the player operates the effect button 25 while the customer waiting screen is displayed on the display device 41, the interlocking service is set as shown in FIG. 191(a). A menu is displayed on the display device 41 . Here, when the touch panel 29 is operated to move the cursor (arrow) to "issue two-dimensional code" and the effect button 25 is operated, a two-dimensional code issue confirmation screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 191(d). If "Yes" is selected on the two-dimensional code issuance confirmation screen, a two-dimensional code is displayed as shown in FIG. 191(e). After capturing the displayed two-dimensional code using the camera function of the portable terminal, when the effect button 25 is operated, a two-dimensional code display end confirmation screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 191(f). If "Yes" is selected on the two-dimensional code display end confirmation screen, a game end message is displayed and a customer waiting screen is displayed.

When the two-dimensional code is displayed, the two-dimensional code display end confirmation screen (see FIG. 191(f)) may be omitted, and the two-dimensional code display may end after a predetermined time. As a result, even if the player leaves the gaming machine 10 without performing an operation for confirming the end, the two-dimensional code will not remain displayed, so that other players can acquire the two-dimensional code. can be avoided.
The degree of expectation can be notified by the item (weapon in the case of this modification) that appears during the change participation effect. Since it is possible to customize the correspondence between the degree and the item, it becomes easier to grasp the degree of expectation. In addition, by structuring so that the items that appear during the change participation effect can be customized, it is possible to perform an effect that suits the taste of the player, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced. Furthermore, by structuring so that items appearing during the change involvement performance can be customized, the performance contents of the change participation performance change each time customization is performed, so that the player can enjoy the game repeatedly without becoming bored.

In this modified example, the items that appear during the transformation involvement effect can be customized on the mobile terminal, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the items may be customized on the gaming machine, for example. Specifically, for example, in the linked service setting menu (Fig. 191(a)), instead of "password input", "customize settings" is displayed, and when "customize settings" is selected, the item list screen is displayed. In this item list screen, the items that appear during the change participation effect may be customized.
In addition, in this modified example, the game history can be viewed on the gaming machine by selecting "view game history" in the linked service setting menu. You can do it. In this case, customization of the item by entering the password may be omitted. Specifically, for example, instead of "enter password" in the interlocking service setting menu, "game history storage start" is displayed, and when "game history storage start" is selected, the game history from the time of selection is displayed. Stores information (such as the number of jackpots and the number of games played). When the game ends, a two-dimensional code is issued as shown in FIGS. 191(d) to (f), and the game history can be viewed on the mobile terminal by accessing the web server based on this two-dimensional code. good.
In addition, all of "item customization function on mobile terminal", "item customization function on gaming machine", "game history browsing function on mobile terminal", and "game history browsing function on gaming machine" can be employed, any one of them can be employed, or an appropriate combination thereof can be employed.
In addition, password acquisition, customization settings, viewing of game history, and the like can be performed using application software or the like installed in a mobile terminal, instead of performing via a web server.

[Main processing]
In order to perform such control, the effect control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 192 in place of the main processing shown in FIG.
In this main process, effect button input processing is performed (step C9), effect custom processing is performed (step D111), and hall/player setting mode processing is performed (step C10).

[Production custom processing]
FIG. 193 shows the effect custom processing (step D111) in the main processing described above.
In this effect custom processing, first, it is determined whether or not the customer is waiting (step D121), and if it is determined that the customer is not waiting (step D121; N), the effect custom processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the customer is waiting (step D121; Y), that is, when the customer waiting screen is displayed on the display device 41, it is determined whether there has been a button operation (for example, operation of the production button 25). (step D122).
If it is determined that there is no button operation (step D122; N), the effect custom processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the button has been operated (step D122; Y), the interlocking service setting menu (see FIG. 191(a)) is displayed on the display device 41, and the "game history viewing" of the interlocking service setting menu is displayed. is selected (step D123).

When it is determined that "game history browsing" is selected (step D123; Y), game history browsing processing is performed (step D124), and the effect custom processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that "view game history" has not been selected (step D123; N), it is determined whether or not "password input" of the interlocked service setting menu has been selected (step D125).
When it is determined that "password input" has been selected (step D125; Y), a password input flag is set (step D126), password input processing is performed (step D127), and the effect custom processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that "password input" has not been selected (step D125; N), it is determined whether or not "issue two-dimensional code" of the associated service setting menu has been selected (step D128).
If it is determined that "issue two-dimensional code" is not selected (step D128; N), the effect custom processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that "issue two-dimensional code" is selected (step D128; Y), a two-dimensional code issue flag is set (step D129), two-dimensional code issue processing is performed (step D130), Terminate the production custom processing.

[Password input process]
FIG. 194 shows password input processing (step D127) in the above-described effect custom processing.
In this password input process, first, a password input screen (see FIG. 191(b)) is displayed on the display device 41, and it is determined whether "return" on the password input screen is selected (step D141). If it is determined that "return" has been selected (step D141; Y), the process proceeds to step D147. On the other hand, if it is determined that "return" has not been selected (step D141; N), it is determined whether or not the password input has been completed (step D142).
If it is determined that the password has not been entered (step D142; N), the process returns to step D141. On the other hand, if it is determined that the password input is completed (step D142; Y), that is, if "Complete" is selected on the password input screen, it is determined whether the entered password is valid. (Step D143).

If it is determined that the password is not valid (step D143; N), the process proceeds to step D147. On the other hand, if it is determined that the password is valid (step D143; Y), the password entry completion screen (see FIG. 191(c)) is displayed on the display device 41, and based on the entered password, the mobile terminal etc. are used to set the display of the customized item (weapon in the case of this modification) (step D144). Next, the input information corresponding to the entered password (that is, the game information of the player that can be deciphered from the entered password) is stored in the input information storage area in the RAM of the effect control device 300 (step D145), and input An information flag is set (step D146), and the process proceeds to step D147.
At step D147, the password input graph is reset (step D147). Next, the customer waiting screen is set to return to the customer waiting screen (step D148), and the password input process ends.

[Two-dimensional code issuing process]
FIG. 195 shows the two-dimensional code issuing process (step D130) in the effect custom process described above.
In this two-dimensional code issuance process, first, a two-dimensional code issuance confirmation screen (see FIG. 191(d)) is displayed on the display device 41, and it is determined whether "No" is selected on the two-dimensional code issuance confirmation screen. (step D151). If it is determined that "No" has been selected (step D151; N), the process proceeds to step D163. On the other hand, if it is determined that "No" is not selected (step D151; N), that is, if "Yes" is selected, the input information is loaded from the input information storage area in the RAM of the effect control device 300. (step D152).

Next, the player's game history information corresponding to the loaded input information is loaded from the game history information storage area in the RAM of the effect control device 300 (step D153), and based on the loaded input information and the loaded game history information. A two-dimensional code is generated (step D154). In the game history information storage area, game history information (information such as the number of jackpots and the number of games played) from the time a valid password is entered is stored as the game history information of the player who entered the password.
Next, the input information stored in the input information storage area (input information loaded in step D152) is discarded, and the game history information stored in the game history information storage area (game history information loaded in step D153) is discarded. is discarded (step D155). Here, "discard" means erasing information from a RAM (memory), or erasing an index such as an address for reading the information even if the information remains.

Next, a two-dimensional code display timer is set (step D156), and display settings are made for the generated two-dimensional code and the character corresponding to the loaded game history information (step D157). As a result, the two-dimensional code issue screen (see FIG. 191(e)) is displayed on the display device 41 . The character displayed on the two-dimensional code issuing screen is not limited to the one corresponding to the loaded game history information, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the character may be constant regardless of the loaded game history information.
Next, it is determined whether or not a predetermined button operation has been performed (step D158), and if it is determined that a predetermined button operation has been performed (step D158; Y), that is, the two-dimensional code display end confirmation screen (see FIG. 191(f)) is selected, the process proceeds to step D161. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined button has not been operated (step D158; N), the two-dimensional code display timer is updated by -1 (step D159), and it is determined whether the two-dimensional code display timer is 0. (Step D160).

If it is determined that the two-dimensional code display timer is not 0 (step D160; N), the process returns to step D158. On the other hand, when it is determined that the two-dimensional code display timer is 0 (step D160; Y), the process proceeds to step D161.
At step D161, the two-dimensional code display timer is reset (step D161). Next, the two-dimensional code and characters are discarded (step D162), and the process proceeds to step D163.
At step D163, the two-dimensional code issue flag is reset (step D163). Next, the input information flag is reset (step D164), the customer waiting screen is set to return to the customer waiting screen (step D165), and the two-dimensional code issuing process ends.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, a two-dimensional code is issued (generated) based on the input information corresponding to the password entered at the time of login. It is possible to determine whether there is For example, if the player A does not perform the two-dimensional code issuing operation when logging out of the gaming machine 10, the player B issues the two-dimensional code in the gaming machine 10 after the player A leaves the gaming machine 10. A two-dimensional code can be obtained by performing an operation. However, the two-dimensional code is not a two-dimensional code based on player B's input information, but a two-dimensional code based on player A's input information. Therefore, even if player B attempts to access the web server based on the two-dimensional code (that is, the two-dimensional code based on the input information of player A) using player B's mobile terminal, the web server side Since the dimension code is determined to be invalid and access to the web server is denied, unauthorized access to the web server by other players can be avoided.

[Production content determination process]
196 and 197 is performed instead of the effect content determination process shown in FIG.
In this effect content determination process, when it is determined at step D31 that the content of the variable effect is not the specific effect (change involvement effect) (step D31; N), and at step D45 it is determined that the effect timer has not reached 0. If so (step D45; N), the process proceeds to step D181.
Also, the pending display mode after the re-change is set (step D57), the content of the effect based on the pending display mode is set (step D58), and then the number of pending and the number of characters displayed based on the pending are stored. (Step D171). Here, "the suspension" is the special figure starting memory that triggered the execution of the variation. In the process of step D171, the number of help characters displayed on the display device 41 (or the sub-display device 42) is saved.

Next, it is determined whether the previously referenced table is a pending display table (step D172), and if it is determined that the previously referenced table is a pending display table (step D172; Y), the process proceeds to step D173. However, if it is determined that the previously referenced table is not the reserved display table (step D172; N), that is, if the previously referenced table is a special table, the process proceeds to step D176.
At step D173, No. 1, which is a specific display mode suggesting that the win is confirmed, is displayed. 5 (see FIG. 181(e)) is selected (set) (step D173). No. 5 is not selected (step D173; N), item display settings are made based on the sub effect table 1 (step D174), and the process proceeds to step D179. On the other hand, No. 5 is selected (step D173; Y), the item display setting is performed based on the sub effect table 2 (step D175), and the process proceeds to step D179.

198(a) to 198(d), sub-effect table 1: A, sub-effect table 1: B, and sub-effect table 1: C are used as the sub-effect table 1. and sub effect table 1:D are prepared. Then, as shown in FIGS. 180(a) and 180(b), which of these four types of tables is to be referred to is selected based on MODE and ACT. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 180(a), when the MODE is "5CH" and the ACT is "01H", the sub effect table 1:A is selected.
Further, as shown in FIG. 198(a), sub effect table 1:A includes a table corresponding to one character display number, a table corresponding to 2 to 5 character display numbers, and a table corresponding to 6 to 9 character display numbers. Three types of corresponding tables are provided. Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 198(b), (c), and (d), sub effect table 1:B, sub effect table 1:C, and sub effect table 1:D, each of which has three types of tables. prepared.

For example, if the MODE is "5CH", the ACT is "01H", and the number of characters to be displayed is 3, then in step D174, the sub effect table 1:A corresponding to the number of characters to be displayed is 2 to 5. Display settings for items based on Specifically, for example, as shown in the middle table of the three tables in FIG. Therefore, as the display mode of the item (weapon in the case of this modification), No. 1 item display mode, that is, the item display mode with the lowest degree of expectation (see FIG. 199(c)) is set, and No. 1 is selected with a probability of 75/250. 2 item display mode, that is, the item display mode with the second lowest degree of expectation (see FIG. 199(c)) is set, and No. 2 has a probability of 50/250. 3 item display mode, that is, the item display mode with the third lowest degree of expectation (see FIG. 199(c)) is set, and No. 3 has a probability of 0/250. 4 item display mode, that is, the item with the fourth lowest degree of expectation (see FIG. 199(c)) is set.

On the other hand, in step D175, the item display setting is performed based on the sub effect table 2, so as shown in FIG. 5 item display mode, that is, the item display mode suggesting a winning decision (see FIG. 199(c)) is set. Therefore, when the pending displays M1 and M2 are displayed in a specific display mode suggesting that the win is confirmed, an item that suggests that the win is confirmed appears.

Further, at step D176, No. 1, which is a specific display mode suggesting that the win is confirmed, is displayed. 5 (see FIG. 181(e)) is selected (set) (step D176). No. 5 is not selected (step D176; N), item display settings are made based on the sub effect table 3 (step D177), and the process proceeds to step D179. On the other hand, No. 5 is selected (step D176; Y), the item display setting is performed based on the sub effect table 4 (step D178), and the process proceeds to step D179.

199(a), the sub-effect table 3 includes a table corresponding to one character display number, a table corresponding to two to five character display numbers, and a character display. Three types of tables are prepared for 6 to 9 pieces.
For example, when the number of characters to be displayed is 3, at step D177, item display settings are performed based on the sub effect table 3 corresponding to 2 to 5 characters to be displayed. Specifically, for example, as shown in the middle table of the three tables in FIG. As the display mode of the item (weapon in the case of this modification), No. 1 item display mode is set, and No. 1 has a probability of 50/250. 2 item display mode is set, and the expectation level is No. 1 with a probability of 100/250. No. 3 item display mode is set, and No. 3 has a probability of 50/250. 4 item display modes are set.

On the other hand, in step D178, the item display setting is performed based on the sub effect table 4, so as shown in FIG. 5 item display mode, that is, the item display mode suggesting a winning decision (see FIG. 199(c)) is set. Therefore, when the pending displays M1 and M2 are displayed in a specific display mode suggesting that the win is confirmed, an item that suggests that the win is confirmed appears.
Figures 186 to 188 are No. 4 is an example when the item display mode is set.
Also, FIGS. 189(a) to (c) show No. This is an example when one item display mode is set.
Note that the correspondence between the degree of expectation and the item display mode shown in FIG. 199(c) can be changed by customization by the player.

At step D179, the content of the sub effect (reach effect on the sub display device 42) corresponding to the item set at step D174, D175, D177 or D178 is set (step D179). Next, the content of the main effect (reach effect (ready participation effect) on the display device 41) is set (step D180) based on the content of the sub effect set in step D179, and the effect timer set in step D42 is set. After resetting (step D59), the process proceeds to step D181.
At step D181, it is determined whether or not the input information flag is set (step D181), and if the input information flag is not set (step D181; N), the effect content determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the input information flag is set (step D181;: Y), the game history information is updated based on the game result (step D182), and the effect content determination process is terminated. In the processing of step D182, the game history information of the player corresponding to the input information stored in the input information storage area (that is, the player who entered the password) is updated.

In addition, in this modification, the number of characters to be displayed (displayed Although a plurality of types of tables are prepared according to the number of help characters), the number of displayed characters can be changed as appropriate. For example, it is possible to prepare a plurality of types of tables corresponding to character points. Here, "character points" means the total points given based on the displayed helper characters. It can be acquired by giving points for each and adding up the given points.

According to the gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the second embodiment, based on the number of starting memory displays (number of characters displayed) displayed in the specific display mode, a predetermined effect (in the case of this modification, reach production mode determination means (production control device 300) for determining the production mode of production), and production execution means (production control device 300) executes a predetermined production in the production mode determined by the production mode determination means. It is configurable.
Specifically, in the case of this modification, for example, as shown in FIGS. 198(a) to (d) and FIG. The item to appear during the change participation effect executed in ) has been determined.
By configuring in this way, since the effect mode of the predetermined effect changes according to the number of start memory displays displayed in the specific display mode, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the first modified example of the second embodiment, the first display device (display device 41), the second display device (sub-display device 42), and the start memory means (game control device 100) a starting memory display control means (rendering control device 300) for displaying a starting memory display (unspent pending display M1) corresponding to the starting memory stored in the first display device; A production display control means (production control device 300) for displaying on at least one of the first display device and the second display device, and the production display control means provides a predetermined production (in the case of this modification, a ready-to-win production). can be displayed on the second display device, and the starting memory display control means changes the display mode of the starting memory display from the normal display mode (for example, a circle) to a specific display mode ( For example, it can be configured to change to a helper character).
With such a configuration, it is possible to perform a novel effect in which the starting memory display displayed on the first display device is involved in a predetermined effect displayed on the second display device, thereby increasing the interest of the game. can increase

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the first modified example of the second embodiment, the effect display control means changes the effect mode of the predetermined effect according to the number of starting memory displays displayed in the specific display mode. can be configured to allow
Specifically, in the case of this modification, for example, as shown in FIGS. 198(a) to (d) and FIG. The items to appear during the change involvement effect that will be executed during the event have been decided.
With this configuration, the effect mode of the predetermined effect displayed on the second display device changes according to the start memory display displayed on the first display device, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced. can.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the first modified example of the second embodiment, the effect display control means can display a predetermined effect on the first display device and the second display device. It is possible to configure the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be displayed on the first display device to be changed according to the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be displayed on the display device.
Specifically, in the case of this modification, for example, as shown in FIGS. But I am making it appear.
With this configuration, the predetermined effect displayed on the first display device and the predetermined effect displayed on the second display device are related to each other, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced. can.

[Second modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described second embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are given the same reference numerals and explanations thereof are omitted, and mainly different I will explain the part. In the gaming machine of this modification, as a change participation effect, the pending displays M1 and M2 displayed on the display device 41 change to help characters, and the help characters are special figure fluctuation display game effects (for example, Instead of the effect of participating in the ready-to-win effect), the pending displays M1 and M2 displayed on the display device 41 change to displays (in the case of this modification, arrows) suggesting the effective number of button operations, and according to the display The difference is that the player's button operation performs an effect that intervenes in the effect of the special figure fluctuation display game (eg, reach effect).
In this modified example, the change participation effect is performed during the ready-to-win effect. The change involvement effect of this modification includes a launch promotion effect and a button effect.

FIG. 200 shows an example of a ready-to-win effect that is characteristic of the gaming machine 10 of this modified example, that is, an example of a ready-to-win effect that accompanies a change involvement effect.
When reach occurs as shown in FIG. 200(a), the change involvement effect is started, and first, the launch promotion effect is started as shown in FIG. 200(b). At the start of the launch promotion presentation, the digestion pending display M2 changes to an arrow indicating the effective number of button operations. Further, when the unfired pending display M1 generated before the start of the firing promotion effect is displayed on the display device 41, the unfired pending display M1 also changes to an arrow indicating the effective number of button operations. . That is, at the start of the launch promoting effect, the display mode of the in-digestion pending display M2 and the display mode of the undigested pending display M1 generated before the start of the firing promoting effect are changed from the normal display mode (for example, circle). It changes to a specific display mode (for example, an arrow).
Then, when the new special figure start memory is stored, as shown in FIG. displayed at a preset fixed position.

Next, when the launch promotion effect is completed, the image of the target and the main character, which is the effect image for the change involvement effect, is displayed on the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 200(d). At the end of the launch promotion presentation, the undigested pending display M1 generated during the launch promotion presentation changes to an arrow indicating the effective number of button operations. That is, at the end of the firing promotion presentation, the display mode of the undigested pending display M1 generated during the firing promotion presentation changes from the normal display mode (for example, circle) to the specific display mode (for example, arrow).
In this example, a total of three arrows are displayed as shown in FIG. 200(d), suggesting that the number of effective button operations is three.

Here, in this modification, the in-digestion pending display M2 and the undigested pending display M1 generated before the start of the launch promotion effect are replaced with a first specific display mode (for example, one arrows), and the undigested pending display M1 generated during the launch promotion presentation is changed to a second specific display mode (e.g., two arrows) suggesting that the number of effective button operations is two. there is In this way, when the reserve is accumulated during the launch promoting effect, the effect of the launch promoting effect can be increased by giving a larger privilege to the player.
It should be noted that the specific display mode of the undigested pending display M1 generated during the firing promotion effect, that is, the second specific display mode is not limited to the display mode suggesting that the number of valid button operations is two. Any display mode that suggests a plurality of times may be used.
In addition, the in-digestion pending display M2 is changed to a first specific display mode suggesting that the button operation is valid once, and the non-digested pending display M1 is generated before the launch promotion presentation or during the launch promotion presentation. Regardless, it is also possible to change to the second specific display mode suggesting that the number of effective button operations is plural.
It is also possible to change the in-digestion pending display M2 and the undigested pending display M1 (including the undigested pending display M1 generated during the launch promotion presentation) to the same specific display mode.

Next, a button effect is started in which the player's button operation (operation of the effect button 25 in this modification) can intervene in the ready-to-win effect. In this example, as the button effect, as shown in FIGS. 170(e) and 170(f), the display mode of the pending displays M1 and M2 returns from the specific display mode to the normal display mode, and the displayed target starts to move. The arrow is directed to the target and fired according to the button operation. During the button effect, a button image representing the effect button 25 and a notification display (time bar) indicating the remaining button operation valid period are displayed in a predetermined portion (in this example, the lower right corner) of the display area of the display device 41. to be displayed. Further, during the button effect, a notification display indicating the remaining number of arrows, that is, the remaining number of effective button operations is also displayed in a predetermined portion (upper right corner in this example) of the display area of the display device 41 .

Next, when the variation is hit variation, when the production button 25 is operated at a predetermined hit timing, the arrow shot in response to the operation hits as shown in FIG. 200(g). At the same time, a plurality of central movable effect members 900 , 910 , 920 , 930 divided into four are combined in front of the display device 41 . Then, the button effect ends, the change participation effect ends, and a fanfare effect corresponding to the kind of big win is performed as shown in FIG. 200(h).
In this example, as shown in FIGS. 200(e) to 200(h), an undigested pending display M1 generated during the button effect is displayed. The undigested pending display M1 is different from the normal display mode and the specific display mode (in this example, , normal display mode and special normal display mode with different colored circles). The undigested pending display M1 generated during the button presentation is changed to a normal display mode with the fanfare presentation as a trigger when the variation is a winning variation, and when the variation is a losing variation, the variation is stopped. Triggered by (symbol stop), the display mode becomes normal.
It should be noted that the timing at which the undigested pending display M1 that occurs during the button effect becomes the normal display mode can be changed as appropriate. A display mode may be used.

When the variation is hit variation and the performance button 25 is not operated at a predetermined hit timing during the button performance, a performance (resurrection performance) for forcibly hitting the arrow is performed. Also good. A specific example thereof is shown in FIG. ``When the production button 25 is not operated at the hitting timing'' means, for example, when the operation timing of the production button 25 does not match the hitting timing, or when the production button 25 is not operated during the button valid period. is.
As shown in FIG. 201(a), when the button operation valid period expires without the arrow hitting the target, the button effect ends, and the main character shoots the arrow toward the target as shown in FIG. 201(b). As shown in FIG. 201(c), a resurrection effect is performed in which the arrow shot by the main character hits the target.
Then, the change participation effect is finished, and a fanfare effect corresponding to the kind of big win is performed as shown in FIG. 201(d).

In addition, an effect for notifying the hitting timing may be performed during the button effect. A specific example thereof is shown in FIG. In the case of this modification, the target is displayed in a specific portion (the portion defined by the central movable effect members 900, 910, 920, 930 in the operation completed state (state shown in FIG. 15)) of the display area of the display device 41. If the effect button 25 is operated when the arrow hits, the hitting timing is the timing at which the target is displayed in the specific portion.
In the example shown in FIG. 202, the central movable effect members 900, 910, 920, 930 are slightly moved, that is, the central movable effect members 900, 910, 920, 930 are in the initial state (the state shown in FIG. 14) and the initial state. , and the operation completion state, the timing at which the target is displayed in a specific portion of the display area of the display device 41 is notified.

[Production content determination process]
In order to perform such control, the effect control device 300 performs the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 203 instead of the effect content determination process shown in FIG.
In this effect content determination process, after the processes of steps D31 to D33 are performed, a first reserved display mode (first specific display mode) for a specific effect (change involvement effect) is set (step D211), and step D40. ~D47 is processed. By the process of step D211, at the start of the launch promoting effect, the display mode of the in-digestion pending display M2 and the display mode of the undigested pending display M1 generated before the start of the launch promoting effect are changed to the normal display mode (for example, circle) to a first specific display mode (for example, a single arrow).

Then, in step D47, when it is determined that the number of reservations has not increased (step D47; N), that is, when a new special figure start memory is not stored during the launch promotion effect, the process of step D213 Transition. On the other hand, in step D47, if it is determined that the number of reservations has increased (step D47; Y), that is, if a new special figure start memory is stored during the launch promotion effect, a specific effect (variation involvement effect ) is set (step D212), and the process proceeds to step D213. Through the process of step D212, at the end of the launch promotion effect, the display mode of the undigested pending display M1 generated during the launch promotion effect is changed from the normal display mode (eg, circle) to the second specific display mode (eg, 2). It will change into a book arrow).

In step D213, the valid period of the button (valid period of button operation) is set in the valid period timer (step D213). Next, based on the button effective period, set a movable role timer, which is a timer used for controlling the movable role (the central movable effect members 900, 910, 920, 930 in the case of this modification) (step D214), Based on the first reserved display mode (first specific display mode) and the second reserved display mode (second specific display mode), a button counter value (effective number of button operations) is set (step D215).
Next, the processing of steps D57 and D59 is performed, and the effect content determination processing ends.

[Production button operation production processing]
Also, in the effect control device 300, in the effect button input process (step C9) of the main process shown in FIG. 120, the effect button operation effect process shown in FIG. 204 is performed.
In this effect button operation effect process, first, it is determined whether the button effect is being performed (step D221), and when it is determined that the button effect is not being performed (step D221; N), the effect button operation effect process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the button effect is being performed (step D221; Y), it is determined whether or not there is a button operation (for example, operation of the effect button 25) (step D222).
If it is determined that the button has been operated (step D222; Y), the process proceeds to step D226. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no button operation (step D222; N), the valid period timer is updated by -1 (step D223), the movable accessory timer is updated by -1 (step D224), and the valid period timer is 0 (step D225).
If it is determined that the effective period timer is 0 (step D225; Y), the process proceeds to step D226, and if it is determined that the effective period timer is not 0 (step D225; N), the effect button is operated. Terminate the production process.

At step D226, it is determined whether or not the variation is a winning variation (step D226). If it is determined that the variation is not a winning variation (step D226; N), that is, if the variation is a losing variation, it is determined whether the button counter value is 0 (step D227).
If it is determined that the button counter value is 0 (step D227; Y), the process proceeds to step D245. On the other hand, if it is determined that the button counter value is not 0 (step D227; N), it is determined whether the effective period timer is 0 (step D228).
If it is determined that the effective period timer is 0 (step D228; Y), the process proceeds to step D245. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effective period timer is not 0 (step D228; N), the button counter value is updated by -1 (step D229), the effective period timer is updated by -1 (step D230), and the movable accessory The timer is updated by -1 (step D231), and it is determined whether the button counter value is 0 (step D232).

If it is determined that the button counter value is 0 (step D232; Y), the process proceeds to step D245. On the other hand, if it is determined that the button counter value is not 0 (step D232; N), it is determined whether the effective period timer is 0 (step D233).
If it is determined that the effective period timer is 0 (step D233; Y), the process proceeds to step D245. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effective period timer is not 0 (step D233; N), it is determined whether the movable accessory timer is 0 (step D234).
When it is determined that the movable accessory timer is 0 (step D234; Y), the process proceeds to step D245. On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable accessory timer is not 0 (step D234; N), the effect button operation effect processing is terminated.

If it is determined at step D226 that the variation is a hit variation (step D226; Y), it is determined whether the button counter value is 0 (step D235).
When it is determined that the button counter value is 0 (step D235; Y), for example, a resurrection effect as shown in FIGS. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the button counter value is not 0 (step D235; N), it is determined whether the effective period timer is 0 (step D236).
When it is determined that the validity period timer is 0 (step D236; Y), a resurrection effect is performed (step D237), and the process proceeds to step D245. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effective period timer is not 0 (step D236; N), it is determined whether the operation timing of the button operation matches the predetermined timing (hitting timing) (step D238).

When it is determined that the operation timing of the button operation matches the predetermined timing (hitting timing) (step D238; Y), the process proceeds to step D245. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation timing of the button operation does not match the predetermined timing (hitting timing) (step D238;: N), the button counter value is updated by -1 (step D239), and the effective period timer is set. -1 is updated (step D240), the movable accessory timer is updated by -1 (step D241), and it is determined whether the button counter value is 0 (step D242).
When it is determined that the button counter value is 0 (step D242; Y), a resurrection effect is performed (step D237), and the process proceeds to step D245. On the other hand, if it is determined that the button counter value is not 0 (step D242; N), it is determined whether the effective period timer is 0 (step D243).

When it is determined that the validity period timer is 0 (step D243; Y), a resurrection effect is performed (step D237), and the process proceeds to step D245. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effective period timer is not 0 (step D243; N), it is determined whether the movable accessory timer is 0 (step D244).
When it is determined that the movable accessory timer is 0 (step D244; Y), a resurrection effect is performed (step D237), and the process proceeds to step D245. On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable accessory timer is not 0 (step D244; N), the effect button operation effect processing is terminated.
At step D245, the button counter value is reset (step D245). Next, the effective period timer is reset (step D246), the movable accessory timer is reset (step D247), and the effect button operation effect processing is terminated.

According to the gaming machine 10 of the second modified example of the second embodiment, the starting memory display control means changes the display mode of the starting memory display to the normal display mode, for example, as shown in FIGS. It is possible to change from (for example, a circle) to a specific display mode (for example, an arrow) related to a predetermined effect (in the case of this modification, a ready-to-win effect).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform a novel effect that the start memory display participates in a predetermined effect (in the case of this modification, determines the effective number of button operations in the ready-to-win effect), so that the game is interesting. can increase

It should be noted that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the above-described embodiment, and may be other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, majang ball gaming machines, and the like. can be applied to all gaming machines that use game balls. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. The slot machines are not limited to slot machines using medals, but include all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. Also, the configurations of the above-described embodiments and modifications can be appropriately combined and applied.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

10 game machine 36 first start winning port (start winning area)
37 Ordinary Variable Winning Device (Starting Winning Area)
41 display device (first display device)
42 Sub display device (second display device)
97 2nd starting prize mouth (starting prize area)
100 game control device (start storage means)
300 effect control device (start memory display control means, effect execution means, effect mode determination means, launch promotion effect execution means, effect display control means)
M1 Undigested pending display (starting memory display)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine equipped with a variable prize winning device that is converted to an open state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
The operation mode of the variable winning device includes a first opening mode and a second opening mode different from the first opening mode,
a display means capable of displaying an effect related to a game;
Production control means capable of controlling the display means;
a storage means for storing information related to winning of the variable winning device;
The effect control means is capable of displaying, on the display means, an effect display related to winning of the variable winning device in a game state advantageous to the player,
The storage means can store the information related to the first release mode and the information related to the second release mode in separate storage areas ,
A gaming machine, wherein the information related to the winning of the variable winning device is updated when a game ball wins the variable winning device .

Images